# Official Journal L 199/2008

| | ISSN 1725-2555 |
| --- | --- |
| Official Journal
  of the European Union | L 199 |
| | |
| English edition | Legislation | Volume 5128 July 2008 |

ISSN 1725-2555

Official Journal

of the European Union

L 199

English edition

Legislation

Volume 5128 July 2008

---

| Contents | | I   Acts adopted under the EC Treaty/Euratom Treaty whose publication is obligatory | page |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |
| | | REGULATIONS |
| | * | Commission Regulation (EC) No 692/2008 of 18 July 2008 implementing and amending Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 of the European Parliament and of the Council on type-approval of motor vehicles with respect to emissions from light passenger and commercial vehicles (Euro 5 and Euro 6) and on access to vehicle repair and maintenance information (
  1
  ) | 1 |

Contents

I   Acts adopted under the EC Treaty/Euratom Treaty whose publication is obligatory

page

REGULATIONS

*

Commission Regulation (EC) No 692/2008 of 18 July 2008 implementing and amending Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 of the European Parliament and of the Council on type-approval of motor vehicles with respect to emissions from light passenger and commercial vehicles (Euro 5 and Euro 6) and on access to vehicle repair and maintenance information (
  1
  )

1

1

| | |
| --- | --- |
| | (1)   Text with EEA relevance |

---

(1)   Text with EEA relevance

1

| EN | Acts whose titles are printed in light type are those relating to day-to-day management of agricultural matters, and are generally valid for a limited period.
  The titles of all other Acts are printed in bold type and preceded by an asterisk. |
| --- | --- |

EN

Acts whose titles are printed in light type are those relating to day-to-day management of agricultural matters, and are generally valid for a limited period.

The titles of all other Acts are printed in bold type and preceded by an asterisk.

---

I Acts adopted under the EC Treaty/Euratom Treaty whose publication is obligatory

REGULATIONS

| 28.7.2008 | EN | Official Journal of the European Union | L 199/1 |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/1

---

COMMISSION REGULATION (EC) No 692/2008

of 18 July 2008

implementing and amending Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 of the European Parliament and of the Council on type-approval of motor vehicles with respect to emissions from light passenger and commercial vehicles (Euro 5 and Euro 6) and on access to vehicle repair and maintenance information

(Text with EEA relevance)

THE COMMISSION OF THE EUROPEAN COMMUNITIES,

Having regard to the Treaty establishing the European Community, and in particular Article 95 thereof,

Having regard to Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 20 June 2007 on type-approval of motor vehicles with respect to emissions from light passenger and commercial vehicles (Euro 5 and Euro 6) and on access to vehicle repair and maintenance information (1), and in particular Articles 4(4), 5(3) and 8 thereof

Whereas:

| (1) | Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 is one of the separate regulatory acts under the type-approval procedure laid down by Council Directive 70/156/EEC of 6 February 1970 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the type-approval of motor vehicles and their trailers (2). |
| --- | --- |

(1)

Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 is one of the separate regulatory acts under the type-approval procedure laid down by Council Directive 70/156/EEC of 6 February 1970 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the type-approval of motor vehicles and their trailers (2).

| (2) | Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 requires new light-duty vehicles to comply with new emission limits and makes additional requirements on access to information. The technical requirements take effect in two stages, Euro 5 starting from 1 September 2009 and Euro 6 from 1 September 2014. The specific technical provisions necessary to implement that Regulation should be adopted. Therefore, the present Regulation aims at setting the requirements necessary for the type-approval of Euro 5 and 6 specification vehicles. |
| --- | --- |

(2)

Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 requires new light-duty vehicles to comply with new emission limits and makes additional requirements on access to information. The technical requirements take effect in two stages, Euro 5 starting from 1 September 2009 and Euro 6 from 1 September 2014. The specific technical provisions necessary to implement that Regulation should be adopted. Therefore, the present Regulation aims at setting the requirements necessary for the type-approval of Euro 5 and 6 specification vehicles.

| (3) | Article 5 of Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 provides for specific technical requirements relating to the control of emissions from vehicles to be set in its implementing legislation. Therefore, it is appropriate to adopt such requirements. |
| --- | --- |

(3)

Article 5 of Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 provides for specific technical requirements relating to the control of emissions from vehicles to be set in its implementing legislation. Therefore, it is appropriate to adopt such requirements.

| (4) | Following the adoption of the main requirements for type approval in Regulation (EC) No 715/2007, it is necessary to establish administrative provisions for EC type-approval of light duty vehicles. These administrative requirements include provisions for conformity of production and in-service conformity to ensure continued good performance of production vehicles. |
| --- | --- |

(4)

Following the adoption of the main requirements for type approval in Regulation (EC) No 715/2007, it is necessary to establish administrative provisions for EC type-approval of light duty vehicles. These administrative requirements include provisions for conformity of production and in-service conformity to ensure continued good performance of production vehicles.

| (5) | In accordance with Article 11 of Regulation (EC) No 715/2007, it is necessary to establish requirements for type approval of replacement pollution control devices so as to ensure that they function correctly. |
| --- | --- |

(5)

In accordance with Article 11 of Regulation (EC) No 715/2007, it is necessary to establish requirements for type approval of replacement pollution control devices so as to ensure that they function correctly.

| (6) | In accordance with Articles 6 and 7 of Regulation (EC) No 715/2007, it is also necessary to establish requirements to ensure that vehicle on board diagnostic (OBD) and vehicle repair and maintenance information is readily accessible, so as to ensure that independent operators have access to such information. |
| --- | --- |

(6)

In accordance with Articles 6 and 7 of Regulation (EC) No 715/2007, it is also necessary to establish requirements to ensure that vehicle on board diagnostic (OBD) and vehicle repair and maintenance information is readily accessible, so as to ensure that independent operators have access to such information.

| (7) | In accordance with Regulation (EC) No 715/2007, the measures provided for in this Regulation regarding access to vehicle repair and maintenance information, information for diagnostic tools and the compatibility of replacement parts with vehicle OBD systems, should not be restricted to emissions-related components and systems but cover all aspects of a vehicle subject to type-approval within the scope of this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

(7)

In accordance with Regulation (EC) No 715/2007, the measures provided for in this Regulation regarding access to vehicle repair and maintenance information, information for diagnostic tools and the compatibility of replacement parts with vehicle OBD systems, should not be restricted to emissions-related components and systems but cover all aspects of a vehicle subject to type-approval within the scope of this Regulation.

| (8) | As provided by Article 14(2) of Regulation (EC) No 715/2007, recalibrated limit values for particulate mass and new limit values for number of particles emitted are introduced. |
| --- | --- |

(8)

As provided by Article 14(2) of Regulation (EC) No 715/2007, recalibrated limit values for particulate mass and new limit values for number of particles emitted are introduced.

| (9) | The measures provided for in this Regulation are in accordance with the opinion of the Technical Committee — Motor Vehicles established by Article 40 of Directive 2007/46/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 5 September 2007 establishing a framework for the approval of motor vehicles and their trailers, and of systems, components and separate technical units intended for such vehicles (Framework Directive) (3). |
| --- | --- |

(9)

The measures provided for in this Regulation are in accordance with the opinion of the Technical Committee — Motor Vehicles established by Article 40 of Directive 2007/46/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 5 September 2007 establishing a framework for the approval of motor vehicles and their trailers, and of systems, components and separate technical units intended for such vehicles (Framework Directive) (3).

| (10) | A Forum should be established to examine any concerns raised regarding the implementation of section 2.2 of Annex XIV, concerning access information relating to vehicle security features. The information exchange in the Forum should help to reduce the risk of misuse of vehicle security information. Due to the sensitivity of the subject matter it might be necessary to keep discussions and findings of the Forum confidential. |
| --- | --- |

(10)

A Forum should be established to examine any concerns raised regarding the implementation of section 2.2 of Annex XIV, concerning access information relating to vehicle security features. The information exchange in the Forum should help to reduce the risk of misuse of vehicle security information. Due to the sensitivity of the subject matter it might be necessary to keep discussions and findings of the Forum confidential.

HAS ADOPTED THIS REGULATION:

Article 1

Subject matter

This Regulation lays down measures for the implementation of Articles 4, 5 and 8 of Regulation (EC) No 715/2007.

Article 2

Definitions

For the purposes of this Regulation, the following definitions shall apply:

| 1. | ‘vehicle type with regard to emissions and vehicle repair and maintenance information’ means a group of vehicles which do not differ in the following respects:






  (a) | the equivalent inertia determined in relation to the reference mass as provided for in paragraph 5.1 of Annex 4 of UN/ECE Regulation 83 (4); |
| --- | --- | --- |

1.

‘vehicle type with regard to emissions and vehicle repair and maintenance information’ means a group of vehicles which do not differ in the following respects:

(a)

the equivalent inertia determined in relation to the reference mass as provided for in paragraph 5.1 of Annex 4 of UN/ECE Regulation 83 (4);

4

| (b) | the engine and vehicle characteristics as set out in Appendix 3 of Annex I; |
| --- | --- |

(b)

the engine and vehicle characteristics as set out in Appendix 3 of Annex I;

| 2. | ‘EC type-approval of a vehicle with regard to emissions and vehicle repair and maintenance information’ means an EC type-approval of a vehicle with regard to its tailpipe emissions, crankcase emissions, evaporative emissions, fuel consumption and access to vehicle OBD and vehicle repair and maintenance information; |
| --- | --- |

2.

‘EC type-approval of a vehicle with regard to emissions and vehicle repair and maintenance information’ means an EC type-approval of a vehicle with regard to its tailpipe emissions, crankcase emissions, evaporative emissions, fuel consumption and access to vehicle OBD and vehicle repair and maintenance information;

| 3. | ‘gaseous pollutants’ means the exhaust gas emissions of carbon monoxide, oxides of nitrogen, expressed in nitrogen dioxide (NO2) equivalent, and hydrocarbons with the following ratio:






  (a) | C1H1,89O0,016 for petrol (E5); |
| --- | --- | --- |

3.

‘gaseous pollutants’ means the exhaust gas emissions of carbon monoxide, oxides of nitrogen, expressed in nitrogen dioxide (NO2) equivalent, and hydrocarbons with the following ratio:

2

(a)

C1H1,89O0,016 for petrol (E5);

1

1,89

0,016

| (b) | C1H1,86O0,005 for diesel (B5); |
| --- | --- |

(b)

C1H1,86O0,005 for diesel (B5);

1

1,86

0,005

| (c) | C1H2,525 for liquefied petroleum gas (LPG); |
| --- | --- |

(c)

C1H2,525 for liquefied petroleum gas (LPG);

1

2,525

| (d) | CH4 for natural gas (NG) and biomethane; |
| --- | --- |

(d)

CH4 for natural gas (NG) and biomethane;

4

| (e) | C1H2,74O0,385 for ethanol (E85); |
| --- | --- |

(e)

C1H2,74O0,385 for ethanol (E85);

1

2,74

0,385

| 4. | ‘starting aid’ means glow plugs, modifications to the injection timing and other devices which assist the engine to start without enrichment of the air/fuel mixture of the engine; |
| --- | --- |

4.

‘starting aid’ means glow plugs, modifications to the injection timing and other devices which assist the engine to start without enrichment of the air/fuel mixture of the engine;

| 5. | ‘engine capacity’ means either of the following:






  (a) | for reciprocating piston engines, the nominal engine swept volume; |
| --- | --- | --- |

5.

‘engine capacity’ means either of the following:

(a)

for reciprocating piston engines, the nominal engine swept volume;

| (b) | for rotary piston (Wankel) engines, double the nominal engine swept volume; |
| --- | --- |

(b)

for rotary piston (Wankel) engines, double the nominal engine swept volume;

| 6. | ‘periodically regenerating system’ means catalytic converters, particulate filters or other pollution control devices that require a periodical regeneration process in less than 4 000 km of normal vehicle operation |
| --- | --- |

6.

‘periodically regenerating system’ means catalytic converters, particulate filters or other pollution control devices that require a periodical regeneration process in less than 4 000 km of normal vehicle operation

| 7. | ‘original replacement pollution control device’ means a pollution control device or an assembly of pollution control devices whose types are indicated in Appendix 4 to Annex I to this Regulation but are offered on the market as separate technical units by the holder of the vehicle type-approval; |
| --- | --- |

7.

‘original replacement pollution control device’ means a pollution control device or an assembly of pollution control devices whose types are indicated in Appendix 4 to Annex I to this Regulation but are offered on the market as separate technical units by the holder of the vehicle type-approval;

| 8. | ‘type of pollution control device’ means catalytic converters and particulate filters which do not differ in any of the following essential aspects:






  (a) | number of substrates, structure and material; |
| --- | --- | --- |

8.

‘type of pollution control device’ means catalytic converters and particulate filters which do not differ in any of the following essential aspects:

(a)

number of substrates, structure and material;

| (b) | type of activity of each substrate; |
| --- | --- |

(b)

type of activity of each substrate;

| (c) | volume, ratio of frontal area and substrate length; |
| --- | --- |

(c)

volume, ratio of frontal area and substrate length;

| (d) | catalyst material content; |
| --- | --- |

(d)

catalyst material content;

| (e) | catalyst material ratio; |
| --- | --- |

(e)

catalyst material ratio;

| (f) | cell density; |
| --- | --- |

(f)

cell density;

| (g) | dimensions and shape; |
| --- | --- |

(g)

dimensions and shape;

| (h) | thermal protection; |
| --- | --- |

(h)

thermal protection;

| 9. | ‘mono fuel vehicle’ means a vehicle that is designed to run primarily on one type of fuel; |
| --- | --- |

9.

‘mono fuel vehicle’ means a vehicle that is designed to run primarily on one type of fuel;

| 10. | ‘mono fuel gas vehicle’ means a mono fuel vehicle that primarily runs on LPG, NG/biomethane, or hydrogen but may also have a petrol system for emergency purposes or starting only, where the petrol tank does not contain more than 15 litres of petrol; |
| --- | --- |

10.

‘mono fuel gas vehicle’ means a mono fuel vehicle that primarily runs on LPG, NG/biomethane, or hydrogen but may also have a petrol system for emergency purposes or starting only, where the petrol tank does not contain more than 15 litres of petrol;

| 11. | ‘bi fuel vehicle’ means a vehicle with two separate fuel storage systems that can run part-time on two different fuels and is designed to run on only one fuel at a time; |
| --- | --- |

11.

‘bi fuel vehicle’ means a vehicle with two separate fuel storage systems that can run part-time on two different fuels and is designed to run on only one fuel at a time;

| 12. | ‘bi fuel gas vehicle’ means a bi fuel vehicle that can run on petrol and also on either LPG, NG/biomethane or hydrogen; |
| --- | --- |

12.

‘bi fuel gas vehicle’ means a bi fuel vehicle that can run on petrol and also on either LPG, NG/biomethane or hydrogen;

| 13. | ‘flex fuel vehicle’ means a vehicle with one fuel storage system that can run on different mixtures of two or more fuels; |
| --- | --- |

13.

‘flex fuel vehicle’ means a vehicle with one fuel storage system that can run on different mixtures of two or more fuels;

| 14. | ‘flex fuel ethanol vehicle’ means a flex fuel vehicle that can run on petrol or a mixture of petrol and ethanol up to an 85 % ethanol blend (E85); |
| --- | --- |

14.

‘flex fuel ethanol vehicle’ means a flex fuel vehicle that can run on petrol or a mixture of petrol and ethanol up to an 85 % ethanol blend (E85);

| 15. | ‘flex fuel biodiesel vehicle’ means a flex fuel vehicle that can run on mineral diesel or a mixture of mineral diesel and biodiesel; |
| --- | --- |

15.

‘flex fuel biodiesel vehicle’ means a flex fuel vehicle that can run on mineral diesel or a mixture of mineral diesel and biodiesel;

| 16. | ‘hybrid electric vehicle (HEV)’ means a vehicle that, for the purpose of mechanical propulsion, draws energy from both of the following on-vehicle sources of stored energy/power:






  (a) | a consumable fuel; |
| --- | --- | --- |

16.

‘hybrid electric vehicle (HEV)’ means a vehicle that, for the purpose of mechanical propulsion, draws energy from both of the following on-vehicle sources of stored energy/power:

(a)

a consumable fuel;

| (b) | battery, capacitor, flywheel/generator or other electrical energy/power storage device; |
| --- | --- |

(b)

battery, capacitor, flywheel/generator or other electrical energy/power storage device;

| 17. | ‘properly maintained and used’ means, for the purpose of a test vehicle, that such a vehicle satisfies the criteria for acceptance of a selected vehicle laid down in section 2 of Appendix 1 to Annex II; |
| --- | --- |

17.

‘properly maintained and used’ means, for the purpose of a test vehicle, that such a vehicle satisfies the criteria for acceptance of a selected vehicle laid down in section 2 of Appendix 1 to Annex II;

| 18. | ‘emission control system’ means, in the context of the OBD system, the electronic engine management controller and any emission-related component in the exhaust or evaporative system which supplies an input to or receives an output from this controller; |
| --- | --- |

18.

‘emission control system’ means, in the context of the OBD system, the electronic engine management controller and any emission-related component in the exhaust or evaporative system which supplies an input to or receives an output from this controller;

| 19. | ‘malfunction indicator (MI)’ means a visible or audible indicator that clearly informs the driver of the vehicle in the event of a malfunction of any emission-related component connected to the OBD system, or of the OBD system itself; |
| --- | --- |

19.

‘malfunction indicator (MI)’ means a visible or audible indicator that clearly informs the driver of the vehicle in the event of a malfunction of any emission-related component connected to the OBD system, or of the OBD system itself;

| 20. | ‘malfunction’ means the failure of an emission-related component or system that would result in emissions exceeding the limits in section 3.3.2 of Annex XI or if the OBD system is unable to fulfil the basic monitoring requirements set out in Annex XI; |
| --- | --- |

20.

‘malfunction’ means the failure of an emission-related component or system that would result in emissions exceeding the limits in section 3.3.2 of Annex XI or if the OBD system is unable to fulfil the basic monitoring requirements set out in Annex XI;

| 21. | ‘secondary air’ means the air introduced into the exhaust system by means of a pump or aspirator valve or other means that is intended to aid in the oxidation of HC and CO contained in the exhaust gas stream; |
| --- | --- |

21.

‘secondary air’ means the air introduced into the exhaust system by means of a pump or aspirator valve or other means that is intended to aid in the oxidation of HC and CO contained in the exhaust gas stream;

| 22. | ‘driving cycle’, in respect of vehicle OBD systems, consists of engine start-up, driving mode where a malfunction would be detected if present, and engine shut-off; |
| --- | --- |

22.

‘driving cycle’, in respect of vehicle OBD systems, consists of engine start-up, driving mode where a malfunction would be detected if present, and engine shut-off;

| 23. | ‘access to information’ means the availability of all vehicle OBD and vehicle repair and maintenance information, required for the inspection, diagnosis, servicing or repair of the vehicle. |
| --- | --- |

23.

‘access to information’ means the availability of all vehicle OBD and vehicle repair and maintenance information, required for the inspection, diagnosis, servicing or repair of the vehicle.

| 24. | ‘deficiency’ means, in the context of the OBD system, that up to two separate components or systems which are monitored contain temporary or permanent operating characteristics that impair the otherwise efficient OBD monitoring of those components or systems or do not meet all of the other detailed requirements for OBD; |
| --- | --- |

24.

‘deficiency’ means, in the context of the OBD system, that up to two separate components or systems which are monitored contain temporary or permanent operating characteristics that impair the otherwise efficient OBD monitoring of those components or systems or do not meet all of the other detailed requirements for OBD;

| 25. | ‘deteriorated replacement pollution control device’ means a pollution control device as defined in Article 3(11) of Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 that has been aged or artificially deteriorated to such an extent that it fulfils the requirements laid out in Section 1 to Appendix 1 to Annex XI of UN/ECE Regulation No 83; |
| --- | --- |

25.

‘deteriorated replacement pollution control device’ means a pollution control device as defined in Article 3(11) of Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 that has been aged or artificially deteriorated to such an extent that it fulfils the requirements laid out in Section 1 to Appendix 1 to Annex XI of UN/ECE Regulation No 83;

| 26. | ‘vehicle OBD information’ means information relating to an on-board diagnostic system for any electronic system on the vehicle |
| --- | --- |

26.

‘vehicle OBD information’ means information relating to an on-board diagnostic system for any electronic system on the vehicle

| 27. | ‘reagent’ means any product other than fuel that is stored on-board the vehicle and is provided to the exhaust after-treatment system upon request of the emission control system; |
| --- | --- |

27.

‘reagent’ means any product other than fuel that is stored on-board the vehicle and is provided to the exhaust after-treatment system upon request of the emission control system;

| 28. | ‘mass of the vehicle in running order’ means the mass described in point 2.6 of Annex I to Directive 2007/46/EC; |
| --- | --- |

28.

‘mass of the vehicle in running order’ means the mass described in point 2.6 of Annex I to Directive 2007/46/EC;

| 29. | ‘engine misfire’ means lack of combustion in the cylinder of a positive ignition engine due to absence of spark, poor fuel metering, poor compression or any other cause; |
| --- | --- |

29.

‘engine misfire’ means lack of combustion in the cylinder of a positive ignition engine due to absence of spark, poor fuel metering, poor compression or any other cause;

| 30. | ‘cold start system or device’ means a system which temporarily enriches the air/fuel mixture of the engine thus assisting the engine to start; |
| --- | --- |

30.

‘cold start system or device’ means a system which temporarily enriches the air/fuel mixture of the engine thus assisting the engine to start;

| 31. | ‘power take-off operation or unit’ means an engine-driven output provision for the purposes of powering auxiliary, vehicle mounted, equipment; |
| --- | --- |

31.

‘power take-off operation or unit’ means an engine-driven output provision for the purposes of powering auxiliary, vehicle mounted, equipment;

| 32. | ‘small volume manufacturers’ means vehicle manufacturers whose worldwide annual production is less than 10 000 units. |
| --- | --- |

32.

‘small volume manufacturers’ means vehicle manufacturers whose worldwide annual production is less than 10 000 units.

Article 3

Requirements for type-approval

1.   In order to receive an EC type-approval with regard to emissions and vehicle repair and maintenance information, the manufacturer shall demonstrate that the vehicles comply with the test procedures specified in Annexes III to VIII, X to XII, XIV and XVI to this Regulation. The manufacturer shall also ensure compliance with the specifications of reference fuels set out in Annex IX to this Regulation.

2.   Vehicles shall be subject to the tests specified in Figure I.2.4 of Annex I.

3.   As an alternative to the requirements contained in Annexes II, III, V to XI and XVI, small volume manufacturers may request the granting of EC type-approval to a vehicle type which was approved by an authority of a third country on the basis of the legislative acts set out in Section 2.1 of Annex I.

The emissions tests for roadworthiness purposes set out in Annex IV, tests fuel consumption and CO2 emissions set out in Annex XII and the requirements for access to vehicle OBD and vehicle repair and maintenance information set out in Annex XIV shall still be required to obtain EC type-approval with regard to emissions and vehicle repair and maintenance information under this paragraph.

The approval authority shall inform the Commission of the circumstances of each type approval granted under this paragraph.

4.   Specific requirements for inlets to fuel tanks and electronic system security are laid down in Section 2.2 and 2.3 of Annex I.

5.   The manufacturer shall take technical measures so as to ensure that the tailpipe and evaporative emissions are effectively limited, in accordance with this Regulation, throughout the normal life of the vehicle and under normal conditions of use.

These measures shall include ensuring that the security of hoses, joints and connections, used within the emission control systems, are constructed so as to conform with the original design intent.

6.   The manufacturer shall ensure that the emissions test results comply with the applicable limit value under the specified test conditions of this Regulation.

7.   For the Type 2 test set out in Appendix 1 to Annex IV, at normal engine idling speed, the maximum permissible carbon monoxide content in the exhaust gases shall be that stated by the vehicle manufacturer. However, the maximum carbon monoxide content shall not exceed 0,3 % vol.

At high idle speed, the carbon monoxide content by volume of the exhaust gases shall not exceed 0,2 %, with the engine speed being at least 2 000 min-1 and Lambda being 1 ± 0,03 or in accordance with the specifications of the manufacturer.

8.   The manufacturer shall ensure that for the Type 3 test set out in Annex V, the engine’s ventilation system does not permit the emission of any crankcase gases into the atmosphere.

9.   The Type 6 test measuring emissions at low temperatures set out in Annex VIII shall not apply to diesel vehicles.

However, when applying for type-approval, manufacturers shall present to the approval authority with information showing that the NOx aftertreatment device reaches a sufficiently high temperature for efficient operation within 400 seconds after a cold start at –7 °C as described in the Type 6 test.

In addition, the manufacturer shall provide the approval authority with information on the operating strategy of the exhaust gas recirculation system (EGR), including its functioning at low temperatures.

This information shall also include a description of any effects on emissions.

The approval authority shall not grant type-approval if the information provided is insufficient to demonstrate that the aftertreatment device actually reaches a sufficiently high temperature for efficient operation within the designated period of time.

At the request of the Commission, the approval authority shall provide information on the performance of NOx aftertreatment devices and EGR system at low temperatures.

Article 4

Requirements for type-approval regarding the OBD system

1.   The manufacturer shall ensure that all vehicles are equipped with an OBD system.

2.   The OBD system shall be designed, constructed and installed on a vehicle so as to enable it to identify types of deterioration or malfunction over the entire life of the vehicle.

3.   The OBD system shall comply with the requirements of this Regulation during conditions of normal use.

4.   When tested with a defective component in accordance with Appendix 1 of Annex XI, the OBD system malfunction indicator shall be activated.

The OBD system malfunction indicator may also activate during this test at levels of emissions below the OBD thresholds limits specified in Annex XI.

5.   The manufacturer shall ensure that the OBD system complies with the requirements for in-use performance set out in section 3 of Appendix 1 to Annex XI of this Regulation under all reasonably foreseeable driving conditions.

6.   In-use performance related data to be stored and reported by a vehicle’s OBD system according to the provisions of point 3.6 of Appendix 1 to Annex XI shall be made readily available by the manufacturer to national authorities and independent operators without any encryption.

7.   Vehicles shall only be type-approved to Euro 6 emission standards once OBD thresholds have been introduced with the exception of diesel vehicles using the OBD thresholds set out in point 2.3.2 of Annex XI.

Article 5

Application for EC type-approval of a vehicle with regard to emissions and access to vehicle repair and maintenance information

1.   The manufacturer shall submit to the approval authority an application for EC type-approval of a vehicle with regard to emissions and access to vehicle repair and maintenance information.

2.   The application referred to in paragraph 1 shall be drawn up in accordance with the model of the information document set out in Appendix 3 to Annex I.

3.   In addition, the manufacturer shall submit the following information:

| (a) | in the case of vehicles equipped with positive-ignition engines, a declaration by the manufacturer of the minimum percentage of misfires out of a total number of firing events that either would result in emissions exceeding the limits given in section 2.3 of Annex XI if that percentage of misfire had been present from the start of a type 1 test as described in Annex III to this Regulation or could lead to an exhaust catalyst, or catalysts, overheating prior to causing irreversible damage; |
| --- | --- |

(a)

in the case of vehicles equipped with positive-ignition engines, a declaration by the manufacturer of the minimum percentage of misfires out of a total number of firing events that either would result in emissions exceeding the limits given in section 2.3 of Annex XI if that percentage of misfire had been present from the start of a type 1 test as described in Annex III to this Regulation or could lead to an exhaust catalyst, or catalysts, overheating prior to causing irreversible damage;

| (b) | detailed written information fully describing the functional operation characteristics of the OBD system, including a listing of all relevant parts of the emission control system of the vehicle that are monitored by the OBD system; |
| --- | --- |

(b)

detailed written information fully describing the functional operation characteristics of the OBD system, including a listing of all relevant parts of the emission control system of the vehicle that are monitored by the OBD system;

| (c) | a description of the malfunction indicator used by the OBD system to signal the presence of a fault to a driver of the vehicle; |
| --- | --- |

(c)

a description of the malfunction indicator used by the OBD system to signal the presence of a fault to a driver of the vehicle;

| (d) | a declaration by the manufacturer that the OBD system complies with the provisions of section 3 of Appendix 1 to Annex XI relating to in-use performance under all reasonably foreseeable driving conditions; |
| --- | --- |

(d)

a declaration by the manufacturer that the OBD system complies with the provisions of section 3 of Appendix 1 to Annex XI relating to in-use performance under all reasonably foreseeable driving conditions;

| (e) | a plan describing the detailed technical criteria and justification for incrementing the numerator and denominator of each monitor that must fulfil the requirements of sections 3.2 and 3.3 of Appendix 1 to Annex XI, as well as for disabling numerators, denominators and the general denominator under the conditions outlined in section 3.7 of Appendix 1 to Annex XI; |
| --- | --- |

(e)

a plan describing the detailed technical criteria and justification for incrementing the numerator and denominator of each monitor that must fulfil the requirements of sections 3.2 and 3.3 of Appendix 1 to Annex XI, as well as for disabling numerators, denominators and the general denominator under the conditions outlined in section 3.7 of Appendix 1 to Annex XI;

| (f) | a description of the provisions taken to prevent tampering with and modification of the emission control computer; |
| --- | --- |

(f)

a description of the provisions taken to prevent tampering with and modification of the emission control computer;

| (g) | if applicable, the particulars of the vehicle family as referred to in Appendix 2 to Annex XI; |
| --- | --- |

(g)

if applicable, the particulars of the vehicle family as referred to in Appendix 2 to Annex XI;

| (h) | where appropriate, copies of other type-approvals with the relevant data to enable extension of approvals and establishment of deterioration factors. |
| --- | --- |

(h)

where appropriate, copies of other type-approvals with the relevant data to enable extension of approvals and establishment of deterioration factors.

4.   For the purposes of paragraph 3(d), the manufacturer shall use the model of a manufacturer’s certificate of compliance with the OBD in-use performance requirements set out in Appendix 7 of Annex I

5.   For the purposes of paragraph 3(e), the approval authority that grants the approval shall make the information referred to in that point available to the approval authorities or the Commission upon request.

6.   For the purposes of points (d) and (e) of paragraph 3, approval authorities shall not approve a vehicle if the information submitted by the manufacturer is inappropriate for fulfilling the requirements of section 3 of Appendix 1 to Annex XI.

Sections 3.2, 3.3 and 3.7 of Appendix 1 to Annex XI shall apply under all reasonably foreseeable driving conditions.

For the assessment of the implementation of the requirements set out in the first and second subparagraphs, the approval authorities shall take into account the state of technology.

7.   For the purposes of paragraph 3(f), the provisions taken to prevent tampering with and modification of the emission control computer shall include the facility for updating using a manufacturer-approved programme or calibration.

8.   For the tests specified in Figure I.2.4 of Annex I the manufacturer shall submit to the technical service responsible for the type-approval tests a vehicle representative of the type to be approved.

9.   The application for type-approval of mono fuel, bi-fuel and flex-fuel vehicles shall comply with the additional requirements laid down in Sections 1.1 and 1.2 of Annex I.

10.   Changes to the make of a system, component or separate technical unit that occur after a type-approval shall not automatically invalidate a type approval, unless its original characteristics or technical parameters are changed in such a way that the functionality of the engine or pollution control system is affected.

Article 6

Administrative provisions for EC type-approval of a vehicle with regard to emissions and access to vehicle repair and maintenance information

1.   If all the relevant requirements are met, the approval authority shall grant an EC type-approval and issue a type-approval number in accordance with the numbering system set out in Annex VII to Directive 2007/46/EC.

Without prejudice to the provisions of Annex VII to Directive 2007/46/EC, section 3 of the type-approval number shall be drawn up in accordance with Appendix 6 to Annex I to this Regulation.

An approval authority shall not assign the same number to another vehicle type.

2.   By way of derogation from paragraph 1, at the request of the manufacturer, a vehicle with an OBD system may be accepted for type-approval with regard to emissions and vehicle repair and maintenance information, even though the system contains one or more deficiencies such that the specific requirements of Annex XI are not fully met, provided that the specific administrative provisions set out in Section 3 of that Annex are complied with.

The approval authority shall notify the decision to grant such a type approval to all approval authorities in the other Member States in accordance with the requirements set out in Article 8 of Directive 2007/46/EC.

3.   When granting an EC type approval under paragraph 1, the approval authority shall issue an EC type-approval certificate using the model set out in Appendix 4 to Annex I.

Article 7

Amendments to type-approvals

Articles 13, 14 and 16 of Directive 2007/46/EC shall apply to any amendments to the type-approvals.

At the manufacturer’s request the provisions specified in Section 3 of Annex I shall apply without the need for additional testing only to vehicles of the same type.

Article 8

Conformity of production

1.   Measures to ensure the conformity of production shall be taken in accordance with the provisions of Article 12 of Directive 2007/46/EC.

2.   Conformity of production shall be checked on the basis of the description in the type-approval certificate set out in Appendix 4 to Annex I to this Regulation.

3.   The specific provisions concerning conformity of production are laid down in Section 4 of Annex I to this Regulation and the relevant statistical methods in Appendices 1 and 2 to that Annex.

Article 9

In service conformity

1.   The provisions for in-service conformity are laid down in Annex II to this Regulation and, for vehicles type-approved under Council Directive 70/220/EEC (5), in Annex XV to this Regulation.

2.   Measures to ensure in-service conformity of vehicles type-approved under this Regulation or Directive 70/220/EEC shall be taken in accordance with Article 12 of Directive 2007/46/EC.

3.   The in-service conformity measures shall be appropriate for confirming the functionality of the pollution control devices during the normal useful life of the vehicles under normal conditions of use as specified in Annex II to this Regulation.

4.   The in-service conformity measures shall be checked for a period of up to 5 years of age or 100 000 km, whichever is the sooner.

5.   The manufacturer shall not be obliged to carry out an audit of in-service conformity if the number of vehicles sold precludes obtaining sufficient samples to test. Therefore, an audit shall not be required if the annual sales of that vehicle type are less than 5 000 across the Community.

However, the manufacturer of such small series vehicles shall provide the approval authority with a report of any emissions related warranty and repair claims and OBD faults as set out in point 2.3 of Annex II to this Regulation. In addition, the type-approval authority may require such vehicle types to be tested in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to this Regulation.

6.   With regard to vehicles type-approved under this Regulation, where the approval authority is not satisfied with the results of the tests in accordance with the criteria defined in Appendix 2 to Annex II, the remedial measures referred to in Article 30(1) and in Annex X to Directive 2007/46/EC shall be extended to vehicles in service belonging to the same vehicle type which are likely to be affected with the same defects in accordance with section 6 of Appendix 1 to Annex II.

The plan of remedial measures presented by the manufacturer according to section 6.1 of Appendix 1 of Annex II to this Regulation shall be approved by the approval authority. The manufacturer shall be responsible for the execution of the approved remedial plan.

The approval authority shall notify its decision to all Member States within 30 days. Member States may require that the same plan of remedial measures be applied to all vehicles of the same type registered in their territory.

7.   If an approval authority has established that a vehicle type does not conform to the applicable requirements of Appendix 1, it shall notify without delay the Member State which granted the original type-approval in accordance with the requirements of Article 30(3) of Directive 2007/46/EC.

Following that notification and subject to the provision of Article 30(6) of Directive 2007/46/EC, the approval authority which granted the original type-approval shall inform the manufacturer that a vehicle type fails to satisfy the requirements of these provisions and that certain measures are expected of the manufacturer. The manufacturer shall submit to that authority, within two months after this notification, a plan of measures to overcome the defects, the substance of which should correspond to the requirements of sections 6.1 to 6,8 of Appendix 1. The approval authority which granted the original type-approval shall, within two months, consult the manufacturer in order to secure agreement on a plan of measures and on the carrying out the plan. If the approval authority which granted the original type-approval establishes that no agreement can be reached, the procedure pursuant to Article 30(3) and (4) of Directive 2007/46/EC shall be initiated

Article 10

Pollution control devices

1.   The manufacturer shall ensure that replacement pollution control devices intended to be fitted to EC type-approved vehicles covered by the scope of Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 are EC type-approved, as separate technical units within the meaning of Article 10(2) of Directive 2007/46/EC, in accordance with Article 12, Article 13 and Annex XIII to this Regulation.

Catalytic converters and particulate filters shall be considered to be pollution control devices for the purposes of this Regulation.

2.   Original equipment replacement pollution control devices, which fall within the type covered by point 2.3 of the Addendum to Appendix 4 to Annex I and are intended for fitment to a vehicle to which the relevant type-approval document refers, do not need to comply with Annex XIII provided they fulfil the requirements of points 2.1 and 2.2 of that Annex.

3.   The manufacturer shall ensure that the original pollution control device carries identification markings.

4.   The identification markings referred to in paragraph 3 shall comprise the following:

| (a) | the vehicle or engine manufacturer’s name or trade mark; |
| --- | --- |

(a)

the vehicle or engine manufacturer’s name or trade mark;

| (b) | the make and identifying part number of the original pollution control device as recorded in the information mentioned in point 3.2.12.2 of Appendix 3 to Annex I. |
| --- | --- |

(b)

the make and identifying part number of the original pollution control device as recorded in the information mentioned in point 3.2.12.2 of Appendix 3 to Annex I.

Article 11

Application for EC type-approval of a type of replacement pollution control device as a separate technical unit

1.   The manufacturer shall submit to the approval authority an application for EC type-approval of a type of replacement pollution control device as a separate technical unit.

The application shall be drawn up in accordance with the model of the information document set out in Appendix 1 to Annex XIII.

2.   In addition to the requirements laid down in paragraph 1, the manufacturer shall submit to the technical service responsible for the type-approval test the following:

| (a) | a vehicle or vehicles of a type approved in accordance with this Regulation equipped with a new original equipment pollution control device |
| --- | --- |

(a)

a vehicle or vehicles of a type approved in accordance with this Regulation equipped with a new original equipment pollution control device

| (b) | one sample of the type of the replacement pollution control device |
| --- | --- |

(b)

one sample of the type of the replacement pollution control device

| (c) | an additional sample of the type of the replacement pollution control device, in the case of a replacement pollution control device intended to be fitted to a vehicle equipped with an OBD system. |
| --- | --- |

(c)

an additional sample of the type of the replacement pollution control device, in the case of a replacement pollution control device intended to be fitted to a vehicle equipped with an OBD system.

3.   For the purposes of paragraph 2(a), the test vehicles shall be selected by the applicant with the agreement of the technical service.

The test vehicles shall comply with the requirements set out in Section 3.1 of Annex 4 to UN/ECE Regulation 83.

The test vehicles shall respect the following requirements:

| (a) | they shall have no emission control system defects; |
| --- | --- |

(a)

they shall have no emission control system defects;

| (b) | any excessively worn out or malfunctioning emission-related original part shall be repaired or replaced; |
| --- | --- |

(b)

any excessively worn out or malfunctioning emission-related original part shall be repaired or replaced;

| (c) | they shall be tuned properly and set to manufacturer’s specification prior to emission testing. |
| --- | --- |

(c)

they shall be tuned properly and set to manufacturer’s specification prior to emission testing.

4.   For the purposes of points (b) and (c) of paragraph 2, the sample shall be clearly and indelibly marked with the applicant’s trade name or mark and its commercial designation.

5.   For the purposes of paragraph 2(c), the sample shall have been deteriorated as defined under point 25 of Article 2.

Article 12

Administrative provisions for EC type-approval of replacement pollution control device as separate technical unit

1.   If all the relevant requirements are met, the type approval authority shall grant an EC type-approval for replacement pollution control devices as separate technical unit and issue a type-approval number in accordance with the numbering system set out in Annex VII to Directive 2007/46/EC.

The approval authority shall not assign the same number to another replacement pollution control device type.

The same type-approval number may cover the use of that replacement pollution control device type on a number of different vehicle types.

2.   For the purposes of paragraph 1, the approval authority shall issue an EC type-approval certificate established in accordance with the model set out in Appendix 2 to Annex XIII.

3.   If the applicant for type-approval is able to demonstrate to the approval authority or technical service that the replacement pollution control device is of a type indicated in section 2.3 of the Addendum to Appendix 4 to Annex I, the granting of a type-approval shall not be dependent on verification of compliance with the requirements specified in section 4 of Annex XIII.

Article 13

Access to vehicle OBD and vehicle repair and maintenance information

1.   Manufacturers shall put in place the neccessary arrangements and procedures, in accordance with Articles 6 and 7 of Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 and Annex XIV of this regulation, to ensure that vehicle OBD and vehicle repair and maintenance information is readily accessible.

2.   Approval authorities shall only grant type-approval after receiving from the manufacturer a Certificate on Access to Vehicle OBD and Vehicle Repair and Maintenance Information.

3.   The Certificate on Access to Vehicle OBD and Vehicle Repair and Maintenance Information shall serve as the proof of compliance with Article 6(7) of Regulation (EC) No 715/2007.

4.   The Certificate on Access to Vehicle OBD and Vehicle Repair and Maintenance Information shall be drawn up in accordance with the model set out in Appendix 1 of Annex XIV.

5.   If the vehicle OBD and vehicle repair and maintenance information is not available, or does not conform to Article 6 and 7 of Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 and Annex XIV of this Regulation, when the application for type-approval is made, the manufacturer shall provide that information within six months of the relevant date set out in paragraph 2 of Article 10 of Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 or within six months of the date of type-approval, whichever date is later.

6.   The obligations to provide information within the dates specified in paragraph 5 shall apply only if, following type-approval, the vehicle is placed on the market.

When the vehicle is placed on the market more than six months after type-approval, the information shall be provided on the date on which the vehicle is placed on the market.

7.   The approval authority may presume that the manufacturer has put in place satisfactory arrangements and procedures with regard to access to vehicle OBD and vehicle repair and maintenance information, on the basis of a completed Certificate on Access to Vehicle OBD and Vehicle Repair and Maintenance Information, providing that no complaint was made, and that the manufacturer provides thise information within the period set out in paragraph 5.

8.   In addition to the requirements for the access to OBD information that are specified in Section 4 of Annex XI, the manufacturer shall make available to interested parties the following information:

| (a) | relevant information to enable the development of replacement components which are critical to the correct functioning of the OBD system. |
| --- | --- |

(a)

relevant information to enable the development of replacement components which are critical to the correct functioning of the OBD system.

| (b) | information to enable the development of generic diagnostic tools. |
| --- | --- |

(b)

information to enable the development of generic diagnostic tools.

For the purposes of point (a), the development of replacement components shall not be restricted by: the unavailability of pertinent information, the technical requirements relating to malfunction indication strategies if the OBD thresholds are exceeded or if the OBD system is unable to fulfil the basic OBD monitoring requirements of this Regulation; specific modifications to the handling of OBD information to deal independently with vehicle operation on petrol or on gas; and the type-approval of gas-fuelled vehicles that contain a limited number of minor deficiencies.

For the purposes of point (b), where manufacturers use diagnostic and test tools in accordance with ISO 22900 Modular Vehicle Communication Interface (MVCI) and ISO 22901 Open Diagnostic Data Exchange (ODX) in their franchised networks, the ODX files shall be accessible to independent operators via the web site of the manufacturer.

9.   The Forum on Access to Vehicle Information (hereafter ‘the’ Forum) is hereby established.

The Forum shall consider whether access to information affects the advances made in reducing vehicle theft and shall make recommendations for improving the requirements relating to access to information. In particular, the Forum shall advise the Commission on the introduction of an accreditation process for independent operators to be authorised to access information on vehicle security features.

The Commission may decide to keep the discussions and findings of the Forum confidential.

Article 14

Compliance with the obligations regarding access to vehicle OBD and vehicle repair and maintenance information

1.   An approval authority may, at any time, whether on its own initiative, on the basis of a complaint, or on the basis of an assessment by a technical service, check the compliance of a manufacturer with the provisions of Regulation (EC) No 715/2007, this Regulation, and the terms of the Certificate on Access to Vehicle OBD and Vehicle Repair and Maintenance Information.

2.   Where an approval authority finds that the manufacturer has failed to comply with its obligations regarding access to vehicle OBD and vehicle repair and maintenance information, the approval authority which granted the relevant type approval shall take appropriate steps to remedy the situation.

3.   These steps may include withdrawal or suspension of type-approval, fines, or other measures adopted in accordance with Article 13 of Regulation (EC) No 715/2007.

4.   The approval authority shall proceed to an audit in order to verify compliance by the manufacturer with the obligations concerning access to vehicle OBD and vehicle repair and maintenance information, if an independent operator or a trade association representing independent operators files a complaint to the approval authority.

5.   When carrying out the audit, the approval authority may ask a technical service or any other independent expert to carry out an assessment to verify whether these obligations are met.

Article 15

Special requirements regarding type approval information

1.   By way of derogation from Annex I to Council Directive 70/156/EEC (6) and until 29 April 2009, the additional requirements set out in Annex XVIII to this Regulation shall also apply.

2.   By way of derogation from Annex III to Council Directive 70/156/EEC and until 29 April 2009, the additional requirements set out in Annex XIX to this Regulation shall also apply.

Article 16

Amendments to Regulation (EC) No 715/2007

Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 is amended in accordance with Annex XVII to this Regulation.

Article 17

Entry into force

This Regulation shall enter into force on the third day following its publication in the Official Journal of the European Union.

Official Journal of the European Union

However, the obligations set out in Articles 4(5), 4(6), 5(3)(d) and 5(3)(e) shall apply from 1 September 2011 for the type-approval of new types of vehicles and from 1 January 2014 for all new vehicles sold, registered or put into service in the Community.

This Regulation shall be binding in its entirety and directly applicable in all Member States.

Done at Brussels, 18 July 2008.

For the Commission

Günter VERHEUGEN

Vice-President

---

(1)  
  OJ L 171, 29.6.2007, p. 1.

1

(2)  
  OJ L 42, 23.2.1970, p. 1 Directive as last amended by Regulation (EC) No 715/2007

2

(3)  
  OJ L 263, 9.10.2007, p. 1.

3

(4)  
  OJ L 375, 27.12.2006, p. 223.

4

(5)  
  OJ L 76, 6.4.1970, p. 1.

5

(6)  
  OJ L 42, 23.2.1970, p. 1 Directive as last amended by Commission Directive 2007/37/EC

6

---

LIST OF ANNEXES

| ANNEX I | Administrative provisions for EC type-approval |
| --- | --- |
| Appendix 1 | Verification of conformity of production (1st statistical method) |
| Appendix 2 | Verification of conformity of production (2nd statistical method) |
| Appendix 3 | Model information document |
| Appendix 4 | Model EC type-approval certificate |
| Appendix 5 | OBD related information |
| Appendix 6 | EC type-approval certificate numbering system |
| Appendix 7 | Manufacturer's certificate of compliance with OBD in-use performance requirements |
| ANNEX II | In-service conformity |
| Appendix 1 | In-service conformity check |
| Appendix 2 | Statistical procedure for in-service conformity testing |
| Appendix 3 | Responsibilities for in-service conformity |
| ANNEX III | Verifying average exhaust emissions at ambient conditions (Type 1 test) |
| ANNEX IV | Emissions data required at type-approval for roadworthiness purposes |
| Appendix 1 | Measuring carbon monoxide emissions at idling speeds (Type 2 test) |
| Appendix 2 | Measurement of smoke opacity |
| ANNEX V | Verifying emissions of crankcase gases (Type 3 test) |
| ANNEX VI | Determination of evaporative emissions (Type 4 test) |
| ANNEX VII | Verifying the durability of pollution control devices (Type 5 test) |
| Appendix 1 | Standard Bench Cycle (SBC) |
| Appendix 2 | Standard Diesel Bench Cycle (SDBC) |
| Appendix 3 | Standard Road Cycle (SRC) |
| ANNEX VIII | Verifying the average exhaust emissions at low ambient temperatures (Type 6 test) |
| ANNEX IX | Specifications of reference fuels |
| ANNEX X | Emissions test procedure for hybrid electric vehicles (HEV) |
| ANNEX XI | On-board diagnostics (OBD) for motor vehicles |
| Appendix 1 | Functional aspects of OBD systems |
| Appendix 2 | Essential characteristics of the vehicle family |
| ANNEX XII | Determination of CO2 emissions and fuel consumption |
| ANNEX XIII | EC Type-approval of replacement pollution control devices as separate technical unit |
| Appendix 1 | Model information document |
| Appendix 2 | Model EC type-approval certificate |
| Appendix 3 | Model EC type-approval mark |
| ANNEX XIV | Access to vehicle OBD and vehicle repair and maintenance information |
| Appendix 1 | Certificate of compliance |
| ANNEX XV | In-service conformity of vehicles type-approval under Directive 70/220/EC |
| Appendix 1 | In-service conformity check |
| Appendix 2 | Statistical procedure for in-service conformity testing |
| ANNEX XVI | Requirements for vehicles that use a reagent for the exhaust aftertreatment system |
| ANNEX XVII | Amendments to Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 |
| ANNEX XVIII | Special Provisions Regarding Annex I to Council Directive 70/156/EEC |
| ANNEX XIX | Special Provisions Regarding Annex III to Council Directive 70/156/EEC |

ANNEX I

Administrative provisions for EC type-approval

Appendix 1

Verification of conformity of production (1st statistical method)

Appendix 2

Verification of conformity of production (2nd statistical method)

Appendix 3

Model information document

Appendix 4

Model EC type-approval certificate

Appendix 5

OBD related information

Appendix 6

EC type-approval certificate numbering system

Appendix 7

Manufacturer's certificate of compliance with OBD in-use performance requirements

ANNEX II

In-service conformity

Appendix 1

In-service conformity check

Appendix 2

Statistical procedure for in-service conformity testing

Appendix 3

Responsibilities for in-service conformity

ANNEX III

Verifying average exhaust emissions at ambient conditions (Type 1 test)

ANNEX IV

Emissions data required at type-approval for roadworthiness purposes

Appendix 1

Measuring carbon monoxide emissions at idling speeds (Type 2 test)

Appendix 2

Measurement of smoke opacity

ANNEX V

Verifying emissions of crankcase gases (Type 3 test)

ANNEX VI

Determination of evaporative emissions (Type 4 test)

ANNEX VII

Verifying the durability of pollution control devices (Type 5 test)

Appendix 1

Standard Bench Cycle (SBC)

Appendix 2

Standard Diesel Bench Cycle (SDBC)

Appendix 3

Standard Road Cycle (SRC)

ANNEX VIII

Verifying the average exhaust emissions at low ambient temperatures (Type 6 test)

ANNEX IX

Specifications of reference fuels

ANNEX X

Emissions test procedure for hybrid electric vehicles (HEV)

ANNEX XI

On-board diagnostics (OBD) for motor vehicles

Appendix 1

Functional aspects of OBD systems

Appendix 2

Essential characteristics of the vehicle family

ANNEX XII

Determination of CO2 emissions and fuel consumption

ANNEX XIII

EC Type-approval of replacement pollution control devices as separate technical unit

Appendix 1

Model information document

Appendix 2

Model EC type-approval certificate

Appendix 3

Model EC type-approval mark

ANNEX XIV

Access to vehicle OBD and vehicle repair and maintenance information

Appendix 1

Certificate of compliance

ANNEX XV

In-service conformity of vehicles type-approval under Directive 70/220/EC

Appendix 1

In-service conformity check

Appendix 2

Statistical procedure for in-service conformity testing

ANNEX XVI

Requirements for vehicles that use a reagent for the exhaust aftertreatment system

ANNEX XVII

Amendments to Regulation (EC) No 715/2007

ANNEX XVIII

Special Provisions Regarding Annex I to Council Directive 70/156/EEC

ANNEX XIX

Special Provisions Regarding Annex III to Council Directive 70/156/EEC

ANNEX I

ADMINISTRATIVE PROVISIONS FOR EC TYPE-APPROVAL

1.   ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR GRANTING OF EC TYPE-APPROVAL

1.1.   Additional requirements for mono fuel gas vehicles and bi fuel gas vehicles

For the purposes of section 1.1 the following definitions shall apply:

1.1.1.1.   A family means a group of vehicle types fuelled by LPG, NG/biomethane identified by a parent vehicle.

1.1.1.2.   A parent vehicle means a vehicle that is selected to act as the vehicle on which the self adaptability of a fuelling system is going to be demonstrated, and to which the members of a family refer. It is possible to have more than one parent vehicle in a family.

1.1.1.3.   A member of the family means a vehicle that shares the following essential characteristics with its parent:

| (a) | It is produced by the same vehicle manufacturer; |
| --- | --- |

(a)

It is produced by the same vehicle manufacturer;

| (b) | It is subject to the same emission limits; |
| --- | --- |

(b)

It is subject to the same emission limits;

| (c) | If the gas fuelling system has a central metering for the whole engine, it has a certified power output between 0,7 and 1,15 times that of the engine of the parent vehicle; |
| --- | --- |

(c)

If the gas fuelling system has a central metering for the whole engine, it has a certified power output between 0,7 and 1,15 times that of the engine of the parent vehicle;

| (d) | If the gas fuelling system has an individual metering per cylinder, it has a certified power output per cylinder between 0,7 and 1,15 times that of the engine of the parent vehicle; |
| --- | --- |

(d)

If the gas fuelling system has an individual metering per cylinder, it has a certified power output per cylinder between 0,7 and 1,15 times that of the engine of the parent vehicle;

| (e) | If fitted with a catalyst system, it has the same type of catalyst i.e. three-way, oxidation, de NOx; |
| --- | --- |

(e)

If fitted with a catalyst system, it has the same type of catalyst i.e. three-way, oxidation, de NOx;

| (f) | It has a gas fuelling system (including the pressure regulator) from the same system manufacturer and of the same type: induction, vapour injection (single point, multipoint), liquid injection (single point, multipoint); |
| --- | --- |

(f)

It has a gas fuelling system (including the pressure regulator) from the same system manufacturer and of the same type: induction, vapour injection (single point, multipoint), liquid injection (single point, multipoint);

| (g) | This gas fuelling system is controlled by an ECU of the same type and technical specification, containing the same software principles and control strategy. The vehicle may have a second ECU compared to the parent vehicle, provided that the ECU is only used to control the injectors, additional shut-off valves and the data acquisition from additional sensors. |
| --- | --- |

(g)

This gas fuelling system is controlled by an ECU of the same type and technical specification, containing the same software principles and control strategy. The vehicle may have a second ECU compared to the parent vehicle, provided that the ECU is only used to control the injectors, additional shut-off valves and the data acquisition from additional sensors.

With regard to the requirements referred to in point (c) and (d), in the case where a demonstration shows two gas fuelled vehicles could be members of the same family with the exception of their certified power output, respectively P1 and P2 (P1 < P2), and both are tested as if they were parent vehicles, the family relation will be considered valid for any vehicle with a certified power output between 0,7 × P1 and 1,15 × P2.

In case of vehicles fuelled by LPG, NG/biomethane EC type-approval is granted subject to the following requirements:

1.1.2.1.   For the type-approval of a parent vehicle, the parent vehicle shall demonstrate its capability to adapt to any fuel composition that may occur across the market. In the case of LPG there are variations in C3/C4 composition. In the case of natural gas there are generally two types of fuel, high calorific fuel (H-gas) and low calorific fuel (L-gas), but with a significant spread within both ranges; they differ significantly in Wobbe index. These variations are reflected in the reference fuels.

1.1.2.2.   The parent vehicle shall be tested in the type 1 test on the two extreme gas reference fuels set out in Annex IX. In the case of NG/biomethane, if the transition from one gas fuel to the other gas fuel is in practice aided through the use of a switch, this switch shall not be used during type-approval.

1.1.2.3.   The vehicle is considered to conform if, with both reference fuels, the vehicle complies with the emission limits.

1.1.2.4.   The ratio of emission results ‘r’ shall be determined for each pollutant as follows:

| Type of fuel | Reference fuels | Calculation of ‘r’ |
| --- | --- | --- |
| LPG | fuel A | |
| fuel B |
| NG/Biomethane | fuel G20 | |
| fuel G25 |

Type of fuel

Reference fuels

Calculation of ‘r’

LPG

fuel A

Formula

fuel B

NG/Biomethane

fuel G20

Formula

fuel G25

1.1.3.   For the type-approval of a mono fuel gas vehicle and bi fuel gas vehicles operating in gas mode as a member of the family, a type 1 test shall be performed with one gas reference fuel. This reference fuel may be either of the gas reference fuels. The vehicle is considered to comply if the following requirements are met:

| (a) | the vehicle complies with the definition of a family member as defined in section 1.1.1.3; |
| --- | --- |

(a)

the vehicle complies with the definition of a family member as defined in section 1.1.1.3;

| (b) | if the test fuel is the reference fuel A for LPG or G20 for NG/Biomethane, the emission result for each pollutant shall be multiplied by the relevant factor ‘r’ calculated in section 1.1.2.4 if r > 1; if r < 1, no correction is needed; |
| --- | --- |

(b)

if the test fuel is the reference fuel A for LPG or G20 for NG/Biomethane, the emission result for each pollutant shall be multiplied by the relevant factor ‘r’ calculated in section 1.1.2.4 if r > 1; if r < 1, no correction is needed;

| (c) | if the test fuel is the reference fuel B for LPG or G25 for NG/Biomethane, the emission result for each pollutant shall be divided by the relevant factor ‘r’ calculated in section 1.1.2.4 if r < 1; if r > 1, no correction is needed; |
| --- | --- |

(c)

if the test fuel is the reference fuel B for LPG or G25 for NG/Biomethane, the emission result for each pollutant shall be divided by the relevant factor ‘r’ calculated in section 1.1.2.4 if r < 1; if r > 1, no correction is needed;

| (d) | on the manufacturer’s request the type 1 test may be performed on both reference fuels, so that no correction is needed; |
| --- | --- |

(d)

on the manufacturer’s request the type 1 test may be performed on both reference fuels, so that no correction is needed;

| (e) | the vehicle shall comply with the emission limits valid for the relevant category for both measured and calculated emissions; |
| --- | --- |

(e)

the vehicle shall comply with the emission limits valid for the relevant category for both measured and calculated emissions;

| (f) | if repeated tests are made on the same engine the results on reference fuel G20, or A, and those on reference fuel G25, or B, shall first be averaged; the ‘r’ factor shall then be calculated from these averaged results; |
| --- | --- |

(f)

if repeated tests are made on the same engine the results on reference fuel G20, or A, and those on reference fuel G25, or B, shall first be averaged; the ‘r’ factor shall then be calculated from these averaged results;

| (g) | during the type 1 test the vehicle shall only use petrol for a maximum of 60 seconds when operating in gas mode. |
| --- | --- |

(g)

during the type 1 test the vehicle shall only use petrol for a maximum of 60 seconds when operating in gas mode.

1.2.   Additional requirements for flex fuel vehicles

1.2.1.   For the type-approval of a flex fuel ethanol or biodiesel vehicle, the vehicle manufacturer shall describe the capability of the vehicle to adapt to any mixture of petrol and ethanol fuel (up to an 85 % ethanol blend) or diesel and biodiesel that may occur across the market.

1.2.2.   For flex fuel vehicles, the transition from one reference fuel to another between the tests shall take place without manual adjustment of the engine settings.

2.   ADDITIONAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS AND TESTS

2.1.   Small volume manufacturers

2.1.1.   List of legislative acts referred to in Article 3(3):

| Legislative Act | Requirements |
| --- | --- |
| The California Code of Regulations, Title 13, Sections 1961(a) and 1961(b)(1)(C)(1) applicable to 2001 and later model year vehicles, 1968.1, 1968.2, 1968.5, 1976 and 1975, published by Barclay’s Publishing | Type-approval must be granted under the California Code of Regulations applicable to the most recent model year of light-duty vehicle. |

Legislative Act

Requirements

The California Code of Regulations, Title 13, Sections 1961(a) and 1961(b)(1)(C)(1) applicable to 2001 and later model year vehicles, 1968.1, 1968.2, 1968.5, 1976 and 1975, published by Barclay’s Publishing

Type-approval must be granted under the California Code of Regulations applicable to the most recent model year of light-duty vehicle.

2.2.   Inlets to fuel tanks

2.2.1.   The inlet orifice of the petrol or ethanol tank shall be designed so that it prevents the tank from being filled from a fuel pump delivery nozzle that has an external diameter of 23,6 mm or greater.

2.2.2.   Section 2.2.1 shall not apply to a vehicle for which both of the following conditions are satisfied:

| (a) | the vehicle is designed and constructed so that no device designed to control the emission of gaseous pollutants is adversely affected by leaded petrol, and |
| --- | --- |

(a)

the vehicle is designed and constructed so that no device designed to control the emission of gaseous pollutants is adversely affected by leaded petrol, and

| (b) | the vehicle is conspicuously, legibly and indelibly marked with the symbol for unleaded petrol specified in ISO 2575:2004 in a position immediately visible to a person filling the fuel tank. Additional markings are permitted. |
| --- | --- |

(b)

the vehicle is conspicuously, legibly and indelibly marked with the symbol for unleaded petrol specified in ISO 2575:2004 in a position immediately visible to a person filling the fuel tank. Additional markings are permitted.

2.2.3.   Provision shall be made to prevent excess evaporative emissions and fuel spillage caused by a missing fuel filler cap. This may be achieved by using one of the following:

| (a) | an automatically opening and closing, non-removable fuel filler cap, |
| --- | --- |

(a)

an automatically opening and closing, non-removable fuel filler cap,

| (b) | design features which avoid excess evaporative emissions in the case of a missing fuel filler cap, |
| --- | --- |

(b)

design features which avoid excess evaporative emissions in the case of a missing fuel filler cap,

| (c) | any other provision which has the same effect. Examples may include, but are not limited to, a tethered filler cap, a chained filler cap or one utilizing the same locking key for the filler cap as for the vehicle’s ignition. In this case the key shall be removable from the filler cap only in the locked condition. |
| --- | --- |

(c)

any other provision which has the same effect. Examples may include, but are not limited to, a tethered filler cap, a chained filler cap or one utilizing the same locking key for the filler cap as for the vehicle’s ignition. In this case the key shall be removable from the filler cap only in the locked condition.

2.3.   Provisions for electronic system security

2.3.1.   Any vehicle with an emission control computer shall include features to prevent modification, except as authorised by the manufacturer. The manufacturer shall authorise modifications if these modifications are necessary for the diagnosis, servicing, inspection, retrofitting or repair of the vehicle. Any reprogrammable computer codes or operating parameters shall be resistant to tampering and use the provisions in ISO 15031-7; dated 15 March 2001 (SAE J2186 dated October 1996) provided that the security exchange is conducted using the protocols and diagnostic connector as prescribed in Appendix 1 to Annex XI. Any removable calibration memory chips shall be potted, encased in a sealed container or protected by electronic algorithms and shall not be changeable without the use of specialised tools and procedures. Only features directly associated with emissions calibration or prevention of vehicle theft may be so protected.

2.3.2.   Computer-coded engine operating parameters shall not be changeable without the use of specialized tools and procedures (e. g. soldered or potted computer components or sealed (or soldered) computer enclosures).

2.3.3.   In the case of mechanical fuel-injection pumps fitted to compression-ignition engines, manufacturers shall take adequate steps to protect the maximum fuel delivery setting from tampering while a vehicle is in service.

2.3.4.   Manufacturers may apply to the approval authority for an exemption to one of the requirements of Section 2.3 for those vehicles which are unlikely to require protection. The criteria that the approval authority shall evaluate in considering an exemption shall include the current availability of performance chips, the high-performance capability of the vehicle and the projected sales volume of the vehicle.

2.3.5.   Manufacturers using programmable computer code systems (e.g. electrical erasable programmable read-only memory, EEPROM) shall deter unauthorised reprogramming. Manufacturers shall include enhanced tamper-protection strategies and write-protect features requiring electronic access to an off-site computer maintained by the manufacturer ’, to which independent operators shall also have access using the protection afforded in Section 2.3.1. and Section 2.2. of Annex XIV. Methods giving an adequate level of tamper protection shall be approved by the approval authority.

2.4.   Application of tests

2.4.1.   Figure I.2.4 illustrates the application of the tests for type-approval of a vehicle. The specific test procedures are described in Annexes II, III, IV, V, VI, VII, VIII, X, XI, XII and XVI (1).

Figure I.2.4

Application of test requirements for type-approval and extensions

| Vehicle category | Vehicles with positive ignition engines including hybrids | Vehicles with compression ignition engines including hybrids |
| --- | --- | --- |
| Mono fuel | Bi fuel (2) | Flex fuel (2) | Flex fuel | Mono fuel |
| Reference fuel | Petrol (E5) | LPG | NG/Biomethane | Hydrogen | Petrol (E5) | Petrol (E5) | Petrol (E5) | Petrol (E5) | Diesel (B5) | Diesel (B5) |
| LPG | NG/Biomethane | Hydrogen | Ethanol (E85) | Biodiesel |
| Gaseous pollutants
  (Type 1 test) | Yes | Yes | Yes | | Yes
  (both fuels) | Yes
  (both fuels) | | Yes
  (both fuels) | | Yes |
| Particulates
  (Type 1 test) | Yes
  (direct injection) | — | — | | Yes
  (direct injection) (petrol) | Yes
  (direct injection)
  (petrol) | | Yes
  (direct injection)
  (both fuels) | | Yes |
| Idle emissions
  (Type 2 test) | Yes | Yes | Yes | | Yes
  (both fuels) | Yes
  (both fuels) | | Yes
  (both fuels) | | — |
| Crankcase emissions
  (Type 3 test) | Yes | Yes | Yes | | Yes
  (petrol) | Yes
  (petrol) | | Yes
  (petrol) | | — |
| Evaporative emissions
  (Type 4 test) | Yes | — | — | | Yes
  (petrol) | Yes
  (petrol) | | Yes
  (petrol) | | — |
| Durability
  (Type 5 test) | Yes | Yes | Yes | | Yes
  (petrol) | Yes
  (petrol) | | Yes
  (petrol) | | Yes |
| Low temperature emissions
  (Type 6 test) | Yes | — | — | | Yes
  (petrol) | Yes
  (petrol) | | Yes (3)

  (both fuels) | | |
| In-service conformity | Yes | Yes | Yes | | Yes
  (both fuels) | Yes
  (both fuels) | | Yes
  (both fuels) | | Yes |
| On-board diagnostics | Yes | Yes | Yes | | Yes | Yes | | Yes | | Yes |
| CO2 emissions and fuel consumption | Yes | Yes | Yes | | Yes
  (both fuels) | Yes
  (both fuels) | | Yes
  (both fuels) | | Yes |
| Smoke opacity | — | — | — | | — | — | | — | | Yes |

Vehicle category

Vehicles with positive ignition engines including hybrids

Vehicles with compression ignition engines including hybrids

Mono fuel

Bi fuel (2)

Flex fuel (2)

Flex fuel

Mono fuel

Reference fuel

Petrol (E5)

LPG

NG/Biomethane

Hydrogen

Petrol (E5)

Petrol (E5)

Petrol (E5)

Petrol (E5)

Diesel (B5)

Diesel (B5)

LPG

NG/Biomethane

Hydrogen

Ethanol (E85)

Biodiesel

Gaseous pollutants

(Type 1 test)

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

(both fuels)

Yes

(both fuels)

Yes

(both fuels)

Yes

Particulates

(Type 1 test)

Yes

(direct injection)

—

—

Yes

(direct injection) (petrol)

Yes

(direct injection)

(petrol)

Yes

(direct injection)

(both fuels)

Yes

Idle emissions

(Type 2 test)

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

(both fuels)

Yes

(both fuels)

Yes

(both fuels)

—

Crankcase emissions

(Type 3 test)

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

(petrol)

Yes

(petrol)

Yes

(petrol)

—

Evaporative emissions

(Type 4 test)

Yes

—

—

Yes

(petrol)

Yes

(petrol)

Yes

(petrol)

—

Durability

(Type 5 test)

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

(petrol)

Yes

(petrol)

Yes

(petrol)

Yes

Low temperature emissions

(Type 6 test)

Yes

—

—

Yes

(petrol)

Yes

(petrol)

Yes (3)

(both fuels)

In-service conformity

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

(both fuels)

Yes

(both fuels)

Yes

(both fuels)

Yes

On-board diagnostics

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

CO2 emissions and fuel consumption

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

(both fuels)

Yes

(both fuels)

Yes

(both fuels)

Yes

Smoke opacity

—

—

—

—

—

—

Yes

3.   EXTENSIONS TO TYPE-APPROVALS

3.1.   Extensions for tailpipe emissions (type 1, type 2 and type 6 tests)

Vehicles with different reference masses

3.1.1.1.   The type-approval shall be extended only to vehicles with a reference mass requiring the use of the next two higher equivalent inertia or any lower equivalent inertia.

3.1.1.2.   For category N vehicles, the approval shall be extended only to vehicles with a lower reference mass, if the emissions of the vehicle already approved are within the limits prescribed for the vehicle for which extension of the approval is requested.

Vehicles with different overall transmission ratios

3.1.2.1.   The type-approval shall be extended to vehicles with different transmission ratios only under certain conditions.

3.1.2.2.   To determine whether type-approval can be extended, for each of the transmission ratios used in the type 1 and type 6 tests, the proportion,

Formula

shall be determined where, at an engine speed of 1 000 rpm, V1 is the speed of the vehicle-type approved and V2 is the speed of the vehicle type for which extension of the approval is requested.

3.1.2.3.   If, for each transmission ratio, E ≤ 8 %, the extension shall be granted without repeating the type 1 and type 6 tests.

3.1.2.4.   If, for at least one transmission ratio, E > 8 %, and if, for each gear ratio, E ≤ 13 %, the type 1 and type 6 tests shall be repeated. The tests may be performed in a laboratory chosen by the manufacturer subject to the approval of the technical service. The report of the tests shall be sent to the technical service responsible for the type-approval tests.

3.1.3.   Vehicles with different reference masses and transmission ratios

The type-approval shall be extended to vehicles with different reference masses and transmission ratios, provided that all the conditions prescribed in 3.1.1 and 3.1.2 are fulfilled.

Vehicles with periodically regenerating systems

The type-approval of a vehicle type equipped with a periodically regenerating system shall be extended to other vehicles with periodically regenerating systems, whose parameters described below are identical, or within the stated tolerances. The extension shall only relate to measurements specific to the defined periodically regenerating system.

3.1.4.1.   Identical parameters for extending approval are:

| (1) | Engine, |
| --- | --- |

(1)

Engine,

| (2) | Combustion process, |
| --- | --- |

(2)

Combustion process,

| (3) | Periodically regenerating system (i.e. catalyst, particulate trap), |
| --- | --- |

(3)

Periodically regenerating system (i.e. catalyst, particulate trap),

| (4) | Construction (i.e. type of enclosure, type of precious metal, type of substrate, cell density), |
| --- | --- |

(4)

Construction (i.e. type of enclosure, type of precious metal, type of substrate, cell density),

| (5) | Type and working principle, |
| --- | --- |

(5)

Type and working principle,

| (6) | Dosage and additive system, |
| --- | --- |

(6)

Dosage and additive system,

| (7) | Volume ±10 per cent, |
| --- | --- |

(7)

Volume ±10 per cent,

| (8) | Location (temperature ±50 °C at 120 km/h or 5 per cent difference of max. temperature/pressure). |
| --- | --- |

(8)

Location (temperature ±50 °C at 120 km/h or 5 per cent difference of max. temperature/pressure).

3.1.4.2.   Use of Ki factors for vehicles with different reference masses

The Ki factors developed by the procedures in section 3 of Annex 13 of UN/ECE Regulation No 83 for type-approval of a vehicle type with a periodically regenerating system, may be used by other vehicles which meet the criteria referred to in section 3.1.4.1 and have a reference mass within the next two higher equivalent inertia classes or any lower equivalent inertia.

3.1.5.   Application of extensions to other vehicles

When an extension has been granted in accordance with 3.1.1 to 3.1.4, such a type-approval shall not be further extended to other vehicles.

3.2.   Extensions for evaporative emissions (type 4 test)

The type-approval shall be extended to vehicles equipped with a control system for evaporative emissions which meet the following conditions:

3.2.1.1.   The basic principle of fuel/air metering (e.g. single point injection) is the same.

3.2.1.2.   The shape of the fuel tank and the material of the fuel tank and liquid fuel hoses is identical.

3.2.1.3.   The worst-case vehicle with regard to the cross-section and approximate hose length shall be tested. Whether non-identical vapour/liquid separators are acceptable is decided by the technical service responsible for the type-approval tests.

3.2.1.4.   The fuel tank volume is within a range of ±10 %.

3.2.1.5.   The setting of the fuel tank relief valve is identical.

3.2.1.6.   The method of storage of the fuel vapour is identical, i.e. trap form and volume, storage medium, air cleaner (if used for evaporative emission control), etc.

3.2.1.7.   The method of purging of the stored vapour is identical (e.g. air flow, start point or purge volume over the preconditioning cycle).

3.2.1.8.   The method of sealing and venting of the fuel metering system is identical.

The type-approval shall be extended to vehicles with:

3.2.2.1.   different engine sizes;

3.2.2.2.   different engine powers;

3.2.2.3.   automatic and manual gearboxes;

3.2.2.4.   two and four wheel transmissions;

3.2.2.5.   different body styles; and

3.2.2.6.   different wheel and tyre sizes.

3.3.   Extensions for durability of pollution control devices (type 5 test)

The type-approval shall be extended to different vehicle types, provided that the vehicle, engine or pollution control system parameters specified below are identical or remain within the prescribed tolerances:

3.3.1.1.   Vehicle:

Inertia category: the two inertia categories immediately above and any inertia category below.

Total road load at 80 km/h: +5 % above and any value below.

3.3.1.2.   Engine

| (a) | engine cylinder capacity (±15 %), |
| --- | --- |

(a)

engine cylinder capacity (±15 %),

| (b) | number and control of valves, |
| --- | --- |

(b)

number and control of valves,

| (c) | fuel system, |
| --- | --- |

(c)

fuel system,

| (d) | type of cooling system, |
| --- | --- |

(d)

type of cooling system,

| (e) | combustion process. |
| --- | --- |

(e)

combustion process.

3.3.1.3.   Pollution control system parameters:

| (a) | Catalytic converters and particulate filters:
  number of catalytic converters, filters and elements,
  size of catalytic converters and filters (volume of monolith ±10 %),
  type of catalytic activity (oxidizing, three-way, lean NOx trap, SCR, lean NOx catalyst or other),
  precious metal load (identical or higher),
  precious metal type and ratio (±15 %),
  substrate (structure and material),
  cell density,
  temperature variation of no more than 50 K at the inlet of the catalytic converter or filter. This temperature variation shall be checked under stabilized conditions at a speed of 120 km/h and the load setting of the type 1 test. |
| --- | --- |

(a)

Catalytic converters and particulate filters:

number of catalytic converters, filters and elements,

size of catalytic converters and filters (volume of monolith ±10 %),

type of catalytic activity (oxidizing, three-way, lean NOx trap, SCR, lean NOx catalyst or other),

precious metal load (identical or higher),

precious metal type and ratio (±15 %),

substrate (structure and material),

cell density,

temperature variation of no more than 50 K at the inlet of the catalytic converter or filter. This temperature variation shall be checked under stabilized conditions at a speed of 120 km/h and the load setting of the type 1 test.

| (b) | Air injection:
  with or without
  type (pulsair, air pumps, other(s)) |
| --- | --- |

(b)

Air injection:

with or without

type (pulsair, air pumps, other(s))

| (c) | EGR:
  with or without
  type (cooled or non cooled, active or passive control, high pressure or low pressure). |
| --- | --- |

(c)

EGR:

with or without

type (cooled or non cooled, active or passive control, high pressure or low pressure).

3.3.1.4.   The durability test may be carried out using a vehicle, which has a different body style, gear box (automatic or manual) and size of the wheels or tyres, from those of the vehicle type for which the type-approval is sought.

3.4.   Extensions for on-board diagnostics

3.4.1.   The type-approval shall be extended to different vehicles with identical engine and emission control systems as defined in Annex XI, Appendix 2. The type-approval shall be extended regardless of the following vehicle characteristics:

| (a) | engine accessories; |
| --- | --- |

(a)

engine accessories;

| (b) | tyres; |
| --- | --- |

(b)

tyres;

| (c) | equivalent inertia; |
| --- | --- |

(c)

equivalent inertia;

| (d) | cooling system; |
| --- | --- |

(d)

cooling system;

| (e) | overall gear ratio; |
| --- | --- |

(e)

overall gear ratio;

| (f) | transmission type; and |
| --- | --- |

(f)

transmission type; and

| (g) | type of bodywork. |
| --- | --- |

(g)

type of bodywork.

3.5.   Extensions for CO2 emissions and fuel consumption

Vehicles powered by an internal combustion engine only, except vehicles equipped with a periodically regenerating emission control system.

3.5.1.1.   The type-approval shall be extended to vehicles differing with regard to the following characteristics, if the CO2 emissions measured by the technical service do not exceed the type-approval value by more than 4 % for vehicles of category M and 6 % for vehicles of category N:

| — | reference mass, |
| --- | --- |

—

reference mass,

| — | technically permissible maximum laden mass, |
| --- | --- |

—

technically permissible maximum laden mass,

| — | type of bodywork as defined in Section C of Annex II of Directive 2007/46/EC, |
| --- | --- |

—

type of bodywork as defined in Section C of Annex II of Directive 2007/46/EC,

| — | overall gear ratios, |
| --- | --- |

—

overall gear ratios,

| — | engine equipment and accessories., |
| --- | --- |

—

engine equipment and accessories.,

Vehicles powered by an internal combustion engine only and equipped with a periodically regenerating emission control system

3.5.2.1.   The type-approval shall be extended to vehicles, differing with regard to the characteristics given in Section 3.5.1.1 above, but not exceeding the family characteristics of UN/ECE Regulation No 101 (4), Annex 10, if the CO2 emissions measured by the technical service do not exceed the type approved value by more than 4 % for vehicles of category M and 6 % for vehicles of category N, and where the same Ki factor is applicable.

3.5.2.2.   The type-approval shall be extended to vehicles with a different Ki factor, if the CO2 emissions measured by the technical service do not exceed the type approved value by more than 4 % for vehicles of category M and 6 % for vehicles of category N.

3.5.3.   Vehicles powered by an electric power train only

Extensions shall be granted after agreement with the technical service responsible for conducting the tests.

3.5.4.   Vehicles powered by a hybrid electric power train

The type-approval shall be extended to vehicles differing with regard to the following characteristics, if the CO2 emissions and the electric energy consumption measured by the technical service do not exceed the type approved value by more than 4 % for vehicles of category M and 6 % for vehicles of category N:

| — | reference mass, |
| --- | --- |

—

reference mass,

| — | technically permissible maximum laden mass, |
| --- | --- |

—

technically permissible maximum laden mass,

| — | Type of bodywork as defined in Section C of Annex II of Directive 2007/46/EC, |
| --- | --- |

—

Type of bodywork as defined in Section C of Annex II of Directive 2007/46/EC,

| — | With respect to a change in any other characteristic extensions may be granted after agreement with the technical service responsible for conducting the tests., |
| --- | --- |

—

With respect to a change in any other characteristic extensions may be granted after agreement with the technical service responsible for conducting the tests.,

Extension of type-approval of vehicles of category N within a family:

3.5.5.1.   For vehicles of category N that are approved as members of a vehicle family using the procedure in Section 3.6.2, the type-approval shall be extended to vehicles from within the same family only if the technical service estimates that the fuel consumption of the new vehicle does not exceed the fuel consumption of the vehicle on which the family’s fuel consumption is based.

Type-approvals may also be extended to vehicles which:

| — | are up to 110 kg heavier than the family member tested, provided that they are within 220 kg of the lightest member of the family, |
| --- | --- |

—

are up to 110 kg heavier than the family member tested, provided that they are within 220 kg of the lightest member of the family,

| — | have a lower overall transmission ratio than the family member tested due solely to a change in tyre sizes, and, |
| --- | --- |

—

have a lower overall transmission ratio than the family member tested due solely to a change in tyre sizes, and,

| — | conform with the family in all other respects., |
| --- | --- |

—

conform with the family in all other respects.,

3.5.5.2.   For vehicles of category N that are type-approved as members of a vehicle family using the procedure in point 3.6.3, the type-approval can be extended to vehicles from within the same family without additional testing only if the technical service estimates that the fuel consumption of the new vehicle falls within the limits made up of those two vehicles in the family that have the lowest and the highest fuel consumption, respectively.

3.6.   Type-approval of vehicles of category N within a family for fuel consumption and CO2 emissions

Vehicles of category N shall be type-approved within a family as defined in point 3.6.1 using one of the two alternative methods described in points 3.6.2 and 3.6.3.

N vehicles may be grouped together into a family for the purposes of measurement of fuel consumption and CO2 emissions if the following parameters are identical or within the specified limits:

3.6.1.1.   Identical parameters shall be the following:

| — | manufacturer and type as defined in section I of Appendix 4, |
| --- | --- |

—

manufacturer and type as defined in section I of Appendix 4,

| — | engine capacity, |
| --- | --- |

—

engine capacity,

| — | emission control system type, |
| --- | --- |

—

emission control system type,

| — | fuel system type as defined in point 1.10.2 of Appendix 4., |
| --- | --- |

—

fuel system type as defined in point 1.10.2 of Appendix 4.,

3.6.1.2.   The following parameters shall be within the following limits:

| — | transmission overall ratios (no more than 8 % higher than the lowest) as defined in point 1.13.3 of Appendix 4, |
| --- | --- |

—

transmission overall ratios (no more than 8 % higher than the lowest) as defined in point 1.13.3 of Appendix 4,

| — | reference mass (no more than 220 kg lighter than the heaviest), |
| --- | --- |

—

reference mass (no more than 220 kg lighter than the heaviest),

| — | frontal area (no more than 15 % smaller than the largest), |
| --- | --- |

—

frontal area (no more than 15 % smaller than the largest),

| — | engine power (no more than 10 % less than the highest value). |
| --- | --- |

—

engine power (no more than 10 % less than the highest value).

3.6.2.   A vehicle family, as defined in point 3.6.1, may be approved with CO2 emission and fuel consumption data that are common to all members of the family. The technical service shall select for testing the member of the family which the service considers to have the highest CO2 emission. The measurements shall be performed as described in Annex XII, and the results according to the method described in section 5.5 of UN/ECE Regulation No 101 shall be used as type-approval values that are common to all members of the family.

3.6.3.   Vehicles that are grouped in a family as defined in point 3.6.1 may be approved with individual CO2 emission and fuel consumption data for each of the family members. The technical service shall select for testing the two vehicles, which the service considers to have the highest and the lowest CO2 emissions respectively. The measurements shall be performed as described in Annex XII. If the manufacturer’s data for these two vehicles falls within the tolerance limits described in section 5.5 of UN/ECE Regulation No 101, the CO2 emissions declared by the manufacturer for all members of the vehicle family can be used as type-approval values. If the manufacturer’s data do not fall within the tolerance limits, the results according to the method described in section 5.5 of UN/ECE Regulation No 101 shall be used as type-approval values and the technical service shall select an appropriate number of other family members for additional tests.

4.   CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION

4.1.   Introduction

4.1.1.   Where applicable the tests of types 1, 2, 3, 4, the test for OBD, the test for CO2 emissions and fuel consumption and the test for smoke opacity shall be performed, as described in section 2.4. The specific procedures for conformity of production are set out in the sections 4.2 to 4.10.

4.2.   Checking the conformity of the vehicle for a type 1 test

4.2.1.   The type 1 test shall be carried out on a vehicle of the same specification as described in the type-approval certificate. When a type 1 test is to be carried out for a vehicle type-approval that has one or several extensions, the type 1 tests shall be carried out either on the vehicle described in the initial information package or on the vehicle described in the information package relating to the relevant extension.

After selection by the approval authority, the manufacturer shall not undertake any adjustment to the vehicles selected.

4.2.2.1.   Three vehicles shall be selected at random in the series and tested as described in Annex III to this Regulation. The deterioration factors shall be used in the same way. The limit values are set out in Tables 1 and 2 of Annex I to Regulation (EC) No 715/2007.

4.2.2.2.   If the approval authority is satisfied with the production standard deviation given by the manufacturer in accordance with Annex X to Directive 2007/46/EC, the tests shall be carried out according to Appendix 1 of this Annex.

If the approval authority is not satisfied with the production standard deviation given by the manufacturer in accordance with Annex X to Directive 2007/46/EC, the tests shall be carried out according to Appendix 2 of this Annex.

The production of a series shall be deemed to conform or not to conform on the basis of a sampling test of the vehicles once a pass decision is reached for all the pollutants or a fail decision is reached for one pollutant, according to the test criteria applied in the appropriate appendix.

When a pass decision has been reached for one pollutant, that decision shall not be changed by any additional tests carried out to reach a decision for the other pollutants.

If no pass decision is reached for all the pollutants and no fail decision is reached for one pollutant, a test shall be carried out on another vehicle (see Figure I.4.2).

Figure I.4.2

Test of three vehicles

Computation of the test statistic

According to the appropriate Appendix does the test statistic agree with the criteria for failing the series for at least one pollutant?

YES

Series rejected

NO

NO

According to the appropriate Appendix does the test statistic agree with the criteria for passing the series for at least one pollutant?

YES

A pass decision is reached for one or more pollutants

Is a pass decision reached for all the pollutants?

YES

Series accepted

NO

Test of an additional vehicle

Notwithstanding the requirements of Annex III, the tests shall be carried out on vehicles coming straight off the production line.

4.2.3.1.   However, at the request of the manufacturer, the tests may be carried out on vehicles which have completed:

| (a) | A maximum of 3 000 km for vehicles equipped with a positive ignition engine; |
| --- | --- |

(a)

A maximum of 3 000 km for vehicles equipped with a positive ignition engine;

| (b) | A maximum of 15 000 km for vehicles equipped with a compression ignition engine. |
| --- | --- |

(b)

A maximum of 15 000 km for vehicles equipped with a compression ignition engine.

The running-in procedure shall be conducted by the manufacturer, who shall undertake not to make any adjustments to these vehicles.

4.2.3.2.   If the manufacturer wishes to run in the vehicles, (‘x’ km, where x ≤ 3 000 km for vehicles equipped with a positive ignition engine and x ≤ 15 000 km for vehicles equipped with a compression ignition engine), the procedure shall be the following:

| (a) | the pollutant emissions (type 1) shall be measured at zero and at ‘x’ km on the first tested vehicle; |
| --- | --- |

(a)

the pollutant emissions (type 1) shall be measured at zero and at ‘x’ km on the first tested vehicle;

| (b) | the evolution coefficient of the emissions between zero and ‘x’ km shall be calculated for each of the pollutant:
  Emissions ‘x’ km/Emissions zero km |
| --- | --- |

(b)

the evolution coefficient of the emissions between zero and ‘x’ km shall be calculated for each of the pollutant:

Emissions ‘x’ km/Emissions zero km

This may be less than 1; and

| (c) | the other vehicles shall not be run in, but their zero km emissions shall be multiplied by the evolution coefficient. In this case, the values to be taken shall be:






  (i) | the values at ‘x’ km for the first vehicle; |
| --- | --- | --- |

(c)

the other vehicles shall not be run in, but their zero km emissions shall be multiplied by the evolution coefficient. In this case, the values to be taken shall be:

(i)

the values at ‘x’ km for the first vehicle;

| (ii) | the values at zero km multiplied by the evolution coefficient for the other vehicles. |
| --- | --- |

(ii)

the values at zero km multiplied by the evolution coefficient for the other vehicles.

4.2.3.3.   All these tests shall be conducted with commercial fuel. However, at the manufacturer’s request, the reference fuels described in Annex IX may be used.

4.3.   Checking the conformity of the vehicle for CO2 emissions

4.3.1.   If a vehicle type has had one or several extensions, the tests shall be carried out on the vehicle(s) described in the information package which accompanied the first type-approval application, or on the vehicle described in the information package that accompanied the relevant extension.

4.3.2.   If the approval authority is not satisfied with the auditing procedure of the manufacturer, points 3.3 and 3,4 of Annex X to Directive 2007/46/EC shall apply.

4.3.3.   For the purpose of this section and Appendices 1 and 2, the term ‘pollutant’ shall include the regulated pollutants (given in Tables 1 and 2 of Annex I to Regulation (EC) No 715/2007) and the emission of CO2.

The conformity of the vehicle for CO2 emissions shall be determined in accordance with the procedure described in point 4.2.2. with the following exceptions:

4.3.4.1.   The provisions of Section 4.2.2.1 shall be replaced by the following:

Three vehicles shall be randomly taken in the series and tested as described in Annex XII.

4.3.4.2.   The provisions of Section 4.2.3.1 shall be replaced by the following:

However, at the request of the manufacturer, the tests may be carried out on vehicles which have completed a maximum of 15 000 km.

In this case, the running-in procedure shall be conducted by the manufacturer, who shall undertake not to make any adjustments to these vehicles.

4.3.4.3.   The provisions of Section 4.2.3.2 shall be replaced by the following:

If the manufacturer wishes to run in the vehicles, (‘x’ km, where x ≤ 15 000 km), the procedure shall be the following:

| (a) | the pollutant emissions shall be measured at zero and at ‘x’ km on the first tested vehicle; |
| --- | --- |

(a)

the pollutant emissions shall be measured at zero and at ‘x’ km on the first tested vehicle;

| (b) | the evolution coefficient of the emissions between zero and ‘x’ km shall be calculated for each of the pollutant:
  Emissions ‘x’ km/Emissions zero km |
| --- | --- |

(b)

the evolution coefficient of the emissions between zero and ‘x’ km shall be calculated for each of the pollutant:

Emissions ‘x’ km/Emissions zero km

This may be less than 1; and

| (c) | the other vehicles shall not be run in, but their zero km emissions shall be multiplied by the evolution coefficient. In this case, the values to be taken shall be:






  (i) | the values at ‘x’ km for the first vehicle; |
| --- | --- | --- |

(c)

the other vehicles shall not be run in, but their zero km emissions shall be multiplied by the evolution coefficient. In this case, the values to be taken shall be:

(i)

the values at ‘x’ km for the first vehicle;

| (ii) | the values at zero km multiplied by the evolution coefficient for the other vehicles. |
| --- | --- |

(ii)

the values at zero km multiplied by the evolution coefficient for the other vehicles.

4.3.4.4.   The provisions of Section 4.2.3.3 shall be replaced by the following:

The reference fuels described in Annex IX of this Regulation, shall be used for testing.

4.3.4.5.   When checking the conformity of vehicle for CO2 emissions, as an alternative to the procedure mentioned in Section 4.3.4.3, the vehicle manufacturer may use a fixed evolution coefficient EC of 0,92 and multiply all values of CO2 measured at zero km by this factor.

4.4.   Vehicles powered by an electric power train only

Measures to ensure the conformity of production with regard to electric energy consumption shall be checked on the basis of the description in the type-approval certificate set out in Appendix 4 to this Annex.

The holder of the approval shall, in particular:

4.4.1.1.   Ensure the existence of procedures for the effective control of production quality;

4.4.1.2.   Have access to the equipment necessary for checking conformity with each approved type;

4.4.1.3.   Ensure that the data concerning the test result are recorded and that the annexed documents are available during a period to be agreed with the administrative service;

4.4.1.4.   Analyse the results of each type of test so as to monitor and ensure the consistency of the characteristics of the product, taking into account the variations admissible in industrial manufacture;

4.4.1.5.   Make sure that for each type of vehicle tests referred to in Annex XII to this Regulation are carried out; notwithstanding the requirements of paragraph 2.3.1.6 of Annex 7 of UN/ECE Regulation No 101, at the request of the manufacturer, the tests shall be carried out on vehicles which have not travelled any distance;

4.4.1.6.   Make sure that any collections of samples or test pieces demonstrating non-conformity with the type test under consideration is followed by a subsequent sampling and a further test. All necessary steps shall be taken to re-establish the conformity of production.

The approval authorities may verify at any time the methods applied in each production unit.

4.4.2.1.   In every inspection, the records of tests and production monitoring shall be communicated to the visiting inspector.

4.4.2.2.   The inspector may select at random the samples to be tested in the manufacturer’s laboratory. The minimum number of samples shall be determined on the basis of the results of the manufacturer’s own checks.

4.4.2.3.   When the quality standard does not seem satisfactory or when it seems necessary to verify the validity of the tests conducted under Section 4.4.2.2, the inspector shall collect samples to be sent to the technical service which carried out the approval tests.

4.4.2.4.   The approval authorities may carry out all the tests set out in this Regulation.

4.5.   Vehicles powered by a hybrid electric power train

4.5.1.   Measures to ensure the conformity of production with regard to CO2 emissions and electric energy consumption from hybrid electric vehicles shall be checked on the basis of the description in the type-approval certificate conforming to the model in Appendix 4.

4.5.2.   The control of production conformity shall be based on an assessment made by the approval authority of the manufacturer’s auditing procedure in order to ensure conformity of the vehicle type with respect to the emission of CO2 and the electric energy consumption.

4.5.3.   If the approval authority is not satisfied with the standard of the manufacturer’s auditing procedure, it shall require that verification tests be carried out on vehicles in production.

4.5.4.   Conformity for CO2 emissions shall be checked using the statistical procedures described in Section 4.3 and Appendices 1 and 2. Vehicles shall be tested according to the procedure referred to in Annex XII.

4.6.   Checking the conformity of the vehicle for a type 3 test

4.6.1.   If a type 3 test is to be carried out, it shall be conducted on all vehicles selected for the type 1 conformity of production test set out in section 4.2. The conditions laid down in Annex V shall apply.

4.7.   Checking the conformity of the vehicle for a type 4 test

4.7.1.   If a type 4 test is to be carried out, it shall be conducted in accordance with Annex VI.

4.8.   Checking the conformity of the vehicle for On-board Diagnostics (OBD)

If a verification of the performance of the OBD system is to be carried out, it shall be conducted in accordance with the following requirements:

4.8.1.1.   When the approval authority determines that the quality of production seems unsatisfactory, a vehicle shall be randomly taken from the series and subjected to the tests described in Appendix 1 to Annex XI.

4.8.1.2.   The production shall be deemed to conform if this vehicle meets the requirements of the tests described in Appendix 1 to Annex XI.

4.8.1.3.   If the vehicle taken from the series does not satisfy the requirements of section 4.8.1.1, a further random sample of four vehicles shall be taken from the series and subjected to the tests described in Appendix 1 to Annex XI. The tests may be carried out on vehicles which have been run in for no more than 15 000 km.

4.8.1.4.   The production shall be deemed to conform if at least 3 vehicles meet the requirements of the tests described in Annex XI, Appendix 1.

4.9.   Checking the conformity of a vehicle fuelled by LPG or natural gas

4.9.1.   Tests for conformity of production may be performed with a commercial fuel of which the C3/C4 ratio lies between those of the reference fuels in the case of LPG, or of which the Wobbe index lies between those of the extreme reference fuels in the case of NG. In that case a fuel analysis shall be presented to the approval authority.

4.10.   Checking the conformity of vehicle for smoke opacity

4.10.1.   Conformity of the vehicle with the approved type as regards the emission of pollutants from compression ignition engines shall be verified on the basis of the results listed in the Addendum to the type-approval certificate set out in point 2.4 of Appendix 4.

4.10.2.   In addition to point 10.1, where a check is carried out on a vehicle taken from the series, the tests shall be carried out as follows:

4.10.2.1 A vehicle which has not been run in shall be subjected to the test under free acceleration described in section 4.3 of Appendix 2 to Annex IV. The vehicle shall be deemed to conform to the approved type if the absorption coefficient determined does not exceed by more than 0·5 m–1 the figure shown in the approval mark.

4.10.2.2 If the figure determined in the test referred to in point 4.10.2.1. exceeds by more than 0·5 m–1 the figure shown in the approval mark, a vehicle of the type considered or its engine shall be subjected to the test at steady speeds over the full-load curve, as described in section 4.2 of Appendix 2 to Annex IV. The emission levels shall not exceed the limits prescribed in Annex 7 to UN/ECE Regulation No 24 (5).

---

(1)  Specific test procedures for hydrogen and flex fuel biodiesel vehicles will be defined at a later stage

(2)  When a bi fuel vehicle is combined with a flex fuel vehicle, both test requirements are applicable.

(3)  Test on petrol only for vehicles type-approved before the dates set out in Article 10(6) of Regulation (EC) No 715/2007. The test will be performed with both fuels on or after these dates.

(4)  
  OJ L 158, 19.6.2007, p. 34

(5)  
  OJ L 326, 24.11.2006, p. 1.

Appendix 1

Verification of conformity of production — First statistical method

The first statistical method shall be used to verify the production conformity for the type 1 test when the manufacturer’s production standard deviation is satisfactory. The applicable statistical method is set out in Appendix 1 to UN/ECE Regulation No 83. The exceptions to these procedures are the following:

1.1.   In paragraph 3, the reference to paragraph 5.3.1.4 shall be understood as reference to the applicable table of Annex I to Regulation (EC) No 715/2007.

1.2.   In paragraph 3, the reference to Figure 2 shall be understood as reference to Figure I.4.2 of Regulation (EC) No 692/2008.

Appendix 2

Verification of conformity of production — Second statistical method

The second statistical method shall be used to verify the production conformity requirements for the type 1 test when the manufacturer’s evidence of production standard deviation is either unsatisfactory or unavailable. The applicable statistical method is set out in Appendix 2 to UN/ECE Regulation No 83, The exceptions to these procedures are the following:

1.1.   In paragraph 3, the reference to paragraph 5.3.1.4 shall be understood as reference to the applicable table of Annex I to Regulation (EC) No 715/2007.

Appendix 3

MODEL

INFORMATION DOCUMENT No ...

relating to EC type-approval of a vehicle with regard to emissions and access to vehicle repair and maintenance information

The following information, if applicable, must be supplied in triplicate and include a list of contents. Any drawings must be supplied in appropriate scale and in sufficient detail on size A4 or on a folder of A4 format. Photographs, if any, must show sufficient detail.

If the systems, components or separate technical units have electronic controls, information concerning their performance must be supplied.

0.   GENERAL

0.1.   Make (trade name of manufacturer): ...

Type: ...

0.2.1.   Commercial name(s), if available ...

Means of identification of type, if marked on the vehicle (1)
   (a) ...

0.3.1.   Location of that marking: ...

0.4.   Category of vehicle (b): ...

0.5.   Name and address of manufacturer: ...

0.8.   Name(s) and address(es) of assembly plant(s): ...

0.9.   Name and address of the manufacturer’s representative (if any) ...

1.   GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CHARACTERISTICS OF THE VEHICLE

1.1.   Photographs and/or drawings of a representative vehicle: ...

1.3.3.   Powered axles (number, position, interconnection): ...

2.   MASSES AND DIMENSIONS (c) (in kg and mm)

(Refer to drawing where applicable)

2.6.   Mass of the vehicle with bodywork and, in the case of the towing vehicle of a category other than M1, with coupling device, if fitted by the manufacturer, in running order, or mass of the chassis or chassis with cab, without bodywork and/or coupling device if the manufacturer does not fit the bodywork and/or coupling device (including liquids, tools, spare wheel, if fitted, and driver and, for buses and coaches, a crew member if there is a crew seat in the vehicle) (a) (maximum and minimum for each variant): ...

2.8.   Technically permissible maximum laden mass stated by the manufacturer (b)
   (*1) ...

3.   POWER PLANT (c) (In the case of a vehicle that can run either on petrol, diesel, etc., or also in combination with another fuel, items shall be repeated (*2))

Manufacturer: ...

3.1.1.   Manufacturer’s engine code as marked on the engine: ...

Internal combustion engine

3.2.1.1.   Working principle: positive ignition/compression ignition (1) ...

four stroke/two stroke/rotary cycle (1) ...

Number and arrangement of cylinders: ...

3.2.1.2.1.   Bore (d): ... mm

3.2.1.2.2.   Stroke (d): ... mm

3.2.1.2.3.   Firing order: ...

3.2.1.3.   Engine capacity (s): ... cm3

3.2.1.4.   Volumetric compression ratio (2) ...

3.2.1.5.   Drawings of combustion chamber, piston crown and, in the case of positive ignition engine, piston rings: ...

Normal engine idling speed (2) ... min-1

3.2.1.6.1.   High engine idling speed (2) ... min-1

3.2.1.7.   Carbon monoxide content by volume in the exhaust gas with the engine idling (2) ... as stated by the manufacturer (positive ignition engines only)

3.2.1.8.   Maximum net power (e) ... kW at ... min-1 (manufacturer’s declared value)

3.2.1.9.   Maximum permitted engine speed as prescribed by the manufacturer: ... min-1

3.2.1.10.   Maximum net torque (e): ... Nm at ... min-1 (manufacturer’s declared value)

Fuel: Diesel/Petrol/LPG/NG-Biomethane/Ethanol(E85)/Biodiesel/Hydrogen (3)

3.2.2.2.   RON, unleaded: ...

3.2.2.3.   Fuel tank inlet: restricted orifice/label (3)

3.2.2.4.   Vehicle fuel type: Mono fuel, Bi fuel, Flex fuel

3.2.2.5.   Maximum amount of biofuel acceptable in fuel (manufacturer’s declared value): ... % by volume

Fuel feed

By fuel injection (compression ignition only): yes/no (3)

3.2.4.2.1.   System description: ...

3.2.4.2.2.   Working principle: direct injection/pre-chamber/swirl chamber (3)

Injection pump

3.2.4.2.3.1.   Make(s): ...

3.2.4.2.3.2.   Type(s): ...

3.2.4.2.3.3.   Maximum fuel delivery (3)
   (2) ... mm3/stroke or cycle at an engine speed of: ... min-1 or, alternatively, a characteristic diagram: ...

3.2.4.2.3.5.   Injection advance curve (2): ...

Governor

Cut-off point

3.2.4.2.4.2.1.   Cut-off point under load ... min-1

3.2.4.2.4.2.2.   Cut-off point without load ... min-1

Injector(s)

3.2.4.2.6.1.   Make(s): ...

3.2.4.2.6.2.   Type(s): ...

Cold start system

3.2.4.2.7.1.   Make(s): ...

3.2.4.2.7.2.   Type(s): ...

3.2.4.2.7.3.   Description: ...

Auxiliary starting aid

3.2.4.2.8.1.   Make(s): ...

3.2.4.2.8.2.   Type(s): ...

3.2.4.2.8.3.   System description: ...

Electronic controlled injection: yes/no (3)

3.2.4.2.9.1.   Make(s): ...

3.2.4.2.9.2.   Type(s): ...

Description of the system, in the case of systems other than continuous injection give equivalent details: ...

3.2.4.2.9.3.1.   Make and type of the control unit: ...

3.2.4.2.9.3.2.   Make and type of the fuel regulator: ...

3.2.4.2.9.3.3.   Make and type of air-flow sensor: ...

3.2.4.2.9.3.4.   Make and type of fuel distributor: ...

3.2.4.2.9.3.5.   Make and type of throttle housing: ...

3.2.4.2.9.3.6.   Make and type of water temperature sensor: ...

3.2.4.2.9.3.7.   Make and type of air temperature sensor: ...

3.2.4.2.9.3.8.   Make and type of air pressure sensor: ...

By fuel injection (positive ignition only): yes/no (3)

3.2.4.3.1.   Working principle: intake manifold (single-/multi-point (3))/direct injection/other (specify) (3) ...

3.2.4.3.2.   Make(s): ...

3.2.4.3.3.   Type(s): ...

System description, in the case of systems other than continuous injection give equivalent details: ...

3.2.4.3.4.1.   Make and type of the control unit: ...

3.2.4.3.4.3.   Make and type of air-flow sensor: ...

3.2.4.3.4.6.   Make and type of micro switch: ...

3.2.4.3.4.8.   Make and type of throttle housing: ...

3.2.4.3.4.9.   Make and type of water temperature sensor: ...

3.2.4.3.4.10.   Make and type of air temperature sensor: ...

3.2.4.3.4.11.   Make and type of air pressure sensor: ...

Injectors: opening pressure (2): ... kPa or characteristic diagram:

3.2.4.3.5.1.   Make(s): ...

3.2.4.3.5.2.   Type(s): ...

3.2.4.3.6.   Injection timing: ...

Cold start system

3.2.4.3.7.1.   Operating principle(s): ...

3.2.4.3.7.2.   Operating limits/settings (3)
   (2): ...

Feed pump

3.2.4.4.1.   Pressure (2): ... kPa or characteristic diagram (2): ...

Electrical system

3.2.5.1.   Rated voltage: ... V, positive/negative ground (3)

Generator

3.2.5.2.1.   Type: ...

3.2.5.2.2.   Nominal output: ... VA

Ignition

3.2.6.1.   Make(s): ...

3.2.6.2.   Type(s): ...

3.2.6.3.   Working principle: ...

3.2.6.4.   Ignition advance curve (2): ...

3.2.6.5.   Static ignition timing (2): ... degrees before TDC

Cooling system: liquid/air (3)

3.2.7.1.   Nominal setting of the engine temperature control mechanism: ...

Liquid

3.2.7.2.1.   Nature of liquid: ...

3.2.7.2.2.   Circulating pump(s):yes/no (3)

Characteristics ..., or

3.2.7.2.3.1.   Make(s): ...

3.2.7.2.3.2.   Type(s): ...

3.2.7.2.4.   Drive ratio(s): ...

3.2.7.2.5.   Description of the fan and its drive mechanism: ...

Air

3.2.7.3.1.   Blower: yes/no (3)

Characteristics: ..., or

3.2.7.3.2.1.   Make(s): ...

3.2.7.3.2.2.   Type(s): ...

3.2.7.3.3.   Drive ratio(s): ...

Intake system

Pressure charger: yes/no (3)

3.2.8.1.1.   Make(s): ...

3.2.8.1.2.   Type(s): ...

3.2.8.1.3.   Description of the system (e.g. maximum charge pressure: ... kPa, wastegate if applicable): ...

Intercooler: yes/no (3)

3.2.8.2.1.   Type: air-air/air-water (3)

3.2.8.3.   Intake depression at rated engine speed and at 100 % load (compression ignition engines only)

Minimum allowable: ... kPa

Maximum allowable: ... kPa

Description and drawings of the inlet pipes and their accessories (plenum chamber, heating device, additional air intakes, etc.): ...

3.2.8.4.1.   Intake manifold description (include drawings and/or photos): ...

Air filter, drawings: ... or

3.2.8.4.2.1.   Make(s): ...

3.2.8.4.2.2.   Type(s): ...

Intake silencer, drawings: ... or

3.2.8.4.3.1.   Make(s): ...

3.2.8.4.3.2.   Type(s): ...

Exhaust system

3.2.9.1.   Description and/or drawing of the exhaust manifold: ...

3.2.9.2.   Description and/or drawing of the exhaust system: ...

3.2.9.3.   Maximum allowable exhaust back pressure at rated engine speed and at 100 % load (compression ignition engines only): ... kPa

3.2.10.   Minimum cross-sectional areas of inlet and outlet ports: ...

Valve timing or equivalent data

3.2.11.1.   Maximum lift of valves, angles of opening and closing, or timing details of alternative distribution systems, in relation to dead centres. For variable timing system, minimum and maximum timing: ...

3.2.11.2.   Reference and/or setting ranges (3): ...

Measures taken against air pollution

3.2.12.1.   Device for recycling crankcase gases (description and drawings): ...

Additional pollution control devices (if any, and if not covered by another heading)

Catalytic converter: yes/no (3)

3.2.12.2.1.1.   Number of catalytic converters and elements (provide the information below for each separate unit): ...

3.2.12.2.1.2.   Dimensions, shape and volume of the catalytic converter: ...

3.2.12.2.1.3.   Type of catalytic action: ...

3.2.12.2.1.4.   Total charge of precious metals: ...

3.2.12.2.1.5.   Relative concentration: ...

3.2.12.2.1.6.   Substrate (structure and material): ...

3.2.12.2.1.7.   Cell density: ...

3.2.12.2.1.8.   Type of casing for the catalytic converter(s): ...

3.2.12.2.1.9.   Location of the catalytic converter(s) (place and reference distance in the exhaust line): ...

3.2.12.2.1.10.   Heat shield: yes/no (3)

Regeneration systems/method of exhaust after-treatment systems, description: ...

3.2.12.2.1.11.1.   The number of Type 1 operating cycles, or equivalent engine test bench cycles, between two cycles where regenerative phases occur under the conditions equivalent to Type 1 test (Distance ‘D’ in figure 1 in Annex 13 to UN/ECE Regulation 83): ...

3.2.12.2.1.11.2.   Description of method employed to determine the number of cycles between two cycles where regenerative phases occur: ...

3.2.12.2.1.11.3.   Parameters to determine the level of loading required before regeneration occurs (i.e. temperature, pressure etc.): ...

3.2.12.2.1.11.4.   Description of method used to load system in the test procedure described in paragraph 3.1., Annex 13 to UN/ECE Regulation 83: ...

3.2.12.2.1.11.5.   Normal operating temperature range (K):

3.2.12.2.1.11.6.   Consumable reagents (where appropriate):

3.2.12.2.1.11.7.   Type and concentration of reagent needed for catalytic action (where appropriate):

3.2.12.2.1.11.8.   Normal operational temperature range of reagent (where appropriate):

3.2.12.2.1.11.9.   International standard (where appropriate):

3.2.12.2.1.11.10.   Frequency of reagent refill: continuous/maintenance (3) (where appropriate):

3.2.12.2.1.12.   Make of catalytic converter:

3.2.12.2.1.13.   Identifying part number:

Oxygen sensor: yes/no (3)

3.2.12.2.2.1.   Type: ...

3.2.12.2.2.2.   Location: ...

3.2.12.2.2.3.   Control range: ...

3.2.12.2.2.4.   Make of oxygen sensor: ...

3.2.12.2.2.5.   Identifying part number: ...

Air injection: yes/no (3)

3.2.12.2.3.1.   Type (pulse air, air pump etc.): ...

Exhaust gas recirculation: yes/no (3)

3.2.12.2.4.1.   Characteristics (flow rate etc.): ...

3.2.12.2.4.2.   Water cooled system: yes/no (3)

Evaporative emissions control system: yes/no (3)

3.2.12.2.5.1.   Detailed description of the devices and their state of tune: ...

3.2.12.2.5.2.   Drawing of the evaporative control system: ...

3.2.12.2.5.3.   Drawing of the carbon canister: ...

3.2.12.2.5.4.   Mass of dry charcoal: ... g

3.2.12.2.5.5.   Schematic drawing of the fuel tank with indication of capacity and material: ...

3.2.12.2.5.6.   Drawing of the heat shield between tank and exhaust system: ....

Particulate trap: yes/no (3)

3.2.12.2.6.1.   Dimensions, shape and capacity of the particulate trap: ...

3.2.12.2.6.2.   Type and design of the particulate trap: ...

3.2.12.2.6.3.   Location (reference distance in the exhaust line): ...

Method or system of regeneration, description and/or drawing: ...

3.2.12.2.6.4.1.   The number of Type 1 operating cycles, or equivalent engine test bench cycle, between two cycles where regeneration phases occur under the conditions equivalent to Type 1 test (Distance ‘D’ in figure 1 in Annex 13 to UN/ECE Regulation 83): ...

3.2.12.2.6.4.2.   Description of method employed to determine the number of cycles between two cycles where regenerative phases occur: ...

3.2.12.2.6.4.3.   Parameters to determine the level of loading required before regeneration occurs (i.e. temperature, pressure, etc.): ...

3.2.12.2.6.4.4.   Description of method used to load system in the test procedure described in paragraph 3.1., Annex 13 to UN/ECE Regulation 83: ...

3.2.12.2.6.5.   Make of particulate trap: ...

3.2.12.2.6.6.   Identifying part number: ...

On-board-diagnostic (OBD) system: (yes/no) (3)

3.2.12.2.7.1.   Written description and/or drawing of the MI: ...

3.2.12.2.7.2.   List and purpose of all components monitored by the OBD system: ...

Written description (general working principles) for: ...

Positive-ignition engines (3)

3.2.12.2.7.3.1.1.   Catalyst monitoring (3): ...

3.2.12.2.7.3.1.2.   Misfire detection (3): ...

3.2.12.2.7.3.1.3.   Oxygen sensor monitoring (3): ...

3.2.12.2.7.3.1.4.   Other components monitored by the OBD system (3): ...

Compression-ignition engines (3)

3.2.12.2.7.3.2.1.   Catalyst monitoring (3): ...

3.2.12.2.7.3.2.2.   Particulate trap monitoring (3): ...

3.2.12.2.7.3.2.3.   Electronic fuelling system monitoring (3): ...

3.2.12.2.7.3.2.4.   Other components monitored by the OBD system (3): ...

3.2.12.2.7.4.   Criteria for MI activation (fixed number of driving cycles or statistical method): ...

3.2.12.2.7.5.   List of all OBD output codes and formats used (with explanation of each): ...

The following additional information shall be provided by the vehicle manufacturer for the purposes of enabling the manufacture of OBD-compatible replacement or service parts and diagnostic tools and test equipment.

The information given in this section shall be repeated in Appendix 5 to this Annex (vehicle OBD information appendix to the EC type-approval certificate):

3.2.12.2.7.6.1.   A description of the type and number of the pre-conditioning cycles used for the original type-approval of the vehicle.

3.2.12.2.7.6.2.   A description of the type of the OBD demonstration cycle used for the original type-approval of the vehicle for the component monitored by the OBD system.

3.2.12.2.7.6.3.   A comprehensive document describing all sensed components with the strategy for fault detection and MI activation (fixed number of driving cycles or statistical method), including a list of relevant secondary sensed parameters for each component monitored by the OBD system. A list of all OBD output codes and format used (with an explanation of each) associated with individual emission related power-train components and individual non-emission related components, where monitoring of the component is used to determine MI activation. In particular, a comprehensive explanation for the data given in service $05 Test ID $21 to FF and the data given in service $06 shall be provided. In the case of vehicle types that use a communication link in accordance with ISO 15765-4 ‘Road vehicles diagnostics on controller area network (CAN) — part 4: requirements for emissions-related systems’, a comprehensive explanation for the data given in service $06 Test ID $00 to FF, for each OBD monitor ID supported, shall be provided.

3.2.12.2.7.6.4.   The information required by this section may, for example, be defined by completing a table as follows, which shall be attached to this Annex.

| Component | Fault code | Monitoring strategy | Fault detection criteria | MI activation criteria | Secondary parameters | Preconditioning | Demonstration test |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| Catalyst | PO420 | Oxygen sensor 1 and 2 signals | Difference between sensor 1 and sensor 2 signals | 3rd cycle | Engine speed, engine load, A/F mode, catalyst temperature | Two Type 1 cycles | Type 1 |

Component

Fault code

Monitoring strategy

Fault detection criteria

MI activation criteria

Secondary parameters

Preconditioning

Demonstration test

Catalyst

PO420

Oxygen sensor 1 and 2 signals

Difference between sensor 1 and sensor 2 signals

3rd cycle

Engine speed, engine load, A/F mode, catalyst temperature

Two Type 1 cycles

Type 1

3.2.12.2.8.   Other systems (description and operation): ...

3.2.13.   Location of the absorption coefficient symbol (compression ignition engines only): ...

3.2.14.   Details of any devices designed to influence fuel economy (if not covered by other items): ...

LPG fuelling system: yes/no (3)

3.2.15.1.   EC type-approval number according to Council Directive 70/221/EEC (OJ L 76, 6.4.1970, p. 23) (when the Directive will be amended to cover tanks for gaseous fuels) or approval number of UN/ECE Regulation 67

Electronic engine management control unit for LPG fuelling

3.2.15.2.1.   Make(s): ...

3.2.15.2.2.   Type(s): ...

3.2.15.2.3.   Emission-related adjustment possibilities: ...

Further documentation

3.2.15.3.1.   Description of the safeguarding of the catalyst at switch-over from petrol to LPG or back: ...

3.2.15.3.2.   System lay-out (electrical connections, vacuum connections compensation hoses, etc.): ...

3.2.15.3.3.   Drawing of the symbol: ...

NG fuelling system: yes/no (3)

3.2.16.1.   EC type-approval number according to Directive 70/221/EEC (when the Directive will be amended to cover tanks for gaseous fuels) or approval number of UN/ECE Regulation 110: ...

Electronic engine management control unit for NG fuelling

3.2.16.2.1.   Make(s): ...

3.2.16.2.2.   Type(s): ...

3.2.16.2.3.   Emission-related adjustment possibilities: ...

Further documentations

3.2.16.3.1.   Description of the safeguarding of the catalyst at switch-over from petrol to NG or back: ...

3.2.16.3.2.   System lay-out (electrical connections, vacuum connections compensation hoses, etc.): ...

3.2.16.3.3.   Drawing of the symbol: ...

Engines or motor combinations

3.4.1.   Hybrid Electric Vehicle: yes/no (3)

3.4.2.   Category of Hybrid Electric vehicle

Off Vehicle Charging/Not Off Vehicle Charging (3)

Operating mode switch: with/without (3)

Selectable modes

3.4.3.1.1.   Pure electric: yes/no (3)

3.4.3.1.2.   Pure fuel consuming: yes/no (3)

3.4.3.1.3.   Hybrid modes: yes/no (3)

(if yes, short description) ...

Description of the energy storage device: (battery, capacitor, flywheel/generator)

3.4.4.1.   Make(s): ...

3.4.4.2.   Type(s): ...

3.4.4.3.   Identification number: ...

3.4.4.4.   Kind of electrochemical couple: ....

3.4.4.5.   Energy: ... (for battery: voltage and capacity Ah in 2 h, for capacitor: J, ...)

3.4.4.6.   Charger: on board/external/without (3)

Electric machines (describe each type of electric machine separately)

3.4.5.1.   Make: ...

3.4.5.2.   Type: ....

Primary use: traction motor/generator

3.4.5.3.1.   When used as traction motor: monomotor/multimotors (number):

3.4.5.4.   Maximum power: ... kW

Working principle:

3.4.5.5.1.   direct current/alternating current/number of phases:

3.4.5.5.2.   separate excitation/series/compound (3)

3.4.5.5.3.   synchronous/asynchronous (3)

Control unit

3.4.6.1.   Make(s): ...

3.4.6.2.   Type(s): ...

3.4.6.3.   Identification number: ...

Power controller

3.4.7.1.   Make: ...

3.4.7.2.   Type: ...

3.4.7.3.   Identification number: ...

3.4.8.   Vehicle electric range ... km (according to Annex 7 of Regulation No 101):

3.4.9.   Manufacturer’s recommendation for preconditioning: ...

CO2 emissions/fuel consumption (a) (manufacturer’s declared value)

CO2 mass emissions (provide for each reference fuel tested)

3.5.1.1.   CO2 mass emissions (urban conditions): ... g/km

3.5.1.2.   CO2 mass emissions (extra-urban conditions): ... g/km

3.5.1.3.   CO2 mass emissions (combined): ... g/km

Fuel consumption (provide for each reference fuel tested)

3.5.2.1.   Fuel consumption (urban conditions) ... l/100 km or m3/100 km (3)

3.5.2.2.   Fuel consumption (extra-urban conditions) ... l/100 km or m3/100 km (3)

3.5.2.3.   Fuel consumption (combined) ... l/100 km or m3/100 km (3)

Temperatures permitted by the manufacturer

Cooling system

3.6.1.1.   Liquid cooling

Maximum temperature at outlet: ... K

Air cooling

3.6.1.2.1.   Reference point: ...

3.6.1.2.2.   Maximum temperature at reference point: ... K

3.6.2.   Maximum outlet temperature of the inlet intercooler: ... K

3.6.3.   Maximum exhaust temperature at the point in the exhaust pipe(s) adjacent to the outer flange(s) of the exhaust manifold: ... K

3.6.4.   Fuel temperature

Minimum: ... K

Maximum: ... K

3.6.5.   Lubricant temperature

Minimum: ... K

Maximum: ... K

Lubrication system

Description of the system

3.8.1.1.   Position of the lubricant reservoir: ...

3.8.1.2.   Feed system (by pump/injection into intake/mixing with fuel, etc.) (3)

Lubricating pump

3.8.2.1.   Make(s): ...

3.8.2.2.   Type(s): ...

Mixture with fuel

3.8.3.1.   Percentage: ...

Oil cooler: yes/no (3)

Drawing(s): ..., or

3.8.4.1.1.   Make(s): ...

3.8.4.1.2.   Type(s): ...

4.   TRANSMISSION (a)

Moment of inertia of engine flywheel: ...

4.3.1.   Additional moment of inertia with no gear engaged: ...

Clutch (type): ...

4.4.1.   Maximum torque conversion: ...

Gearbox

4.5.1.   Type (manual/automatic/CVT (continuously variable transmission)) (3) ...

4.6.   Gear ratios

| Gear | Internal gearbox ratios (ratios of engine to gearbox output shaft revolutions) | Final drive ratio(s) (ratio of gearbox output shaft to driven wheel revolutions) | Total gear ratios |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |
| Maximum for CVT
  1
  2
  3
  ...
  Minimum for CVT (*3)

  Reverse | | | |

Gear

Internal gearbox ratios (ratios of engine to gearbox output shaft revolutions)

Final drive ratio(s) (ratio of gearbox output shaft to driven wheel revolutions)

Total gear ratios

Maximum for CVT

1

2

3

...

Minimum for CVT (*3)

Reverse

6.   SUSPENSION

Tyres and wheels

Tyre/wheel combination(s)

| (a) | for all tyre options indicate, size designation, load-capacity index, speed category symbol, rolling resistance to ISO 28580 (where applicable) |
| --- | --- |

(a)

for all tyre options indicate, size designation, load-capacity index, speed category symbol, rolling resistance to ISO 28580 (where applicable)

| (b) | for tyres of category Z intended to be fitted on vehicles whose maximum speed exceeds 300 km/h equivalent information shall be provided; for wheels indicate rim size(s) and off-set(s) |
| --- | --- |

(b)

for tyres of category Z intended to be fitted on vehicles whose maximum speed exceeds 300 km/h equivalent information shall be provided; for wheels indicate rim size(s) and off-set(s)

Axles

6.6.1.1.1.   Axle 1: ...

6.6.1.1.2.   Axle 2: ...

etc.

Upper and lower limits of rolling radii

6.6.2.1.   Axle 1: ...

6.6.2.2.   Axle 2: ...

etc.

6.6.3.   Tyre pressure(s) as recommended by the vehicle manufacturer: ... kPa

9.   BODYWORK

9.1.   Type of bodywork: (use codes defined in Annex II, section C of Directive 2007/46/EC): ...

Seats

9.10.3.1.   Number: ...

16.   ACCESS TO VEHICLE REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

Address of principal website for access to vehicle repair and maintenance information:..

16.1.1.   Date from which it is available (no later than 6 months from the date of type approval):

16.2.   Terms and conditions of access to website referred to in Section 16.1: ...

16.3.   Format of vehicle repair and maintenance information accessible through website referred to in Section 16.1: ...

---

(1)  Delete where not applicable (there are cases where nothing needs to be deleted when more than one entry is applicable).

(a)  If the means of identification of type contains characters not relevant to describe the vehicle, component or separate technical unit types covered by this information document, such characters shall be represented in the documentation by the symbol.?. (e.g. ABC??123??).

(b)  Classified according to the definitions listed in Annex II, Section A.

(c)  (e) Where there is one version with a normal cab and another with a sleeper cab, both sets of masses and dimensions are to be stated.

(a)  The mass of the driver and, if applicable, of the crew member is assessed at 75 kg (subdivided into 68 kg occupant mass and 7 kg luggage mass according to ISO Standard 2416-1992), the fuel tank is filled to 90 % ant the other liquid containing systems (except those for used water) to 100 % of the capacity specified by the manufacturer.

(b)  For trailers or semi-trailers, and for vehicles coupled with a trailer or a semi-trailer, which exert a significant vertical load on the coupling device or the fifth wheel, this load, divided by standard acceleration of gravity, is included in the maximum technical permissible mass.

(*1)  Please fill in here the upper and lower values for each variant.

(c)  In the case of non-conventional engines and systems, particulars equivalent to those referred to here shall be supplied by the manufacturer.

(*2)  Vehicles can be fuelled with both petrol and a gaseous fuel but, where the petrol system is fitted for emergency purposes or starting only and of which the petrol tank cannot contain more than 15 litres of petrol, will be regarded for the test as vehicles which can only run a gaseous fuel.

(d)  This figure must be rounded off to the nearest tenth of a millimetre.

(2)  Specify the tolerance.

(e)  Determined in accordance with the requirements of Directive 80/1269/EEC.

(3)  Delete where not applicable (there are cases where nothing needs to be deleted when more than one entry is applicable).

(a)  Determined in accordance with the requirements of Directive 80/1268/EEC.

(a)  (v) The specified particulars are to be given for any proposed variants.

(*3)  CVT — continuously variable transmission.

Appendix to information document

INFORMATION ON TEST CONDITIONS

1.   Spark plugs

1.1.   Make: ...

1.2.   Type: ...

1.3.   Spark-gap setting: ...

2.   Ignition coil

2.1.   Make: ....

2.2.   Type: ...

3.   Lubricant used

3.1.   Make: ...

3.2.   Type: ...

(state percentage of oil in mixture if lubricant and fuel mixed)

4   Dynamometer load setting information (repeat information for each dynamometer test)

4.1.   Vehicle bodywork type (variant/version)

4.2.   Gearbox type (manual/automatic/CVT)

Fixed load curve dynamometer setting information (if used)

4.3.1.   Alternative dynamometer load setting method used (yes/no)

4.3.2.   Inertia mass (kg):

4.3.3.   Effective power absorbed at 80km/h including running losses of the vehicle on the dynamometer (kW)

4.3.4.   Effective power absorbed at 50km/h h including running losses of the vehicle on the dynamometer (kW)

Adjustable load curve dynamometer setting information (if used)

4.4.1.   Coast down information from the test track.

4.4.2.   Tyres make and type:

4.4.3.   Tyre dimensions (front/rear):

4.4.4.   Tyre pressure (front/rear) (kPa):

4.4.5.   Vehicle test mass including driver (kg):

4.4.6.   Road coast down data (if used)

| V (km/h) | V2 (km/h) | V1 (km/h) | Mean corrected coast down time (s) |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |
| 120 | | | |
| 100 | | | |
| 80 | | | |
| 60 | | | |
| 40 | | | |
| 20 | | | |

V (km/h)

V2 (km/h)

V1 (km/h)

Mean corrected coast down time (s)

120

100

80

60

40

20

4.4.7.   Average corrected road power (if used)

| V (km/h) | CPcorrected (kW) |
| --- | --- |
| 120 | |
| 100 | |
| 80 | |
| 60 | |
| 40 | |
| 20 | |

V (km/h)

CPcorrected (kW)

120

100

80

60

40

20

Appendix 4

MODEL OF EC TYPE-APPROVAL CERTIFICATE

(Maximum format: A4 (210 × 297 mm))

EC TYPE-APPROVAL CERTIFICATE

Communication concerning the:

| — | EC type-approval (1), |
| --- | --- |

—

EC type-approval (1),

1

| — | extension of EC type-approval (1), |
| --- | --- |

—

extension of EC type-approval (1),

1

| — | refusal of EC type-approval (1), |
| --- | --- |

—

refusal of EC type-approval (1),

1

| — | withdrawal of EC type-approval (1), |
| --- | --- |

—

withdrawal of EC type-approval (1),

1

| — | of a type of system/type of a vehicle with regard to a system (1) with regard to Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 (2) and Regulation (EC) No 692/2008 (3) |
| --- | --- |

—

of a type of system/type of a vehicle with regard to a system (1) with regard to Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 (2) and Regulation (EC) No 692/2008 (3)

1

2

3

EC type-approval number: ...

Reason for extension: ...

SECTION I

0.1.   Make (trade name of manufacturer): ...

Type: ...

0.2.1.   Commercial name(s) (if available): ...

Means of identification of type if marked on the vehicle (4)

4

0.3.1.   Location of that marking: ...

0.4.   Category of vehicle (5)

5

0.5.   Name and address of manufacturer: ...

0.8.   Name(s) and address(es) of assembly plant(s): ...

0.9.   Representative of the manufacturer: ....

SECTION II

1.   Additional information (where applicable): (see addendum)

2.   Technical service responsible for carrying out the tests: ...

3.   Date of test report: ...

4.   Number of test report: ...

5.   Remarks (if any): (see addendum)

6.   Place: ...

7.   Date: ...

8.   Signature: ...

| Attachments: | Information package.
  Test report. |
| --- | --- |

Attachments:

Attachments:

Information package.

Test report.

---

(1)  Delete where not applicable (there are cases where nothing needs to be deleted when more than one entry is applicable)

1

(2)  
  OJ L 171, 29.6.2007, p. 1.

2

(3)  
  OJ L 199, 28.7.2008, p. 1

3

(4)  If the means of identification of type contains characters not relevant to describe the vehicle, component or separate technical unit types covered by this information, such characters shall be represented in the documentation by the symbol ‘?’ (e.g. ABC??123??)

4

(5)  As defined in Annex II, Section A

5

Addendum to EC type-approval certificate No ...

concerning the type-approval of a vehicle with regard to emissions and access to vehicle repair and maintenance information according to Regulation (EC) No 715/2007

1.   Additional information

1.1.   Mass of the vehicle in running order: ...

1.2.   Maximum mass: ...

1.3.   Reference mass: ...

1.4.   Number of seats: ...

Type of bodywork:

1.6.1.   for M1, M2: saloon, hatchback, station wagon, coupé, convertible, multipurpose vehicle (1)

1.6.2.   for N1, N2: lorry, van (1)

1.7.   Drive wheels: front, rear, 4 x 4 (1)

1.8.   Pure electric vehicle: yes/no (1)

Hybrid electric vehicle: yes/no (1)

1.9.1.   Category of Hybrid Electric vehicle: Off Vehicle Charging/Not Off Vehicle charging (1)

1.9.2.   Operating mode switch: with/without (1)

Engine identification:

1.10.1.   Engine displacement:

1.10.2.   Fuel supply system: direct injection/indirect injection (1)

1.10.3.   Fuel recommended by the manufacturer:

1.10.4.   Maximum power: kW at min'

1.10.5.   Pressure charging device: yes/no (1)

1.10.6.   Ignition system: compression ignition/positive ignition (1)

Power train (for pure electric vehicle or hybrid electric vehicle) (1)

1.11.1.   Maximum net power: ... kW, at: ... to ... min-1

1.11.2.   Maximum thirty minutes power: ... kW

Traction battery (for pure electric vehicle or hybrid electric vehicle)

1.12.1.   Nominal voltage: V

1.12.2.   Capacity (2 h rate): Ah

Transmission: ..., ...

1.13.1.   Type of gearbox: manual/automatic/variable transmission (1)

1.13.2.   Number of gear ratios:

1.13.3.   Total gear ratios (including the rolling circumferences of the tyres under load): road speeds per 1 000 min-1 (km/h)

| First gear: ... | Sixth gear: ... |
| --- | --- |
| Second gear: ... | Seventh gear: ... |
| Third gear: ... | Eighth gear: ... |
| Fourth gear: ... | Overdrive: ... |
| Fifth gear: ... | |

First gear: ...

Sixth gear: ...

Second gear: ...

Seventh gear: ...

Third gear: ...

Eighth gear: ...

Fourth gear: ...

Overdrive: ...

Fifth gear: ...

1.13.4.   Final drive ratio:

1.14.   Tyres: ..., ..., ...

Type: ... Dimensions: ...

Rolling circumference under load:

Rolling circumference of tyres used for the Type 1 test

2.   Test results

Tailpipe emissions test results

Emissions classification: Euro 5/Euro 6 (1)

Type 1 test results, where applicable

Type approval number if not parent vehicle (1): ...

| Type 1 Result | Test | CO
  (mg/km) | THC
  (mg/km) | NMHC
  (mg/km) | NOx

  (mg/km) | THC + NOx

  (mg/km) | Particulates
  (mg/km) | Particles
  (#/km) |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| Measured (1)
   (4) | 1 | | | | | | | |
| 2 | | | | | | | |
| 3 | | | | | | | |
| Measured mean value (M) (1)
   (4) | | | | | | | | |
| Ki (1)
   (5) | | | | | | (2) | | |
| Mean value calculated with Ki (M.Ki) (4) | | | | | | (3) | | |
| DF (1)
   (5) | | | | | | | | |
| Final mean value calculated with Ki and DF (M.Ki.DF) (6) | | | | | | | | |
| Limit value | | | | | | | | |

Type 1 Result

Test

CO

(mg/km)

THC

(mg/km)

NMHC

(mg/km)

NOx

(mg/km)

THC + NOx

(mg/km)

Particulates

(mg/km)

Particles

(#/km)

Measured (1)
   (4)

1

2

3

Measured mean value (M) (1)
   (4)

Ki (1)
   (5)

(2)

Mean value calculated with Ki (M.Ki) (4)

(3)

DF (1)
   (5)

Final mean value calculated with Ki and DF (M.Ki.DF) (6)

Limit value

Information about regeneration strategy

D — number of operating cycles between 2 cycles where regenerative phases occur: ...

d — number of operating cycles required for regeneration: ...

Type 2: ... %

Type 3: ...

Type 4: ... g/test

| Type 5: | — | Durability test: whole vehicle test/bench ageing test/none (1) |
| --- | --- | --- |

Type 5:

—

Durability test: whole vehicle test/bench ageing test/none (1)

| — | Deterioration factor DF: calculated/assigned (1) |
| --- | --- |

—

Deterioration factor DF: calculated/assigned (1)

| — | Specify the values: ... |
| --- | --- |

—

Specify the values: ...

| Type 6 | CO (mg/km) | THC (mg/km) |
| --- | --- | --- |
| Measured value | | |

Type 6

CO (mg/km)

THC (mg/km)

Measured value

2.1.1.   Repeat the table for mono fuel gas vehicles for all reference gases of LPG or NG/biomethane, showing if the results are measured or calculated and repeat the table for the (one) final result of the vehicle emissions on LPG or NG/biomethane. In case of a bi fuel gas vehicle, show the result for petrol and repeat the table for all reference gases of LPG or NG/biomethane, showing if the result are measured or calculated and repeat the table for the (one) final result of the vehicle emissions on LPG or NG/biomethane. In the case of other bi fuel and flex fuel vehicles, show the results on the two different reference fuels.

2.1.2.   Written description and/or drawing of the MI: ...

2.1.3.   List and function of all components monitored by the OBD system: ...

Written description (general working principles) for: ...

2.1.4.1.   Misfire detection (2): ...

2.1.4.2.   Catalyst monitoring (2): ...

2.1.4.3.   Oxygen sensor monitoring (2): ...

2.1.4.4.   Other components monitored by the OBD system (2): ...

2.1.4.5.   Catalyst monitoring (3): ...

2.1.4.6.   Particulate trap monitoring (3): ...

2.1.4.7.   Electronic fuelling system actuator monitoring (3): ...

2.1.4.8.   Other components monitored by the OBD system: ...

2.1.5.   Criteria for MI activation (fixed number of driving cycles or statistical method): ...

2.1.6.   List of all OBD output codes and formats used (with explanation of each): ...

2.2.   Emissions data required for roadworthiness testing

| Test | CO value
  (% vol) | Lambda (4) | Engine speed
  (min-) | Engine oil temperature
  (°C) |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| Low idle test | | N/A | | |
| High idle test | | | | |

Test

CO value

(% vol)

Lambda (4)

Engine speed

(min-)

Engine oil temperature

(°C)

Low idle test

N/A

High idle test

Catalytic converters yes/no (1)

2.3.1.   Original equipment catalytic converter tested to all relevant requirements of this Regulation yes/no (1)

Smoke opacity test results (1)

2.4.1.   At steady speeds: See technical service test report number: ...

Free acceleration tests

2.4.2.1.   Measured value of the absorption coefficient: ... m-1

2.4.2.2.   Corrected value of the absorption coefficient: ... m-1

2.4.2.3.   Location of the absorption coefficient symbol on the vehicle: ...

CO2 emissions and fuel consumption test results

Internal combustion engine vehicle and Not Externally Chargeable (NOVC) Hybrid Electric Vehicle

CO2 mass emissions (provide declared values for each reference fuel tested)

2.5.1.1.1.   CO2 mass emissions (urban conditions): ... g/km

2.5.1.1.2.   CO2 mass emissions (extra-urban conditions): ... g/km

2.5.1.1.3.   CO2 mass emissions (combined): ... g/km

Fuel consumption (provide declared values for each reference fuel tested)

2.5.1.2.1.   Fuel consumption (urban conditions): ... 1/100 km (5)

2.5.1.2.2.   Fuel consumption (extra-urban conditions): ... 1/100 km

2.5.1.2.3.   Fuel consumption (combined): ... 1/100 km (5)

For vehicles powered by an internal combustion engine only which are equipped with periodically regenerating systems as defined in paragraph 6 of Article 2 of this Regulation, the test results shall be multiplied by the factor Ki as specified in Annex 10 to UN/ECE Regulation 101.

2.5.1.3.1.   Information about regeneration strategy for CO2 emissions and fuel consumption

D — number of operating cycles between 2 cycles where regenerative phases occur: ...

d — number of operating cycles required for regeneration: ...

| | urban | extra urban | combined |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |
| Ki
  Values for CO2

  and fuel consumption (6) | | | |

urban

extra urban

combined

Ki

Values for CO2

and fuel consumption (6)

Pure electric vehicles (1)

Electric energy consumption (declared value).

2.5.2.1.1.   Electric energy consumption: ... Wh/km

2.5.2.1.2.   Total time out of tolerance for the conduct of the cycle: ... sec

2.5.2.2.   Range (declared value): ... km

Externally chargeable (OVC) Hybrid Electric Vehicle:

2.5.3.1.   CO2 mass emission (Condition A, combined) (7): ... g/km

2.5.3.2.   CO2 mass emission (Condition B, combined) (7): ... g/km

2.5.3.3.   CO2 mass emission (weighted, combined) (7): ... g/km

2.5.3.4.   Fuel consumption (Condition A, combined) (7): ... l/100 km

2.5.3.5.   Fuel consumption (Condition B, combined) (7): ... l/100 km

2.5.3.6.   Fuel consumption (weighted, combined) (7): ... l/100 km

2.5.3.7.   Electric energy consumption (Condition A, combined) (7): ... Wh/km

2.5.3.8.   Electric energy consumption (Condition B, combined) (7): ... Wh/km

2.5.3.9.   Electric energy consumption (weighted and combined) (7): ... Wh/km

2.5.3.10.   Pure electric range: ... km

Vehicle repair information

Address of website for access to vehicle repair and maintenance information: ...

3.1.1.   Date from which it is available (up to 6 months from the date of type approval): ...

3.2.   Terms and conditions of access (i.e., duration of access, price of access on a hourly, daily, monthly and annual basis) to website referred to in Section 3.1: ...

3.3.   Format of vehicle repair and maintenance information accessible through website referred to in Section 3.1: ...

3.4.   Manufacturer’s certificate on access to vehicle repair and maintenance information provided: ...

4.   Remarks:

---

(1)  Delete where not applicable (there are cases where nothing needs to be deleted when more than one entry is applicable.)

(1)  Where applicable.

(2)  Not applicable.

(3)  Mean value calculated by adding mean values (M.Ki) calculated for THC and NOx.

(4)  Round to 2 decimal places.

(5)  Round to 4 decimal places.

(6)  Round to 1 decimal place more than limit value.

(2)  For vehicles equipped with positive-ignition engines.

(3)  For compression-ignition engine vehicles

(4)  Delete where not applicable (there are cases where nothing needs to be deleted when more than one entry is applicable.)

(5)  For vehicle fuelled with gas the unit is replaced by m3/km.

(6)  Round to 4 decimal places.

(7)  Measured over the combined cycle, i.e. Part One (urban) and Part Two (extra urban) together

Appendix 5

Vehicle OBD information

1.   The information required in this Appendix shall be provided by the vehicle manufacturer for the purposes of enabling the manufacture of OBD-compatible replacement or service parts and diagnostic tools and test equipment.

2.   Upon request, the following information shall be made available to any interested component, diagnostic tools or test equipment manufacturer, on a non-discriminatory basis:

2.1.   A description of the type and number of the preconditioning cycles used for the original type-approval of the vehicle;

2.2.   A description of the type of the OBD demonstration cycle used for the original type-approval of the vehicle for the component monitored by the OBD system;

2.3.   A comprehensive document describing all sensed components with the strategy for fault detection and MI activation (fixed number of driving cycles or statistical method), including a list of relevant secondary sensed parameters for each component monitored by the OBD system and a list of all OBD output codes and format used (with an explanation of each) associated with individual emission-related power-train components and individual non-emission related components, where monitoring of the component is used to determine MI activation. In particular, a comprehensive explanation for the data given in service $ 05 Test ID $ 21 to FF and the data given in service $ 06 shall be provided. In the case of vehicle types that use a communication link in accordance with ISO 15765-4 ‘Road vehicles — Diagnostics on Controller Area Network (CAN) — Part 4: Requirements for emissions-related systems’, a comprehensive explanation for the data given in service $ 06 Test ID $ 00 to FF, for each OBD monitor ID supported, shall be provided.

This information may be provided in the form of a table, as follows:

| Component | Fault code | Monitoring strategy | Fault detection criteria | MI activation criteria | Secondary parameters | Preconditioning | Demonstration test |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| Catalyst | P0420 | Oxygen sensor 1 and 2 signals | Difference between sensor 1 and sensor 2 signals | 3rd cycle | Engine speed, engine load, A/F mode, catalyst temperature | Two Type 1 cycles | Type 1 |

Component

Fault code

Monitoring strategy

Fault detection criteria

MI activation criteria

Secondary parameters

Preconditioning

Demonstration test

Catalyst

P0420

Oxygen sensor 1 and 2 signals

Difference between sensor 1 and sensor 2 signals

3rd cycle

Engine speed, engine load, A/F mode, catalyst temperature

Two Type 1 cycles

Type 1

3.   Information required for the manufacture of diagnostic tools

In order to facilitate the provision of generic diagnostic tools for multi-make repairers, vehicle manufacturers shall make available the information referred to in the points 3.1 to 3.3. through their repair information web-sites. This information shall include all diagnostic tool functions and all the links to repair information and troubleshooting instructions. The access to this information may be subject to the payment of a reasonable fee.

3.1.   Communication Protocol Information

The following information shall be required indexed against vehicle make, model and variant, or other workable definition such as VIN or vehicle and systems identification:

| (a) | Any additional protocol information system necessary to enable complete diagnostics in addition to the standards prescribed in Annex XI Section 4, including any additional hardware or software protocol information, parameter identification, transfer functions, ‘keep alive’ requirements, or error conditions; |
| --- | --- |

(a)

Any additional protocol information system necessary to enable complete diagnostics in addition to the standards prescribed in Annex XI Section 4, including any additional hardware or software protocol information, parameter identification, transfer functions, ‘keep alive’ requirements, or error conditions;

| (b) | Details of how to obtain and interpret all fault codes not in accordance with the standards prescribed in Annex XI Section 4: |
| --- | --- |

(b)

Details of how to obtain and interpret all fault codes not in accordance with the standards prescribed in Annex XI Section 4:

| (c) | A list of all available live data parameters including scaling and access information; |
| --- | --- |

(c)

A list of all available live data parameters including scaling and access information;

| (d) | A list of all available functional tests including device activation or control and the means to implement them; |
| --- | --- |

(d)

A list of all available functional tests including device activation or control and the means to implement them;

| (e) | Details of how to obtain all component and status information, time stamps, pending DTC and freeze frames; |
| --- | --- |

(e)

Details of how to obtain all component and status information, time stamps, pending DTC and freeze frames;

| (f) | Resetting adaptive learning parameters, variant coding and replacement component setup, and customer preferences; |
| --- | --- |

(f)

Resetting adaptive learning parameters, variant coding and replacement component setup, and customer preferences;

| (g) | ECU identification and variant coding; |
| --- | --- |

(g)

ECU identification and variant coding;

| (h) | Details of how to reset service lights; |
| --- | --- |

(h)

Details of how to reset service lights;

| (i) | Location of diagnostic connector and connector details; |
| --- | --- |

(i)

Location of diagnostic connector and connector details;

| (j) | Engine code identification. |
| --- | --- |

(j)

Engine code identification.

3.2.   Test and diagnosis of OBD monitored components

The following information shall be required:

| (a) | A description of tests to confirm its functionality, at the component or in the harness |
| --- | --- |

(a)

A description of tests to confirm its functionality, at the component or in the harness

| (b) | Test procedure including test parameters and component information |
| --- | --- |

(b)

Test procedure including test parameters and component information

| (c) | Connection details including minimum and maximum input and output and driving and loading values |
| --- | --- |

(c)

Connection details including minimum and maximum input and output and driving and loading values

| (d) | Values expected under certain driving conditions including idling |
| --- | --- |

(d)

Values expected under certain driving conditions including idling

| (e) | Electrical values for the component in its static and dynamic states |
| --- | --- |

(e)

Electrical values for the component in its static and dynamic states

| (f) | Failure mode values for each of the above scenarios |
| --- | --- |

(f)

Failure mode values for each of the above scenarios

| (g) | Failure mode diagnostic sequences including fault trees and guided diagnostics elimination. |
| --- | --- |

(g)

Failure mode diagnostic sequences including fault trees and guided diagnostics elimination.

3.3.   Data required to perform the repair

The following information shall be required:

| (a) | ECU and component initialisation (in the event of replacements being fitted) |
| --- | --- |

(a)

ECU and component initialisation (in the event of replacements being fitted)

| (b) | Initialisation of new or replacement ECU’s where relevant using pass-through (re-) programming techniques. |
| --- | --- |

(b)

Initialisation of new or replacement ECU’s where relevant using pass-through (re-) programming techniques.

Appendix 6

EC Type –Approval Certification Numbering System

1.   Section 3 of the EC type-approval number issued according to Article 6(1) shall be composed by the number of the implementing regulatory act or the latest amending regulatory act applicable to the EC type-approval. This number shall be followed by an alphabetical character reflecting the different vehicle categories in accordance with table 1 below. These alphabetical characters shall also distinguish the Euro 5 and 6 emission limit values to which the approval was granted.

Table 1

| Character | Emissions standard | OBD standard | Vehicle category and class | Engine | Implementation date: new types | Implementation date: new vehicles | Last date of registration |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| A | Euro 5a | Euro 5 | M, N1 class I. | PI, CI | 1.9.2009 | 1.1.2011 | 31.12.2012 |
| B | Euro 5a | Euro 5 | M1 to fulfil specific social needs
  (excluding M1G) | CI | 1.9.2009 | 1.1.2012 | 31.12.2012 |
| C | Euro 5a | Euro 5 | M1G to fulfil specific social needs | CI | 1.9.2009 | 1.1.2012 | 31.8.2012 |
| D | Euro 5a | Euro 5 | N1 class II | PI, CI | 1.9.2010 | 1.1.2012 | 31.12.2012 |
| E | Euro 5a | Euro 5 | N1 class III, N2 | PI, CI | 1.9.2010 | 1.1.2012 | 31.12.2012 |
| F | Euro 5b | Euro 5 | M, N1 class I. | PI, CI | 1.9.2011 | 1.1.2013 | 31.12.2013 |
| G | Euro 5b | Euro 5 | M1 to fulfil specific social needs
  (excluding M1G) | CI | 1.9.2011 | 1.1.2013 | 31.12.2013 |
| H | Euro 5b | Euro 5 | N1 class II | PI, CI | 1.9.2011 | 1.1.2013 | 31.12.2013 |
| I | Euro 5b | Euro 5 | N1 class III, N2 | PI, CI | 1.9.2011 | 1.1.2013 | 31.12.2013 |
| J | Euro 5b | Euro 5+ | M, N1 class I. | PI, CI | 1.9.2011 | 1.1.2014 | 31.8.2015 |
| K | Euro 5b | Euro 5+ | M1 to fulfil specific social needs
  (excluding M1G) | CI | 1.9.2011 | 1.1.2014 | 31.8.2015 |
| L | Euro 5b | Euro 5+ | N1 class II | PI, CI | 1.9.2011 | 1.1.2014 | 31.8.2016 |
| M | Euro 5b | Euro 5+ | N1 class III, N2 | PI, CI | 1.9.2011 | 1.1.2014 | 31.8.2016 |
| N | Euro 6a | Euro 6- | M, N1 class I | CI | | | 31.12.2012 |
| O | Euro 6a | Euro 6- | N1 class II | CI | | | 31.12.2012 |
| P | Euro 6a | Euro 6- | N1 class III, N2 | CI | | | 31.12.2012 |
| Q | Euro 6b | Euro 6- | M, N1 class I | CI | | | 31.12.2013 |
| R | Euro 6b | Euro 6- | N1 class II | CI | | | 31.12.2013 |
| S | Euro 6b | Euro 6- | N1 class III, N2 | CI | | | 31.12.2013 |
| T | Euro 6b | Euro 6-plus IUPR | M, N1 class I | CI | | | 31.8.2015 |
| U | Euro 6b | Euro 6-plus IUPR | N1 class II | CI | | | 31.8.2016 |
| V | Euro 6b | Euro 6-plus IUPR | N1 class III, N2 | CI | | | 31.8.2016 |
| W | Euro 6b | Euro 6 | M, N1 class I | PI, CI | 1.9.2014 | 1.9.2015 | |
| X | Euro 6b | Euro 6 | N1 class II | PI, CI | 1.9.2015 | 1.9.2016 | |
| Y | Euro 6b | Euro 6 | N1 class III, N2 | PI, CI | 1.9.2015 | 1.9.2016 | |
| Key:






  ‘Euro 5a’ emissions standard | = excludes revised measurement procedure for particulates, particle number standard and flex fuel vehicle low temperature emission testing with biofuel. |

Character

Emissions standard

OBD standard

Vehicle category and class

Engine

Implementation date: new types

Implementation date: new vehicles

Last date of registration

A

Euro 5a

Euro 5

M, N1 class I.

PI, CI

1.9.2009

1.1.2011

31.12.2012

B

Euro 5a

Euro 5

M1 to fulfil specific social needs

(excluding M1G)

CI

1.9.2009

1.1.2012

31.12.2012

C

Euro 5a

Euro 5

M1G to fulfil specific social needs

CI

1.9.2009

1.1.2012

31.8.2012

D

Euro 5a

Euro 5

N1 class II

PI, CI

1.9.2010

1.1.2012

31.12.2012

E

Euro 5a

Euro 5

N1 class III, N2

PI, CI

1.9.2010

1.1.2012

31.12.2012

F

Euro 5b

Euro 5

M, N1 class I.

PI, CI

1.9.2011

1.1.2013

31.12.2013

G

Euro 5b

Euro 5

M1 to fulfil specific social needs

(excluding M1G)

CI

1.9.2011

1.1.2013

31.12.2013

H

Euro 5b

Euro 5

N1 class II

PI, CI

1.9.2011

1.1.2013

31.12.2013

I

Euro 5b

Euro 5

N1 class III, N2

PI, CI

1.9.2011

1.1.2013

31.12.2013

J

Euro 5b

Euro 5+

M, N1 class I.

PI, CI

1.9.2011

1.1.2014

31.8.2015

K

Euro 5b

Euro 5+

M1 to fulfil specific social needs

(excluding M1G)

CI

1.9.2011

1.1.2014

31.8.2015

L

Euro 5b

Euro 5+

N1 class II

PI, CI

1.9.2011

1.1.2014

31.8.2016

M

Euro 5b

Euro 5+

N1 class III, N2

PI, CI

1.9.2011

1.1.2014

31.8.2016

N

Euro 6a

Euro 6-

M, N1 class I

CI

31.12.2012

O

Euro 6a

Euro 6-

N1 class II

CI

31.12.2012

P

Euro 6a

Euro 6-

N1 class III, N2

CI

31.12.2012

Q

Euro 6b

Euro 6-

M, N1 class I

CI

31.12.2013

R

Euro 6b

Euro 6-

N1 class II

CI

31.12.2013

S

Euro 6b

Euro 6-

N1 class III, N2

CI

31.12.2013

T

Euro 6b

Euro 6-plus IUPR

M, N1 class I

CI

31.8.2015

U

Euro 6b

Euro 6-plus IUPR

N1 class II

CI

31.8.2016

V

Euro 6b

Euro 6-plus IUPR

N1 class III, N2

CI

31.8.2016

W

Euro 6b

Euro 6

M, N1 class I

PI, CI

1.9.2014

1.9.2015

X

Euro 6b

Euro 6

N1 class II

PI, CI

1.9.2015

1.9.2016

Y

Euro 6b

Euro 6

N1 class III, N2

PI, CI

1.9.2015

1.9.2016

Key:

‘Euro 5a’ emissions standard

= excludes revised measurement procedure for particulates, particle number standard and flex fuel vehicle low temperature emission testing with biofuel.

| ‘Euro 6a’ emissions standard | = excludes revised measurement procedure for particulates, particle number standard and flex fuel vehicle low temperature emission testing with biofuel. |
| --- | --- |

‘Euro 6a’ emissions standard

= excludes revised measurement procedure for particulates, particle number standard and flex fuel vehicle low temperature emission testing with biofuel.

| ‘Euro 5+’ OBD standards | = includes relaxed in use performance ratio (IUPR), NOx monitoring for petrol vehicles and tightened PM threshold limits for diesel. |
| --- | --- |

‘Euro 5+’ OBD standards

= includes relaxed in use performance ratio (IUPR), NOx monitoring for petrol vehicles and tightened PM threshold limits for diesel.

| ‘Euro 6-’ OBD standards | = relaxed diesel OBD threshold limits, no in use performance ratio (IUPR). |
| --- | --- |

‘Euro 6-’ OBD standards

= relaxed diesel OBD threshold limits, no in use performance ratio (IUPR).

| ‘Euro 6- plus IUPR’ OBD | = includes relaxed diesel OBD threshold limits and relaxed in use performance ratio (IUPR) |
| --- | --- |

‘Euro 6- plus IUPR’ OBD

= includes relaxed diesel OBD threshold limits and relaxed in use performance ratio (IUPR)

Note: Article 4(7) only permits type-approvals according to characters W, X and Y to be performed once Euro 6 OBD thresholds have been introduced.

2.   Examples of type–approval certification numbers.

2.1.   An example is provided below of a first approval without any extensions of an Euro 5 light passenger vehicle. The approval was granted to the base regulation and its implementing regulation so the forth component is 0001. The vehicle is of category M1 represented by letter A. The approval was issued by the Netherlands:

e4*715/2007*692/2008A*0001*00

2.2.   This second example shows a fourth approval for the second extension of an Euro 5 light passenger vehicle of category M1G meeting the special social needs requirements (letter C). The approval was granted to the base regulation and an amending regulation in the year 2009 and was issued by Germany:

e1*715/2007*.../2009C*0004*02

Appendix 7

Image 2

Manufacturer’s certificate of compliance with the OBD in-use performance requirements

(Manufacturer): ...

(Address of the manufacturer): ...

Certifies that

— The vehicle types listed in attachment to this Certificate are in compliance with the provisions of section 3 of Appendix 1 to Annex XI of Regulation (EC) No 692/2008 relating to the in-use performance of the OBD system under all reasonably foreseeable driving conditions

— The plan(s) describing the detailed technical criteria for incrementing the numerator and denominator of each monitor attached to this Certificate are correct and complete for all types of vehicles to which this Certificate applies.

Done at [... Place]

On [... Date]

[Signature of the Manufacturer’s Representative]

Annexes:

— List of vehicle types to which this Certificate applies,

— Plan(s) describing the detailed technical criteria for incrementing the numerator and denominator of each monitor, as well as plan(s) for disabling numerators, denominators and general denominator.

ANNEX II

IN-SERVICE CONFORMITY

1.   Introduction

1.1.   This Annex sets out the in-service conformity requirements for vehicles type approved to this Regulation.

2.   Audit of in-service conformity

2.1.   The audit of in-service conformity by the approval authority shall be conducted on the basis of any relevant information that the manufacturer has, under the same procedures as those for the conformity of production defined in Article 12(1) and (2) of Directive 2007/46/EC and in points 1 and 2 of Annex X to that Directive. Information from approval authority and Member State surveillance testing may complement the in-service monitoring reports supplied by the manufacturer.

2.2.   The figure referred to under point 9 of Appendix 2 to this Annex and Figure 4/2 of Appendix 4 to UN/ECE Regulation 83 illustrates the procedure for in-service conformity checking. The process for in-service conformity is described in Appendix 3 to this Annex.

2.3.   As part of the information provided for the in-service conformity control, at the request of the approval authority, the manufacturer shall report to the type-approval authority on warranty claims, warranty repair works and OBD faults recorded at servicing, according to a format agreed at type-approval. The information shall detail the frequency and substance of faults for emissions related components and systems. The reports shall be filed at least once a year for each vehicle model for the duration of the period defined in Article 9(4) of this Regulation.

2.4.   Parameters defining the in-service family

The in-service family may be defined by basic design parameters which shall be common to vehicles within the family. Accordingly, vehicle types may be considered as belonging to the same in-service family if they have in common, or within the stated tolerances, the following parameters:

2.4.1.   combustion process (two stroke, four stroke, rotary);

2.4.2.   number of cylinders;

2.4.3.   configuration of the cylinder block (in-line, V, radial, horizontally opposed, other). The inclination or orientation of the cylinders is not a criteria);

2.4.4.   method of engine fuelling (e.g. indirect or direct injection);

2.4.5.   type of cooling system (air, water, oil);

2.4.6.   method of aspiration (naturally aspirated, pressure charged);

2.4.7.   fuel for which the engine is designed (petrol, diesel, NG, LPG, etc.). Bi fuelled vehicles may be grouped with dedicated fuel vehicles providing one of the fuels is common;

2.4.8.   type of catalytic converter (three-way catalyst, lean NOx trap, SCR, lean NOx catalyst or other(s));

2.4.9.   type of particulate trap (with or without);

2.4.10.   exhaust gas recirculation (with or without, cooled or non cooled); and

2.4.11.   engine cylinder capacity of the largest engine within the family minus 30 %.

2.5.   Information requirements

An audit of in-service conformity will be conducted by the approval authority on the basis of information supplied by the manufacturer. Such information shall include in particular, the following:

2.5.1.   the name and address of the manufacturer;

2.5.2.   the name, address, telephone and fax numbers and e-mail address of his authorised representative within the areas covered by the manufacturer’s information;

2.5.3.   the model name(s) of the vehicles included in the manufacturer’s information;

2.5.4.   where appropriate, the list of vehicle types covered within the manufacturer’s information, i.e. the in-service family group in accordance with section 2.1;

2.5.5.   the vehicle identification number (VIN) codes applicable to these vehicle types within the in-service family (VIN prefix);

2.5.6.   the numbers of the type-approvals applicable to these vehicle types within the in-service family, including, where applicable, the numbers of all extensions and field fixes/recalls (re-works);

2.5.7.   details of extensions, field fixes/recalls to those type-approvals for the vehicles covered within the manufacturer’s information (if requested by the approval authority);

2.5.8.   the period of time over which the manufacturer’s information was collected;

2.5.9.   the vehicle build period covered within the manufacturer’s information (e.g. vehicles manufactured during the 2007 calendar year);

2.5.10.   the manufacturer’s in-service conformity checking procedure, including:

| (a) | vehicle location method; |
| --- | --- |

(a)

vehicle location method;

| (b) | vehicle selection and rejection criteria; |
| --- | --- |

(b)

vehicle selection and rejection criteria;

| (c) | test types and procedures used for the programme; |
| --- | --- |

(c)

test types and procedures used for the programme;

| (d) | the manufacturer’s acceptance/rejection criteria for the in-service family group; |
| --- | --- |

(d)

the manufacturer’s acceptance/rejection criteria for the in-service family group;

| (e) | geographical area(s) within which the manufacturer has collected information; |
| --- | --- |

(e)

geographical area(s) within which the manufacturer has collected information;

| (f) | sample size and sampling plan used; |
| --- | --- |

(f)

sample size and sampling plan used;

2.5.11.   the results from the manufacturer’s in-service conformity procedure, including:

| (a) | identification of the vehicles included in the programme (whether tested or not). The identification shall include the following:






  — | model name, |
| --- | --- | --- |

(a)

identification of the vehicles included in the programme (whether tested or not). The identification shall include the following:

—

model name,

| — | vehicle identification number (VIN), |
| --- | --- |

—

vehicle identification number (VIN),

| — | vehicle registration number, |
| --- | --- |

—

vehicle registration number,

| — | date of manufacture, |
| --- | --- |

—

date of manufacture,

| — | region of use (where known), |
| --- | --- |

—

region of use (where known),

| — | tyres fitted, |
| --- | --- |

—

tyres fitted,

| (b) | the reason(s) for rejecting a vehicle from the sample; |
| --- | --- |

(b)

the reason(s) for rejecting a vehicle from the sample;

| (c) | service history for each vehicle in the sample (including any re-works); |
| --- | --- |

(c)

service history for each vehicle in the sample (including any re-works);

| (d) | repair history for each vehicle in the sample (where known); |
| --- | --- |

(d)

repair history for each vehicle in the sample (where known);

| (e) | test data, including the following:






  — | date of test, |
| --- | --- | --- |

(e)

test data, including the following:

—

date of test,

| — | location of test, |
| --- | --- |

—

location of test,

| — | distance indicated on vehicle odometer, |
| --- | --- |

—

distance indicated on vehicle odometer,

| — | test fuel specifications (e.g. test reference fuel or market fuel), |
| --- | --- |

—

test fuel specifications (e.g. test reference fuel or market fuel),

| — | test conditions (temperature, humidity, dynamometer inertia weight), |
| --- | --- |

—

test conditions (temperature, humidity, dynamometer inertia weight),

| — | dynamometer settings (e.g. power setting), |
| --- | --- |

—

dynamometer settings (e.g. power setting),

| — | test results (from at least three different vehicles per family), |
| --- | --- |

—

test results (from at least three different vehicles per family),

2.5.12.   records of indication from the OBD system.

3.   Selection of vehicles for in-service conformity

3.1.   The information gathered by the manufacturer shall be sufficiently comprehensive to ensure that in-service performance can be assessed for normal conditions of use as defined in section 1. The manufacturer’s sampling shall be drawn from at least two Member States with substantially different vehicle operating conditions. Factors such as differences in fuels, ambient conditions, average road speeds, and urban/highway driving split shall be taken into consideration in the selection of the Member States.

3.2.   In selecting the Member States for sampling vehicles, the manufacturer may select vehicles from a Member State that is considered to be particularly representative. In this case, the manufacturer shall demonstrate to the approval authority which granted the type approval that the selection is representative (e.g. by the market having the largest annual sales of a vehicle family within the Community). When an in-service family requires more than one sample lot to be tested as defined in paragraph 3.5., the vehicles in the second and third sample lots shall reflect different vehicle operating conditions from those selected for the first sample.

3.3.   The emissions testing may be done at a test facility which is located in a different market or region from where the vehicles have been selected.

3.4.   The in-service conformity tests by the manufacturer shall be continuously carried out reflecting the production cycle of applicable vehicles types within a given in-service vehicle family. The maximum time period between commencing two in-service conformity checks shall not exceed 18 months. In the case of vehicle types covered by an extension to the type-approval that did not require an emissions test, this period may be extended up to 24 months.

3.5.   When applying the statistical procedure defined in Appendix 2, the number of sample lots shall depend on the annual sales volume of an in-service family in the Community, as defined in the following table:

| Registrations per calendar year | Number of sample lots |
| --- | --- |
| up to 100 000 | 1 |
| 100 001 to 200 000 | 2 |
| above 200 000 | 3 |

Registrations per calendar year

Number of sample lots

up to 100 000

1

100 001 to 200 000

2

above 200 000

3

On the basis of the audit referred to in Section 2 the approval authority shall adopt one of the following decisions and actions:

| (a) | decide that the in-service conformity of a vehicle type or a vehicle in-service family is satisfactory and not take any further action; |
| --- | --- |

(a)

decide that the in-service conformity of a vehicle type or a vehicle in-service family is satisfactory and not take any further action;

| (b) | decide that the data provided by the manufacturer is insufficient to reach a decision and request additional information or test data from the manufacturer; |
| --- | --- |

(b)

decide that the data provided by the manufacturer is insufficient to reach a decision and request additional information or test data from the manufacturer;

| (c) | decide that based on data from the approval authority or Member State surveillance testing programmes, that information provided by the manufacturer is insufficient to reach a decision and request additional information or test data from the manufacturer; |
| --- | --- |

(c)

decide that based on data from the approval authority or Member State surveillance testing programmes, that information provided by the manufacturer is insufficient to reach a decision and request additional information or test data from the manufacturer;

| (d) | decide that the in-service conformity of a vehicle type, that is part of an in-service family, is unsatisfactory and proceed to have such vehicle type tested in accordance with Appendix 1. |
| --- | --- |

(d)

decide that the in-service conformity of a vehicle type, that is part of an in-service family, is unsatisfactory and proceed to have such vehicle type tested in accordance with Appendix 1.

4.1.   Where type 1 tests are considered necessary to check the conformity of emission control devices with the requirements for their performance while in service, such tests shall be carried out using a test procedure meeting the statistical criteria defined in Appendix 2

4.2.   The approval authority, in cooperation with the manufacturer, shall select a sample of vehicles with sufficient mileage whose use under normal conditions can be reasonably assured. The manufacturer shall be consulted on the choice of the vehicles in the sample and allowed to attend the confirmatory checks of the vehicles.

4.3.   The manufacturer shall be authorised, under the supervision of the approval authority, to carry out checks, even of a destructive nature, on those vehicles with emission levels in excess of the limit values with a view to establishing possible causes of deterioration which cannot be attributed to the manufacturer (e.g. use of leaded petrol before the test date) Where the results of the checks confirm such causes, those test results shall be excluded from the conformity check.

Appendix 1

IN-SERVICE CONFORMITY CHECK

1.   INTRODUCTION

1.1.   This Appendix sets out the criteria referred to in Section 4 regarding the selection of vehicles for testing and the procedures for the in-service conformity control.

2.   SELECTION CRITERIA

The criteria for acceptance of a selected vehicle are defined in sections 2.1 to 2.8.

2.1.   The vehicle shall belong to a vehicle type that is type-approved under this Regulation and covered by a certificate of conformity in accordance with Directive 2007/46/EC. It shall be registered and have been used in the Community.

2.2.   The vehicle shall have been in service for at least 15 000 km or 6 months, whichever the later, and for no more than 100 000 km or 5 years, whichever the sooner.

2.3.   There shall be a maintenance record to show that the vehicle has been properly maintained (e.g. has been serviced in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations)

2.4.   The vehicle shall exhibit no indications of abuse (e. g. racing, overloading, misfuelling, or other misuse), or other factors (e. g. tampering) that could affect emission performance. In the case of vehicles fitted with an OBD system, the fault code and mileage information stored in the computer shall be taken into account. A vehicle shall not be selected for testing if the information stored in the computer shows that the vehicle has operated after a fault code was stored and a relatively prompt repair was not carried out.

2.5.   There shall have been no unauthorised major repair to the engine or major repair of the vehicle.

2.6.   The lead content and sulphur content of a fuel sample from the vehicle tank shall meet the applicable standards laid down in Directive 98/70/EC (1) and there shall be no evidence of mis-fuelling. Checks may be done in the tailpipe.

2.7.   There shall be no indication of any problem that might jeopardize the safety of laboratory personnel.

2.8.   All anti-pollution system components on the vehicle shall be in conformity with the applicable type-approval.

3.   DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE

Diagnosis and any normal maintenance necessary shall be performed on vehicles accepted for testing, prior to measuring exhaust emissions, in accordance with the procedure laid down in points 3.1 to 3.7.

3.1.   The following checks shall be carried out: checks on air filter, all drive belts, all fluid levels, radiator cap, all vacuum hoses and electrical wiring related to the antipollution system for integrity; checks on ignition, fuel metering and pollution control device components for maladjustments and/or tampering. All discrepancies shall be recorded.

3.2.   The OBD system shall be checked for proper functioning. Any malfunction indications in the OBD memory shall be recorded and the requisite repairs shall be carried out. If the OBD malfunction indicator registers a malfunction during a preconditioning cycle, the fault may be identified and repaired. The test may be re-run and the results of that repaired vehicle used.

3.3.   The ignition system shall be checked and defective components replaced, for example spark plugs, cables, etc.

3.4.   The compression shall be checked. If the result is unsatisfactory the vehicle shall be rejected.

3.5.   The engine parameters shall be checked to the manufacturer’s specifications and adjusted if necessary.

3.6.   If the vehicle is within 800 km of a scheduled maintenance service, that service shall be performed according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Regardless of odometer reading, the oil and air filter may be changed at the request of the manufacturer.

3.7.   Upon acceptance of the vehicle, the fuel shall be replaced with appropriate emission test reference fuel, unless the manufacturer accepts the use of market fuel.

4.   IN-SERVICE TESTING

4.1.   When a check on vehicles is deemed necessary, emission tests in accordance with Annex III to this Regulation are performed on pre-conditioned vehicles selected in accordance with the requirements of sections 2 and 3 of this Appendix. This test shall only include the measurement of particle number emissions for vehicles approved to the Euro 6 emission standards in categories W, X and Y as defined in Table 1 of Appendix 6 to Annex 1 of this Regulation. Pre-conditioning cycles additional to those specified in Section 5.3. of Annex 4 to UN/ECE Regulation 83 will only be allowed if they are representative of normal driving.

4.2.   Vehicles equipped with an OBD system may be checked for proper in-service functionality, of the malfunction indication, etc., in relation to levels of emissions (e.g. the malfunction indication limits defined in Annex XI to this Regulation) for the type-approved specifications.

4.3.   The OBD system may be checked, for example, for levels of emissions above the applicable limit values with no malfunction indication, systematic erroneous activation of the malfunction indication and identified faulty or deteriorated components in the OBD system.

4.4.   If a component or system operates in a manner not covered by the particulars in the type-approval certificate and/or information package for such vehicle types and such deviation has not been authorized under Article 13(1) or (2) of Directive 2007/46/EC, with no malfunction indication by the OBD, the component or system shall not be replaced prior to emission testing, unless it is determined that the component or system has been tampered with or abused in such a manner that the OBD does not detect the resulting malfunction.

5.   EVALUATION OF RESULTS

5.1.   The test results shall be submitted to the evaluation procedure in accordance with Appendix 2.

5.2.   Test results shall not be multiplied by deterioration factors.

6.   PLAN OF REMEDIAL MEASURES

6.1.   The approval authority shall request the manufacturer to submit a plan of remedial measures to remedy the non-compliance when more than one vehicle is found to be an outlying emitter that meets either of the following conditions:

| (a) | the conditions set out in section 3.2.3 of Appendix 4 to UN/ECE Regulation 83 and where both the approval authority and the manufacturer agree that the excess emission is due to the same cause, or |
| --- | --- |

(a)

the conditions set out in section 3.2.3 of Appendix 4 to UN/ECE Regulation 83 and where both the approval authority and the manufacturer agree that the excess emission is due to the same cause, or

| (b) | the conditions set out in section 3.2.4 of Appendix 4 to UN/ECE Regulation 83 where the approval authority has determined that the excess emission is due to the same cause. |
| --- | --- |

(b)

the conditions set out in section 3.2.4 of Appendix 4 to UN/ECE Regulation 83 where the approval authority has determined that the excess emission is due to the same cause.

6.2.   The plan of remedial measures shall be filed with the type-approval authority not later than 60 working days from the date of the notification referred to in section 6.1. The type-approval authority shall within 30 working days declare its approval or disapproval of the plan of remedial measures. However, where the manufacturer can demonstrate, to the satisfaction of the competent approval authority, that further time is required to investigate the non-compliance in order to submit a plan of remedial measures, an extension shall be granted.

6.3.   The remedial measures shall apply to all vehicles likely to be affected by the same defect. The need to amend the type-approval documents shall be assessed.

6.4.   The manufacturer shall provide a copy of all communications related to the plan of remedial measures, and shall also maintain a record of the recall campaign, and supply regular status reports to the approval authority.

The plan of remedial measures shall include the requirements specified in points 6.5.1 to 6.5.11. The manufacturer shall assign a unique identifying name or number to the plan of remedial measures.

6.5.1.   A description of each vehicle type included in the plan of remedial measures.

6.5.2.   A description of the specific modifications, alterations, repairs, corrections, adjustments or other changes to be made to bring the vehicles into conformity including a brief summary of the data and technical studies which support the decision of the manufacturer as to the particular measures to be taken to correct the non-conformity.

6.5.3.   A description of the method by which the manufacturer informs the vehicle owners.

6.5.4.   A description of the proper maintenance or use, if any, which the manufacturer stipulates as a condition of eligibility for repair under the plan of remedial measures, and an explanation of the reasons why the manufacturer imposes any such condition. No maintenance or use conditions may be imposed unless it is demonstrably related to the non-conformity and the remedial measures.

6.5.5.   A description of the procedure to be followed by vehicle owners to obtain correction of the non-conformity. This description shall include a date after which the remedial measures may be taken, the estimated time for the workshop to perform the repairs and where they can be done. The repair shall be done expediently, within a reasonable time after delivery of the vehicle.

6.5.6.   A copy of the information transmitted to the vehicle owner.

6.5.7.   A brief description of the system which the manufacturer uses to assure an adequate supply of component or systems for fulfilling the remedial action. It shall be indicated when there will be an adequate supply of components or systems to initiate the campaign.

6.5.8.   A copy of all instructions to be sent to those persons who are to perform the repair.

6.5.9.   A description of the impact of the proposed remedial measures on the emissions, fuel consumption, driveability, and safety of each vehicle type, covered by the plan of remedial measures with data and technical studies which support these conclusions.

6.5.10.   Any other information, reports or data the type-approval authority may reasonably determine is necessary to evaluate the plan of remedial measures.

6.5.11.   Where the plan of remedial measures includes a recall, a description of the method for recording the repair shall be submitted to the type-approval authority. If a label is used, an example of it shall be submitted.

6.6.   The manufacturer may be required to conduct reasonably designed and necessary tests on components and vehicles incorporating a proposed change, repair, or modification to demonstrate the effectiveness of the change, repair, or modification.

6.7.   The manufacturer is responsible for keeping a record of every vehicle recalled and repaired and the workshop which performed the repair. The type-approval authority shall have access to the record on request for a period of 5 years from the implementation of the plan of remedial measures.

6.8.   The repair and modification or addition of new equipment shall be recorded in a certificate supplied by the manufacturer to the vehicle owner.

---

(1)  
  OJ L 350, 28.12.1998, p. 58.

Appendix 2

STATISTICAL PROCEDURE FOR IN-SERVICE CONFORMITY TESTING

1.   This procedure shall be used to verify the in-service conformity requirements for the type 1 test. The applicable statistical method set out in Appendix 4 to UN/ECE Regulation No 83 shall apply, with the exceptions described in the sections 2 to 9.

2.   Footnote 1 shall not apply.

3.   Paragraphs 3.2 shall be understood as follows:

A vehicle is said to be an outlying emitter when the conditions given in paragraph 3.2.2 are met.

4.   Paragraph 3.2.1 shall not apply.

5.   In paragraph 3.2.2 the reference to row B of the table in paragraph 5.3.1.4 shall be understood as reference to Table 1 of Annex I to Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 for Euro 5 vehicles and to Table 2 of Annex I to Regulation (EC) No 715/2007’for Euro 6 vehicles.

6.   In paragraphs 3.2.3.2.1 and 3.2.4.2 the reference to paragraph 6 of Appendix 3 shall be understood as reference to Section 6 of Appendix 1 to Annex II to this Regulation.

7.   In footnotes 2 and 3 the reference to row A of the table in paragraph 5.3.1.4 shall be understood as reference to Table 1 of Annex I to Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 for Euro 5 vehicles and to Table 2 of Annex I to Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 for Euro 6 vehicles.

8.   In paragraph 4.2. the reference to paragraph 5.3.1.4 shall be understood as reference to Table 1 of Annex I to Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 for Euro 5 vehicles and Table 2 of Annex I to Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 for Euro 6 vehicles.

9.   Figure 4/1 shall be replaced by the following figure:

In-service conformity checking — audit procedure

START

Vehicle manufacturer and type-approval authority complete vehicle approval for the new vehicle type. Type-approval authority (TAA) grants type-approval

Manufacture and sales of approved vehicle type

Vehicle manufacturer develops own in-service conformity procedure

Vehicle manufacturer carries out own in-service conformity procedure (vehicle type or family)

In-house in-service conformity report for approved vehicle type or family

Vehicle manufacturer compiles report of the in-house procedure (including all data required by Section 2 of Annex II)

Information from approval authority or Member State surveillance testing

TAA (1) reviews manufacturer’s in-service conformity report and complementary information from type-approval authority or Member State surveillance testing

Manufacturer submits in-service conformity report to TAA (1) for audit

Manufacturer provides or obtains additional information or test data

Does the TAA (1) accept that manufacturer's in-service conformity report confirms acceptability of a vehicle type within the family? (Section 2 of Annex II)

NO

Does TAA (1) decide that information is insufficient to reach a decision?

YES

Manufacturer compiles new in-service conformity report

YES

NO

Process Completed No further action required

TAA (1) begins formal in-service compliance surveillance programme on suspect vehicle type (as described in Appendix 1 of Annex II to this Regulation)

Go to Figure 4/2 of Appendix 4 to UN/ECE Regulation 83

(1) In this case, TAA means the approval authority that granted the type-approval according to this Regulation.

Appendix 3

RESPONSIBILITIES FOR IN-SERVICE CONFORMITY

1.   The process of checking in-service conformity check is illustrated in Figure 1

2.   The manufacturer shall compile all the information needed to comply with the requirements of this Annex. The approval authority may also take information from surveillance programmes into consideration.

3.   The approval authority shall conduct all the procedures and tests necessary to ensure that the requirements regarding the in-service conformity are met. (Phases 2 to 4).

4.   In the event of discrepancies or disagreements in the assessment of information supplied, the approval authority shall request clarification from the technical service that conducted the type-approval test.

5.   The manufacturer shall establish and implement a plan of remedial measures. This plan shall be approved by the approval authority before it is implemented (Phase 5).

Figure 1

Illustration of the in-service conformity process

KEY FEATURES OF THE IN-SERVICE CONFORMITY CHECK

Phase 1

Annex II, section 2 and 3

Information provided by the manufacturer and from surveillance programmes

Phase 2

Annex II, section 4

Assessment of the information by the

type approval authority

Phase 3

Annex II, appendix 1

Selection of vehicles

Phase 4

Annex II, appendix 2

Inspection of vehicles

Phase 5

Annex II, section 4.4

Submission and approval of remedial plan

ANNEX III

VERIFYING AVERAGE EXHAUST EMISSIONS AT AMBIENT CONDITIONS

(TYPE 1 TEST)

1.   INTRODUCTION

This Annex describes the procedure for the type 1 test verifying the average exhaust emissions at ambient conditions.

2.   GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

2.1.   The general requirements shall be those set out in paragraph 5.3.1 of UN/ECE Regulation 83, with the exceptions described in sections 2.2 to 2.5.

2.2.   The vehicles that are subject to the test set out in paragraph 5.3.1.1 shall be understood as being all vehicles covered by the scope of this Regulation.

2.3.   The pollutants specified in paragraph 5.3.1.2.4 shall be understood as being all those covered by Tables 1 and 2 of Annex 1 of Regulation (EC) No 715/2007.

2.4.   The reference to the deterioration factors from paragraph 5.3.6 in paragraph 5.3.1.4 shall be understood as being a reference to the deterioration factors specified in Annex VII to this Regulation.

2.5.   The emission limits referred to in paragraph 5.3.1.4 shall be understood as being a reference to the emission limits set out in Table 1 of Annex 1 to Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 for Euro 5 vehicles, and in Table 2 of Annex 1 of Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 for Euro 6 vehicles.

Requirements for vehicles fuelled by LPG, natural gas or biomethane

2.6.1.   The general requirements for testing vehicles fuelled by LPG, natural gas or biomethane shall be those set out in section 1 of Annex 12 to UN/ECE Regulation 83.

3.   TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

3.1.   The technical requirements shall be those set out in Annex 4 to UN/ECE Regulation No 83, with the exceptions set out in sections 3.2 to 3.12.

3.2.   The reference fuels specified in paragraph 3.2 shall be understood as being a reference to the appropriate reference fuel specifications in Annex IX to this Regulation.

3.3.   The pollutant gases mentioned in paragraph 4.3.1.1 shall be understood as including methane:

‘... (HFID). It shall be calibrated with propane gas expressed as equivalent to carbon atoms (C1).

Methane (CH4) analysis:

The analyser shall be either a gas chromatograph combined with a flame ionisation (FID) type or a flame ionisation (FID) with a non-methane cutter type, calibrated with methane gas expressed equivalent to carbon atoms (C1).

Nitrogen oxide (NOx) ...’

3.4.   The hydrocarbons ratios in paragraph 8.2 shall be understood as follows:

| For petrol (C1H1,89O0,016) | d = 0,631 g/l |
| --- | --- |
| For diesel (C1H1,86O0,005) | d = 0,622 g/l |
| For LPG (C1H2,525) | d = 0,649 g/l |
| For NG/biomethane (CH4) | d = 0,714 g/l |
| For ethanol (E85) (C1H2,74O0,385) | d = 0,932 g/l |

For petrol (C1H1,89O0,016)

1

1,89

0,016

d = 0,631 g/l

For diesel (C1H1,86O0,005)

1

1,86

0,005

d = 0,622 g/l

For LPG (C1H2,525)

1

2,525

d = 0,649 g/l

For NG/biomethane (CH4)

4

d = 0,714 g/l

For ethanol (E85) (C1H2,74O0,385)

1

2,74

0,385

d = 0,932 g/l

3.5.   From the relevant dates set out in Article 10(4) and 10(5) of Regulation (EC) No 715/2007, paragraph 4.1.2. of Appendix 3 to Annex 4 shall be understood as follows:

‘Tyres

The choice of tyres shall be based on the rolling resistance. The tyres with the highest rolling resistance shall be chosen, measured according to ISO 28580.

If there are more than three tyre rolling resistances, the tyre with the second highest rolling resistance shall be chosen.

The rolling resistance characteristics of the tyres fitted to production vehicles shall reflect those of the tyres used for type-approval’

3.6.   Paragraph 2.2.2 of Appendix 5 to Annex 4 shall be understood as covering:

‘... concentrations of CO2, CO, THC, CH4 and NOx ...’

3.7.   Paragraph 1 of Appendix 8 to Annex 4 shall be amended to read:

‘... There is no humidity correction for THC, CH4 and CO, ...’

3.8.   The second subparagraph of paragraph 1.3 of Appendix 8 to Annex 4 shall be understood as:

‘... The dilution factor is calculated as follows:

For each reference fuel:

Formula

For a fuel of composition CxHyOz the general formula is:

Formula

For the reference fuels contained Annex IX, the values of “X” are as follows.

| Fuel | X |
| --- | --- |
| Petrol (E5) | 13,4 |
| Diesel (B5) | 13,5 |
| LPG | 11,9 |
| NG/biomethane | 9,5 |
| Ethanol (E85) | 12,5’ |

Fuel

X

Petrol (E5)

13,4

Diesel (B5)

13,5

LPG

11,9

NG/biomethane

9,5

Ethanol (E85)

12,5’

3.9.   An addition to the requirements of Paragraph 1.3. of Appendix 8 to Annex 4, the following requirements shall apply:

Non-methane hydrocarbon concentration is calculated as follows:

CNMHC = CTHC — (Rf CH4 × CCH4)

NMHC

THC

CH4

CH4

where:

| CNMHC | = | corrected concentration of NMHC in the diluted exhaust gas, expressed in ppm carbon equivalent, |
| --- | --- | --- |
| CTHC | = | concentration of THC in the diluted exhaust gas, expressed in ppm carbon equivalent and corrected by the amount of THC contained in the dilution air, |
| CCH4 | = | concentration of CH4 in the diluted exhaust gas, expressed in ppm carbon equivalent and corrected by the amount of CH4 contained in the dilution air, |
| Rf CH4 | = | is the FID response factor to methane as defined in paragraph 2.3 of Annex 4-Appendix 6. |

CNMHC

NMHC

=

corrected concentration of NMHC in the diluted exhaust gas, expressed in ppm carbon equivalent,

CTHC

THC

=

concentration of THC in the diluted exhaust gas, expressed in ppm carbon equivalent and corrected by the amount of THC contained in the dilution air,

CCH4

CH4

=

concentration of CH4 in the diluted exhaust gas, expressed in ppm carbon equivalent and corrected by the amount of CH4 contained in the dilution air,

4

4

Rf CH4

CH4

=

is the FID response factor to methane as defined in paragraph 2.3 of Annex 4-Appendix 6.

3.10.   Paragraph 1.5.2.3 of Appendix 8 to Annex 4 shall be understood as including the following:

| QTHC = 0,932 | in the case of ethanol (E85) |
| --- | --- |

QTHC = 0,932

THC

in the case of ethanol (E85)

3.11.   References to HC should be understood as references to THC in the following paragraphs:

| (a) | Paragraph 4.3.1.1; |
| --- | --- |

(a)

Paragraph 4.3.1.1;

| (b) | Paragraph 4.3.2; |
| --- | --- |

(b)

Paragraph 4.3.2;

| (c) | Appendix 6 — Paragraph 2.2; |
| --- | --- |

(c)

Appendix 6 — Paragraph 2.2;

| (d) | Appendix 8 — Paragraph 1.3; |
| --- | --- |

(d)

Appendix 8 — Paragraph 1.3;

| (e) | Appendix 8 — Paragraph 1.5.1.3; |
| --- | --- |

(e)

Appendix 8 — Paragraph 1.5.1.3;

| (f) | Appendix 8 — Paragraph 1.5.2.3; |
| --- | --- |

(f)

Appendix 8 — Paragraph 1.5.2.3;

| (g) | Appendix 8 — Paragraph 2.1. |
| --- | --- |

(g)

Appendix 8 — Paragraph 2.1.

3.12.   References to hydrocarbons should be understood as references to total hydrocarbons in the following paragraphs:

| (a) | Paragraph 4.3.1.1; |
| --- | --- |

(a)

Paragraph 4.3.1.1;

| (b) | Paragraph 4.3.2; |
| --- | --- |

(b)

Paragraph 4.3.2;

| (c) | Paragraph 7.2.8. |
| --- | --- |

(c)

Paragraph 7.2.8.

Technical requirements for a vehicle equipped with a periodically regenerating system

3.13.1.   The technical requirements shall be those set out in section 3 of Annex 13 to UN/ECE Regulation No 83, with the exceptions described in sections 3.13.2 to 3.13.4.

3.13.2.   The reference to Annex 1, items 4.2.11.2.1.10.1 to 4.2.11.2.1.10.4 or 4.2.11.2.5.4.1 to 4.2.11.2.5.4.4 in section 3.1.3 shall be understood as references to items 3.2.12.2.1.11.1 to 3.2.12.2.1.11.4 or 3.2.12.2.6.4.1 to 3.2.12.2.6.4.4 of Appendix 3 to Annex I of Regulation (EC) No 692/2008.

3.13.3.   At the request of the manufacturer, the test procedure specific to periodically regenerating systems shall not apply to a regenerative device if the manufacturer provides data to the approval authority that, during cycles where regeneration occurs, emissions remain below the standards given in Table 1 or 2 of Annex I to Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 applied for the concerned vehicle category after agreement of the technical service.

3.13.4.   For a periodically regenerating device, during cycles where regeneration occurs, emission standards can be exceeded. If a regeneration of a pollution control device occurs at least once per type 1 test and the device has already regenerated at least once during vehicle preparation cycle, it shall be considered as a continuously regenerating system which does not require a special test procedure.

ANNEX IV

EMISSIONS DATA REQUIRED AT TYPE-APPROVAL FOR ROADWORTHINESS PURPOSES

Appendix 1

MEASURING CARBON MONOXIDE EMISSION AT IDLING SPEEDS

(TYPE 2 TEST)

1.   INTRODUCTION

1.1.   This appendix describes the procedure for the type 2 test, measuring carbon monoxide emissions at idling speeds (normal and high).

2.   GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

2.1.   The general requirements shall be those specified in paragraphs 5.3.7.1 to 5.3.7.4 of UN/ECE Regulation 83, with the exceptions set out in sections 2.2, 2.3 and 2.4.

2.2.   The atomic ratios specified in section 5.3.7.3 shall be understood as follows:

| Hcv = Atomic ratio of hydrogen to carbon | — | for petrol (E5) 1,89 |
| --- | --- | --- |

Hcv = Atomic ratio of hydrogen to carbon

—

for petrol (E5) 1,89

| — | for LPG 2,53 |
| --- | --- |

—

for LPG 2,53

| — | for NG/biomethane 4,0 |
| --- | --- |

—

for NG/biomethane 4,0

| — | for ethanol (E85) 2,74 |
| --- | --- |

—

for ethanol (E85) 2,74

Ocv = Atomic ratio of oxygen to carbon

| — | for petrol (E5) 0 016 |
| --- | --- |

—

for petrol (E5) 0 016

| — | for LPG 0,0 |
| --- | --- |

—

for LPG 0,0

| — | for NG/biomethane 0,0 |
| --- | --- |

—

for NG/biomethane 0,0

| — | for ethanol (E85) 0,39 |
| --- | --- |

—

for ethanol (E85) 0,39

2.3.   The table in section 2.2 of Appendix 4 to Annex I to this Regulation shall be completed on the basis of the requirements set out in sections 2.2 and 2.4 of this Annex.

2.4.   The manufacturer shall confirm the accuracy of the Lambda value recorded at the time of type-approval in paragraph 2.1 of this Appendix as being representative of typical production vehicles within 24 months of the date of the granting of type-approval by the technical service. An assessment shall be made on the basis of surveys and studies of production vehicles.

3.   TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

3.1.   The technical requirements shall be those set out in Annex 5 to UN/ECE Regulation No 83, with the exceptions set out in section 3.2.

3.2.   The reference fuels specified in paragraph 2.1 of Annex 5 to UN/ECE Regulation No 83 shall be understood as referring to the appropriate reference fuel specifications in Annex IX to this Regulation.

Appendix 2

MEASUREMENT OF SMOKE OPACITY

1.   INTRODUCTION

1.1.   This Appendix describes the requirements for measuring the opacity of exhaust emissions.

2.   SYMBOL OF THE CORRECTED ABSORPTION COEFFICIENT

2.1.   A symbol of the corrected absorption coefficient shall be affixed to every vehicle conforming to a vehicle type to which this test applies. The symbol shall be a rectangle surrounding a figure expressing in m–1 the corrected absorption coefficient obtained, at the time of approval, from the test under free acceleration. The test method is described in section 4.

2.2.   The symbol shall be clearly legible and indelible. It shall be fixed in a conspicuous and readily accessible place, the location of which shall be specified in the Addendum to the type-approval certificate shown in Appendix 4 to Annex I.

Figure IV.2.1 gives an example of the symbol.

Figure IV.2.1

Minimum dimensions b = 5,6 mm

The above symbol shows that the corrected absorption coefficient is 1,30 m–1.

3.   SPECIFICATIONS AND TESTS

3.1.   The specifications and tests shall be those set out in Part III, section 24, of UN/ECE Regulation No 24, with the exception to these procedures set out in section 3.2.

3.2.   The reference to Annex 2 in paragraph 24.1 of UN/ECE Regulation No 24 shall be understood as a reference to Appendix 2 to Annex X to this Regulation.

4.   TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

4.1.   The technical requirements shall be those set out in Annexes 4, 5, 7, 8, 9 and 10 to UN/ECE Regulation No 24, with the exceptions set out in sections 4.2., 4.3 and 4.4.

4.2.   Test at steady speeds over the full load curve

4.2.1.   The references to Annex 1 in paragraph 3.1. of Annex 4 of UN/ECE Regulation No 24 shall be understood as references to Appendix 3 to Annex I to this Regulation.

4.2.2.   The reference fuel specified in paragraph 3.2 of Annex 4 of UN/ECE Regulation No 24 shall be understood as reference to the reference fuel in Annex IX to this Regulation appropriate to the emission limits against which the vehicle is being type approved.

4.3.   Test under free acceleration

4.3.1.   The references to Table 2, Annex 2 in paragraph 2.2 of Annex 5 to UN/ECE Regulation No 24 shall be understood as references to the table under point 2.4.2.1 of Appendix 4 to Annex I to this Regulation.

4.3.2.   The references to paragraph 7.3 of Annex 1 in paragraph 2.3 of Annex 5 to UN/ECE Regulation No 24 shall be understood as references to Appendix 3 to Annex I to this Regulation.

4.4.   ‘ECE’ method of measuring the net power of C.I. engines

4.4.1.   The references in paragraph 7 of Annex 10 to UN/ECE Regulation No 24 to the ‘Appendix to this Annex’ and in paragraphs 7 and 8 of Annex 10 to UN/ECE Regulation No 24 to ‘Annex 1’ shall be understood as references to Appendix 3 to Annex I to this Regulation.

ANNEX V

VERIFYING EMISSIONS OF CRANKCASE GASES

(TYPE 3 TEST)

1.   INTRODUCTION

1.1.   This Annex describes the procedure for the type 3 test verifying emissions of crankcase gases.

2.   GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

2.1.   The general requirements for conducting the type 3 test shall be those set out in section 2 of Annex 6 to UN/ECE Regulation No 83.

3.   TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

3.1.   The technical requirements shall be those set out in section 3 to 6 of Annex 6 to UN/ECE Regulation No 83.

ANNEX VI

DETERMINATION OF EVAPORATIVE EMISSIONS

(TYPE 4 TEST)

1.   INTRODUCTION

1.1.   This Annex describes the procedure for the Type 4 test, which determines the emission of hydrocarbons by evaporation from the fuel systems of vehicles.

2.   TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

2.1.   The technical requirements and specifications shall be those set out in sections 2 to 7 and Appendices 1 and 2 to Annex 7 to UN/ECE Regulation No 83, with the exceptions set out in sections 2.2 and 2.3.

2.2.   The reference fuels specified in paragraph 3.2 of Annex 7 to UN/ECE Regulation No 83 shall be understood as reference to the appropriate reference fuel specifications in Annex IX to this Regulation.

2.3.   The reference to paragraph 8.2.5 in paragraph 7.5.2 of Annex 7 to UN/ECE Regulation No 83 shall be understood as reference to Section 4 of Annex I to this Regulation.

ANNEX VII

VERIFYING THE DURABILITY OF POLLUTION CONTROL DEVICES

(TYPE 5 TEST)

1.   INTRODUCTION

1.1.   This Annex describes the tests for verifying the durability of pollution control devices. The durability requirements shall be demonstrated using one of the three options set out in points 1.2, 1.3 and 1.4.

1.2.   The whole vehicle durability test represents an ageing test of 160 000 kilometres driven on a test track, on the road, or on a chassis dynamometer.

1.3.   The manufacturer may choose to use a bench ageing durability test.

1.4.   As an alternative to durability testing, a manufacturer may choose to apply the assigned deterioration factors from the following table.

| Engine Category | Assigned deterioration factors |
| --- | --- |
| CO | THC | NMHC | NOx | HC + NOx | PM | P |
| Positive-ignition | 1,5 | 1,3 | 1,3 | 1,6 | — | 1,0 | 1,0 |
| Compression-ignition (Euro 5) | 1,5 | — | — | 1,1 | 1,1 | 1,0 | 1,0 |
| Compression-ignition (Euro 6) (1) | | | | | | | |

Engine Category

Assigned deterioration factors

CO

THC

NMHC

NOx

HC + NOx

PM

P

Positive-ignition

1,5

1,3

1,3

1,6

—

1,0

1,0

Compression-ignition (Euro 5)

1,5

—

—

1,1

1,1

1,0

1,0

Compression-ignition (Euro 6) (1)

1.5.   At the request of the manufacturer, the technical service may carry out the type 1 test before the whole vehicle or bench ageing durability test has been completed using the assigned deterioration factors in the table above. On completion of the whole vehicle or bench ageing durability test, the technical service may then amend the type-approval results recorded in Appendix 4 to Annex I by replacing the assigned deterioration factors in the above table with those measured in the whole vehicle or bench ageing durability test.

1.6.   In the absence of assigned deterioration factors for Euro 6 compression ignition vehicles, manufacturers shall use the whole vehicle or bench ageing durability test procedures to establish deterioration factors.

1.7.   Deterioration factors are determined using either the procedures set out in points 1.2 and 1.3 or using the assigned values in the table contained in point 1.4. The deterioration factors are used to establish compliance with the requirements of the appropriate emissions limits set out in Tables 1 and 2 of Annex 1 to Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 during the useful life of the vehicle.

2.   TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

The technical requirements and specifications shall be those set out in section 2 to 6 of Annex 9 to UN/ECE Regulation No 83, with the exceptions set out in subsections 2.1.1 to 2.1.4.

2.1.1.   As an alternative to the operating cycle described in paragraph 5.1. of Annex 9 of UN/ECE Regulation No 83 for the whole vehicle durability test, the vehicle manufacturer may use Standard Road Cycle (SRC) described in Appendix 3 of this Annex. This test cycle shall be conducted until the vehicle has covered a minimum of 160 000 km.

2.1.2.   In paragraph 5.3 and paragraph 6 of Annex 9 of UN/ECE Regulation No 83 the reference to 80 000 km shall be understood as reference to 160 000 km.

2.1.3.   The reference to paragraph 5.3.1.4. in the first section of paragraph 6 of Annex 9 of UN/ECE Regulation No 83 shall be understood as reference to Table 1 of Annex I of the Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 for Euro 5 vehicles and Table 2 of Annex I of the Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 for Euro 6 vehicles.

2.1.4.   In Section 6 of Annex 9 of UN/ECE Regulation No 83, the sixth subparagraph shall be understood as follows:

A multiplicative exhaust emission deterioration factor shall be calculated for each pollutant as follows:

Formula

At the request of a manufacturer, an additive exhaust emission deterioration factor shall be calculated for each pollutant as follows:

Formula

2.2.   Bench Ageing Durability Test

2.2.1.   In addition to the technical requirements for the bench ageing test set out in section 1.3, the technical requirements set out in this section shall apply.

The fuel to be used during the test shall be the one specified in paragraph 3 of Annex 9 of Regulation 83.

2.3.1.   Vehicles with Positive Ignition Engines

2.3.1.1.   The following bench ageing procedure shall be applicable for positive-ignition vehicles including hybrid vehicles which use a catalyst as the principle after-treatment emission control device.

The bench ageing procedure requires the installation of the catalyst-plus-oxygen sensor system on a catalyst ageing bench.

Ageing on the bench shall be conducted by following the standard bench cycle (SBC) for the period of time calculated from the bench ageing time (BAT) equation. The BAT equation requires, as input, catalyst time-at-temperature data measured on the Standard Road Cycle (SRC), described in Appendix 3 to this Annex.

2.3.1.2.   Standard bench cycle (SBC). Standard catalyst bench ageing shall be conducted following the SBC. The SBC shall be run for the period of time calculated from the BAT equation. The SBC is described in Appendix 1 of this Annex.

2.3.1.3.   Catalyst time-at-temperature data. Catalyst temperature shall be measured during at least two full cycles of the SRC cycle as described in Appendix 3 to this Annex.

Catalyst temperature shall be measured at the highest temperature location in the hottest catalyst on the test vehicle. Alternatively, the temperature may be measured at another location providing that it is adjusted to represent the temperature measured at the hottest location using good engineering judgement.

Catalyst temperature shall be measured at a minimum rate of one hertz (one measurement per second).

The measured catalyst temperature results shall be tabulated into a histogram with temperature groups of no larger than 25 °C.

2.3.1.4.   Bench-ageing time. Bench ageing time shall be calculated using the bench ageing time (BAT) equation as follows:

te for a temperature bin = th e((R/Tr)–(R/Tv))

Total te = Sum of te over all the temperature groups

Bench-Ageing Time = A (Total te)

Where:

| A | = | 1,1 This value adjusts the catalyst ageing time to account for deterioration from sources other than thermal ageing of the catalyst. |
| --- | --- | --- |
| R | = | Catalyst thermal reactivity = 17 500 |
| th | = | The time (in hours) measured within the prescribed temperature bin of the vehicle's catalyst temperature histogram adjusted to a full useful life basis e.g., if the histogram represented 400 km, and useful life is 160 000 km; all histogram time entries would be multiplied by 400 (160 000/400). |
| Total te | = | The equivalent time (in hours) to age the catalyst at the temperature of Tr on the catalyst ageing bench using the catalyst ageing cycle to produce the same amount of deterioration experienced by the catalyst due to thermal deactivation over the 160 000 km. |
| te for a bin | = | The equivalent time (in hours) to age the catalyst at the temperature of Tr on the catalyst ageing bench using the catalyst ageing cycle to produce the same amount of deterioration experienced by the catalyst due to thermal deactivation at the temperature bin of Tv over 160 000 km. |
| Tr | = | The effective reference temperature (in °K) of the catalyst on the catalyst bench run on the bench ageing cycle. The effective temperature is the constant temperature that would result in the same amount of ageing as the various temperatures experienced during the bench ageing cycle. |
| Tv | = | The mid-point temperature (in °K) of the temperature bin of the vehicle on-road catalyst temperature histogram. |

A

=

1,1 This value adjusts the catalyst ageing time to account for deterioration from sources other than thermal ageing of the catalyst.

R

=

Catalyst thermal reactivity = 17 500

th

=

The time (in hours) measured within the prescribed temperature bin of the vehicle's catalyst temperature histogram adjusted to a full useful life basis e.g., if the histogram represented 400 km, and useful life is 160 000 km; all histogram time entries would be multiplied by 400 (160 000/400).

Total te

=

The equivalent time (in hours) to age the catalyst at the temperature of Tr on the catalyst ageing bench using the catalyst ageing cycle to produce the same amount of deterioration experienced by the catalyst due to thermal deactivation over the 160 000 km.

te for a bin

=

The equivalent time (in hours) to age the catalyst at the temperature of Tr on the catalyst ageing bench using the catalyst ageing cycle to produce the same amount of deterioration experienced by the catalyst due to thermal deactivation at the temperature bin of Tv over 160 000 km.

Tr

=

The effective reference temperature (in °K) of the catalyst on the catalyst bench run on the bench ageing cycle. The effective temperature is the constant temperature that would result in the same amount of ageing as the various temperatures experienced during the bench ageing cycle.

Tv

=

The mid-point temperature (in °K) of the temperature bin of the vehicle on-road catalyst temperature histogram.

2.3.1.5.   Effective reference temperature on the SBC. The effective reference temperature of the standard bench cycle (SBC) shall be determined for the actual catalyst system design and actual ageing bench which will be used using the following procedures:

| (a) | Measure time-at-temperature data in the catalyst system on the catalyst ageing bench following the SBC. Catalyst temperature shall be measured at the highest temperature location of the hottest catalyst in the system. Alternatively, the temperature may be measured at another location providing that it is adjusted to represent the temperature measured at the hottest location.
  Catalyst temperature shall be measured at a minimum rate of one hertz (one measurement per second) during at least 20 minutes of bench ageing. The measured catalyst temperature results shall be tabulated into a histogram with temperature groups of no larger than 10 °C. |
| --- | --- |

(a)

Measure time-at-temperature data in the catalyst system on the catalyst ageing bench following the SBC. Catalyst temperature shall be measured at the highest temperature location of the hottest catalyst in the system. Alternatively, the temperature may be measured at another location providing that it is adjusted to represent the temperature measured at the hottest location.

Catalyst temperature shall be measured at a minimum rate of one hertz (one measurement per second) during at least 20 minutes of bench ageing. The measured catalyst temperature results shall be tabulated into a histogram with temperature groups of no larger than 10 °C.

| (b) | The BAT equation shall be used to calculate the effective reference temperature by iterative changes to the reference temperature (Tr) until the calculated ageing time equals or exceeds the actual time represented in the catalyst temperature histogram. The resulting temperature is the effective reference temperature on the SBC for that catalyst system and ageing bench. |
| --- | --- |

(b)

The BAT equation shall be used to calculate the effective reference temperature by iterative changes to the reference temperature (Tr) until the calculated ageing time equals or exceeds the actual time represented in the catalyst temperature histogram. The resulting temperature is the effective reference temperature on the SBC for that catalyst system and ageing bench.

2.3.1.6.   Catalyst Ageing Bench. The catalyst ageing bench shall follow the SBC and deliver the appropriate exhaust flow, exhaust constituents, and exhaust temperature at the face of the catalyst.

All bench ageing equipment and procedures shall record appropriate information (such as measured A/F ratios and time-at-temperature in the catalyst) to assure that sufficient ageing has actually occurred.

2.3.1.7.   Required Testing. For calculating deterioration factors at least two Type 1 tests before bench ageing of the emission control hardware and at least two Type 1 tests after the bench-aged emission hardware is reinstalled have to be performed on the test vehicle.

Additional testing may be conducted by the manufacturer. Calculation of the deterioration factors has to be done according to the calculation method as specified in Paragraph 6 of Annex 9 to UN/ECE Regulation No 83 as amended by this Regulation.

2.3.2.   Vehicles with Compression Ignition Engines

2.3.2.1.   The following bench ageing procedure is applicable for compression-ignition vehicles including hybrid vehicles.

The bench ageing procedure requires the installation of the aftertreatment system on a aftertreatment system ageing bench.

Ageing on the bench is conducted by following the standard diesel bench cycle (SDBC) for the number of regenerations/desulphurisations calculated from the bench ageing duration (BAD) equation.

2.3.2.2.   Standard Diesel Bench Cycle (SDBC). Standard bench ageing is conducted following the SDBC. The SDBC shall be run for the period of time calculated from the bench ageing duration (BAD) equation. The SDBC is described in Appendix 2 of this Annex.

2.3.2.3.   Regeneration data. Regeneration intervals shall be measured during at least 10 full cycles of the SRC cycle as described in Appendix 3. As an alternative the intervals from the Ki determination may be used.

If applicable, desulphurisation intervals shall also be considered based on manufacturer’s data

2.3.2.4.   Diesel bench-ageing duration. Bench ageing duration is calculated using the BAD equation as follows:

Bench-Ageing Duration = number of regeneration and/or desulphurisation cycles (whichever is the longer) equivalent to 160 000 km of driving

2.3.2.5.   Ageing Bench. The ageing bench shall follow the SDBC and deliver appropriate exhaust flow, exhaust constituents, and exhaust temperature to the aftertreatment system inlet.

The manufacturer shall record the number of regenerations/desulphurisations (if applicable) to assure that sufficient ageing has actually occurred.

2.3.2.6.   Required Testing. For calculating deterioration factors at least two Type 1 tests before bench ageing of the emission control hardware and at least two Type 1 tests after the bench-aged emission hardware is reinstalled have to be performed. Additional testing may be conducted by the manufacturer. Calculation of the deterioration factors shall be done according to the calculation method set out in Paragraph 6 of Annex 9 to UN/ECE Regulation No 83 and with the additional requirements contained in this Regulation.

---

(1)  Euro 6 deterioration factors to be determined

Appendix 1

Standard Bench Cycle (SBC)

1.   Introduction

The standard ageing durability procedure consists of ageing a catalyst/oxygen sensor system on an ageing bench which follows the standard bench cycle (SBC) described in this Appendix. The SBC requires use of an ageing bench with an engine as the source of feed gas for the catalyst. The SBC is a 60-second cycle which is repeated as necessary on the ageing bench to conduct ageing for the required period of time. The SBC is defined based on the catalyst temperature, engine air/fuel (A/F) ratio, and the amount of secondary air injection which is added in front of the first catalyst.

2.   Catalyst Temperature Control

2.1.   Catalyst temperature shall be measured in the catalyst bed at the location where the highest temperature occurs in the hottest catalyst. Alternatively, the feed gas temperature may be measured and converted to catalyst bed temperature using a linear transform calculated from correlation data collected on the catalyst design and ageing bench to be used in the ageing process.

2.2.   Control the catalyst temperature at stoichiometric operation (01 to 40 seconds on the cycle) to a minimum of 800 °C (±10 °C) by selecting the appropriate engine speed, load, and spark timing for the engine. Control the maximum catalyst temperature that occurs during the cycle to 890 °C (±10 °C) by selecting the appropriate A/F ratio of the engine during the ‘rich’ phase described in the table below.

2.3.   If a low control temperature other than 800 °C is utilized, the high control temperature shall be 90 °C higher than the low control temperature.

Standard Bench Cycle (SBC)

| Time
  (seconds) | Engine Air/Fuel Ratio | Secondary Air Injection |
| --- | --- | --- |
| 1-40 | Stoichiometric with load, spark timing and engine speed controlled to achieve a minimum catalyst temperature of 800 °C | None |
| 41-45 | ‘Rich’ (A/F ratio selected to achieve a maximum catalyst temperature over the entire cycle of 890 °C or 90 °C higher than lower control temperature) | None |
| 46-55 | ‘Rich’ (A/F ratio selected to achieve a maximum catalyst temperature over the entire cycle of 890 °C or 90 °C higher than lower control temperature) | 3 % (±1  %) |
| 56-60 | Stoichiometric with load, spark timing and engine speed controlled to achieve a minimum catalyst temperature of 800 °C | 3 % (±1  %) |

Time

(seconds)

Engine Air/Fuel Ratio

Secondary Air Injection

1-40

Stoichiometric with load, spark timing and engine speed controlled to achieve a minimum catalyst temperature of 800 °C

None

41-45

‘Rich’ (A/F ratio selected to achieve a maximum catalyst temperature over the entire cycle of 890 °C or 90 °C higher than lower control temperature)

None

46-55

‘Rich’ (A/F ratio selected to achieve a maximum catalyst temperature over the entire cycle of 890 °C or 90 °C higher than lower control temperature)

3 % (±1  %)

56-60

Stoichiometric with load, spark timing and engine speed controlled to achieve a minimum catalyst temperature of 800 °C

3 % (±1  %)

Standard Bench Cycle

Stoichiometric

Control catalyst temperature to 800 °C

‘Rich’

Air/Fuel Ratio

Air Injection (%)

Time (seconds)

Air/Fuel ratio

Secondary Air

3.   Ageing Bench Equipment and Procedures

3.1.   Ageing Bench Configuration. The ageing bench shall provide the appropriate exhaust flow rate, temperature, air-fuel ratio, exhaust constituents and secondary air injection at the inlet face of the catalyst.

The standard ageing bench consists of an engine, engine controller, and engine dynamometer. Other configurations may be acceptable (e.g. whole vehicle on a dynamometer, or a burner that provides the correct exhaust conditions), as long as the catalyst inlet conditions and control features specified in this Appendix are met.

A single ageing bench may have the exhaust flow split into several streams providing that each exhaust stream meets the requirements of this appendix. If the bench has more than one exhaust stream, multiple catalyst systems may be aged simultaneously.

3.2.   Exhaust System Installation. The entire catalyst(s)-plus-oxygen sensor(s) system, together with all exhaust piping which connects these components, will be installed on the bench. For engines with multiple exhaust streams (such as some V6 and V8 engines), each bank of the exhaust system will be installed separately on the bench in parallel.

For exhaust systems that contain multiple in-line catalysts, the entire catalyst system including all catalysts, all oxygen sensors and the associated exhaust piping will be installed as a unit for ageing. Alternatively, each individual catalyst may be separately aged for the appropriate period of time.

3.3.   Temperature Measurement. Catalyst temperature shall be measured using a thermocouple placed in the catalyst bed at the location where the highest temperature occurs in the hottest catalyst. Alternatively, the feed gas temperature just before the catalyst inlet face may be measured and converted to catalyst bed temperature using a linear transform calculated from correlation data collected on the catalyst design and ageing bench to be used in the ageing process. The catalyst temperature shall be stored digitally at the speed of 1 hertz (one measurement per second).

3.4.   Air/Fuel Measurement. Provisions shall be made for the measurement of the air/fuel (A/F) ratio (such as a wide-range oxygen sensor) as close as possible to the catalyst inlet and outlet flanges. The information from these sensors shall be stored digitally at the speed of 1 hertz (one measurement per second).

3.5.   Exhaust Flow Balance. Provisions shall be made to assure that the proper amount of exhaust (measured in grams/second at stoichiometry, with a tolerance of ±5 grams/second) flows through each catalyst system that is being aged on the bench.

The proper flow rate is determined based upon the exhaust flow that would occur in the original vehicle’s engine at the steady state engine speed and load selected for the bench ageing in Paragraph 3.6. of this Appendix.

3.6.   Setup. The engine speed, load, and spark timing are selected to achieve a catalyst bed temperature of 800 °C (±10 °C) at steady-state stoichiometric operation.

The air injection system is set to provide the necessary air flow to produce 3,0 % oxygen (±0,1 %) in the steady-state stoichiometric exhaust stream just in front of the first catalyst. A typical reading at the upstream A/F measurement point (required in paragraph 5) is lambda 1,16 (which is approximately 3 % oxygen).

With the air injection on, set the ‘Rich’ A/F ratio to produce a catalyst bed temperature of 890 °C (±10 °C). A typical A/F value for this step is lambda 0,94 (approximately 2 % CO).

3.7.   Ageing Cycle. The standard bench ageing procedures use the standard bench cycle (SBC). The SBC is repeated until the amount of ageing calculated from the bench ageing time equation (BAT) is achieved.

3.8.   Quality Assurance. The temperatures and A/F ratio in paragraphs 3.3. and 3.4. of this appendix shall be reviewed periodically (at least every 50 hours) during ageing. Necessary adjustments shall be made to assure that the SBC is being appropriately followed throughout the ageing process.

After the ageing has been completed, the catalyst time-at-temperature collected during the ageing process shall be tabulated into a histogram with temperature groups of no larger than 10 °C. The BAT equation and the calculated effective reference temperature for the ageing cycle according to Paragraph 2.3.1.4 of Annex VII will be used to determine if the appropriate amount of thermal ageing of the catalyst has in fact occurred. Bench ageing will be extended if the thermal effect of the calculated ageing time is not at least 95 % of the target thermal ageing.

3.9.   Startup and Shutdown. Care should be taken to assure that the maximum catalyst temperature for rapid deterioration (e.g., 1 050 °C) does not occur during startup or shutdown. Special low temperature startup and shutdown procedures may be used to alleviate this concern.

4.   Experimentally Determining the R-Factor for Bench Ageing Durability Procedures

The R-Factor is the catalyst thermal reactivity coefficient used in the bench ageing time (BAT) equation. Manufacturers may determine the value of R experimentally using the following procedures.

4.1.1.   Using the applicable bench cycle and ageing bench hardware, age several catalysts (minimum of 3 of the same catalyst design) at different control temperatures between the normal operating temperature and the damage limit temperature. Measure emissions (or catalyst inefficiency (1-catalyst efficiency)) for each exhaust constituent. Assure that the final testing yields data between one- and two-times the emission standard.

4.1.2.   Estimate the value of R and calculate the effective reference temperature (Tr) for the bench ageing cycle for each control temperature according to Paragraph 2.4.4 of Annex VII.

4.1.3.   Plot emissions (or catalyst inefficiency) versus ageing time for each catalyst. Calculate the least-squared best-fit line through the data. For the data set to be useful for this purpose the data should have an approximately common intercept between 0 and 6 400 km. See the following graph for an example.

4.1.4.   Calculate the slope of the best-fit line for each ageing temperature.

4.1.5.   Plot the natural log (ln) of the slope of each best-fit line (determined in step 4.1.4.) along the vertical axis, versus the inverse of ageing temperature (1/(ageing temperature, deg K)) along the horizontal axis, Calculate the least squared best-fit lines through the data. The slope of the line is the R-factor. See the following graph for an example.

Catalyst Ageing

2 × std

1 × std

Emissions

Temp A

Temp B

Temp C

Ageing Time (hours)

4.1.6.   Compare the R-factor to the initial value that was used in Step 4.1.2. If the calculated R-factor differs from the initial value by more than 5 %, choose a new R-factor that is between the initial and calculated values, and then repeat Steps 2-6 to derive a new R-factor. Repeat this process until the calculated R-factor is within 5 % of the initially assumed R-factor.

4.1.7.   Compare the R-factor determined separately for each exhaust constituent. Use the lowest R-factor (worst case) for the BAT equation.

Determining the R-Factor

-Ln(slope)

1/TA

1/TB

1/TC

1/(ageing temperature)

slope = rate of change in emissions/time

Appendix 2

Standard Diesel Bench Cycle (SDBC)

1.   Introduction

For particulate filters, the number of regenerations is critical to the ageing process. For systems that require desulphurisation cycles (e.g. NOx storage catalysts), this process is also significant.

The standard diesel bench ageing durability procedure consists of ageing an aftertreatment system on an ageing bench which follows the standard bench cycle (SDBC) described in this Appendix. The SDBC requires use of an ageing bench with an engine as the source of feed gas for the system.

During the SDBC, the regeneration/desulphurisation strategies of the system shall remain in normal operating condition.

2.   The Standard Diesel Bench Cycle reproduces the engine speed and load conditions that are encountered in the SRC cycle as appropriate to the period for which durability is to be determined. In order to accelerate the process of ageing, the engine settings on the test bench may be modified to reduce the system loading times. For example the fuel injection timing or EGR strategy may be modified.

3.   Ageing Bench Equipment and Procedures

3.1.   The standard ageing bench consists of an engine, engine controller, and engine dynamometer. Other configurations may be acceptable (e.g. whole vehicle on a dynamometer, or a burner that provides the correct exhaust conditions), as long as the aftertreatment system inlet conditions and control features specified in this Appendix are met.

A single ageing bench may have the exhaust flow split into several streams providing that each exhaust stream meets the requirements of this appendix. If the bench has more than one exhaust stream, multiple aftertreatment systems may be aged simultaneously.

3.2.   Exhaust System Installation. The entire aftertreatment system, together with all exhaust piping which connects these components, will be installed on the bench. For engines with multiple exhaust streams (such as some V6 and V8 engines), each bank of the exhaust system will be installed separately on the bench.

The entire aftertreatment system will be installed as a unit for ageing. Alternatively, each individual component may be separately aged for the appropriate period of time.

Appendix 3

Standard Road Cycle (SRC)

Introduction

The standard road cycle (SRC) is a kilometre accumulation cycle. The vehicle may be run on a test track or on a kilometre accumulation dynamometer.

The cycle consists of 7 laps of a 6 km course. The length of the lap may be changed to accommodate the length of the mileage accumulation test track.

Standard Road cycle

| Lap | Description | Typical acceleration rate m/s2 |
| --- | --- | --- |
| 1 | (start engine) idle 10 seconds | 0 |
| 1 | Moderate acceleration to 48 km/h | 1,79 |
| 1 | Cruise at 48 km/h for 1/4 lap | 0 |
| 1 | Moderate deceleration to 32 km/h | –2,23 |
| 1 | Moderate acceleration to 48 km/h | 1,79 |
| 1 | Cruise at 48 km/h for 1/4 lap | 0 |
| 1 | Moderate deceleration to stop | –2,23 |
| 1 | Idle 5 seconds | 0 |
| 1 | Moderate acceleration to 56 km/h | 1,79 |
| 1 | Cruise at 56 km/h for 1/4 lap | 0 |
| 1 | Moderate deceleration to 40 km/h | –2,23 |
| 1 | Moderate acceleration to 56 km/h | 1,79 |
| 1 | Cruise at 56 km/h for 1/4 lap | 0 |
| 1 | Moderate deceleration to stop | –2,23 |
| 2 | idle 10 seconds | 0 |
| 2 | Moderate acceleration to 64 km/h | 1,34 |
| 2 | Cruise at 64 km/h for 1/4 lap | 0 |
| 2 | Moderate deceleration to 48 km/h | –2,23 |
| 2 | Moderate acceleration to 64 km/h | 1,34 |
| 2 | Cruise at 64 km/h for 1/4 lap | 0 |
| 2 | Moderate deceleration to stop | –2,23 |
| 2 | Idle 5 seconds | 0 |
| 2 | Moderate acceleration to 72 km/h | 1,34 |
| 2 | Cruise at 72 km/h for 1/4 lap | 0 |
| 2 | Moderate deceleration to 56 km/h | –2,23 |
| 2 | Moderate acceleration to 72 km/h | 1,34 |
| 2 | Cruise at 72 km/h for 1/4 lap | 0 |
| 2 | Moderate deceleration to stop | –2,23 |
| 3 | idle 10 seconds | 0 |
| 3 | Hard acceleration to 88 km/h | 1,79 |
| 3 | Cruise at 88 km/h for 1/4 lap | 0 |
| 3 | Moderate deceleration to 72 km/h | –2,23 |
| 3 | Moderate acceleration to 88 km/h | 0,89 |
| 3 | Cruise at 88 km/h for 1/4 lap | 0 |
| 3 | Moderate deceleration to 72 km/h | –2,23 |
| 3 | Moderate acceleration to 97 km/h | 0,89 |
| 3 | Cruise at 97 km/h for 1/4 lap | 0 |
| 3 | Moderate deceleration to 80 km/h | –2,23 |
| 3 | Moderate acceleration to 97 km/h | 0,89 |
| 3 | Cruise at 97 km/h for 1/4 lap | 0 |
| 3 | Moderate deceleration to stop | –1,79 |
| 4 | idle 10 seconds | 0 |
| 4 | Hard acceleration to 129 km/h | 1,34 |
| 4 | Coastdown to 113 km/h | –0,45 |
| 4 | Cruise at 113 km/h for 1/2 lap | 0 |
| 4 | Moderate deceleration to 80 km/h | –1,34 |
| 4 | Moderate acceleration to 105 km/h | 0,89 |
| 4 | Cruise at 105 km/h for 1/2 lap | 0 |
| 4 | Moderate deceleration to 80 km/h | –1,34 |
| 5 | Moderate acceleration to 121 km/h | 0,45 |
| 5 | Cruise at 121 km/h for 1/2 lap | 0 |
| 5 | Moderate deceleration to 80 km/h | –1,34 |
| 5 | Light acceleration to 113 km/h | 0,45 |
| 5 | Cruise at 113 km/h for 1/2 lap | 0 |
| 5 | Moderate deceleration to 80 km/h | –1,34 |
| 6 | Moderate acceleration to 113 km/h | 0,89 |
| 6 | Coastdown to 97 km/h | –0,45 |
| 6 | Cruise at 97 km/h for 1/2 lap | 0 |
| 6 | Moderate deceleration to 80 km/h | –1,79 |
| 6 | Moderate acceleration to 104 km/h | 0,45 |
| 6 | Cruise at 104 km/h for 1/2 lap | 0 |
| 6 | Moderate deceleration to stop | –1,79 |
| 7 | idle 45 seconds | 0 |
| 7 | Hard acceleration to 88 km/h | 1,79 |
| 7 | Cruise at 88 km/h for 1/4 lap | 0 |
| 7 | Moderate deceleration to 64 km/h | –2,23 |
| 7 | Moderate acceleration to 88 km/h | 0,89 |
| 7 | Cruise at 88 km/h for 1/4 lap | 0 |
| 7 | Moderate deceleration to 64 km/h | –2,23 |
| 7 | Moderate acceleration to 80 km/h | 0,89 |
| 7 | Cruise at 80 km/h for 1/4 lap | 0 |
| 7 | Moderate deceleration to 64 km/h | –2,23 |
| 7 | Moderate acceleration to 80 km/h | 0,89 |
| 7 | Cruise at 80 km/h for 1/4 lap | 0 |
| 7 | Moderate deceleration to stop | –2,23 |

Lap

Description

Typical acceleration rate m/s2

1

(start engine) idle 10 seconds

0

1

Moderate acceleration to 48 km/h

1,79

1

Cruise at 48 km/h for 1/4 lap

0

1

Moderate deceleration to 32 km/h

–2,23

1

Moderate acceleration to 48 km/h

1,79

1

Cruise at 48 km/h for 1/4 lap

0

1

Moderate deceleration to stop

–2,23

1

Idle 5 seconds

0

1

Moderate acceleration to 56 km/h

1,79

1

Cruise at 56 km/h for 1/4 lap

0

1

Moderate deceleration to 40 km/h

–2,23

1

Moderate acceleration to 56 km/h

1,79

1

Cruise at 56 km/h for 1/4 lap

0

1

Moderate deceleration to stop

–2,23

2

idle 10 seconds

0

2

Moderate acceleration to 64 km/h

1,34

2

Cruise at 64 km/h for 1/4 lap

0

2

Moderate deceleration to 48 km/h

–2,23

2

Moderate acceleration to 64 km/h

1,34

2

Cruise at 64 km/h for 1/4 lap

0

2

Moderate deceleration to stop

–2,23

2

Idle 5 seconds

0

2

Moderate acceleration to 72 km/h

1,34

2

Cruise at 72 km/h for 1/4 lap

0

2

Moderate deceleration to 56 km/h

–2,23

2

Moderate acceleration to 72 km/h

1,34

2

Cruise at 72 km/h for 1/4 lap

0

2

Moderate deceleration to stop

–2,23

3

idle 10 seconds

0

3

Hard acceleration to 88 km/h

1,79

3

Cruise at 88 km/h for 1/4 lap

0

3

Moderate deceleration to 72 km/h

–2,23

3

Moderate acceleration to 88 km/h

0,89

3

Cruise at 88 km/h for 1/4 lap

0

3

Moderate deceleration to 72 km/h

–2,23

3

Moderate acceleration to 97 km/h

0,89

3

Cruise at 97 km/h for 1/4 lap

0

3

Moderate deceleration to 80 km/h

–2,23

3

Moderate acceleration to 97 km/h

0,89

3

Cruise at 97 km/h for 1/4 lap

0

3

Moderate deceleration to stop

–1,79

4

idle 10 seconds

0

4

Hard acceleration to 129 km/h

1,34

4

Coastdown to 113 km/h

–0,45

4

Cruise at 113 km/h for 1/2 lap

0

4

Moderate deceleration to 80 km/h

–1,34

4

Moderate acceleration to 105 km/h

0,89

4

Cruise at 105 km/h for 1/2 lap

0

4

Moderate deceleration to 80 km/h

–1,34

5

Moderate acceleration to 121 km/h

0,45

5

Cruise at 121 km/h for 1/2 lap

0

5

Moderate deceleration to 80 km/h

–1,34

5

Light acceleration to 113 km/h

0,45

5

Cruise at 113 km/h for 1/2 lap

0

5

Moderate deceleration to 80 km/h

–1,34

6

Moderate acceleration to 113 km/h

0,89

6

Coastdown to 97 km/h

–0,45

6

Cruise at 97 km/h for 1/2 lap

0

6

Moderate deceleration to 80 km/h

–1,79

6

Moderate acceleration to 104 km/h

0,45

6

Cruise at 104 km/h for 1/2 lap

0

6

Moderate deceleration to stop

–1,79

7

idle 45 seconds

0

7

Hard acceleration to 88 km/h

1,79

7

Cruise at 88 km/h for 1/4 lap

0

7

Moderate deceleration to 64 km/h

–2,23

7

Moderate acceleration to 88 km/h

0,89

7

Cruise at 88 km/h for 1/4 lap

0

7

Moderate deceleration to 64 km/h

–2,23

7

Moderate acceleration to 80 km/h

0,89

7

Cruise at 80 km/h for 1/4 lap

0

7

Moderate deceleration to 64 km/h

–2,23

7

Moderate acceleration to 80 km/h

0,89

7

Cruise at 80 km/h for 1/4 lap

0

7

Moderate deceleration to stop

–2,23

The standard road cycle is represented graphically in the following figure:

Standard Road Cycle

Speed (km/h)

Laps (5,95 km)

ANNEX VIII

VERIFYING THE AVERAGE EMISSIONS AT LOW AMBIENT TEMPERATURES

(TYPE 6 TEST)

1.   INTRODUCTION

1.1.   This Annex describes the equipment required and the procedure for the Type 6 test in order to verify the emissions at cold temperatures.

2.   GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

2.1.   The general requirements for the Type 6 test are those set out in paragraph 5.3.5.1.1 to 5.3.5.3.2 of UN/ECE Regulation 83 with the exceptions specified below.

2.2.   The reference to ‘hydrocarbons’ in 5.3.5.1.4 of UN/ECE Regulation 83 shall be read as ‘total hydrocarbons’

2.3.   The limit values referred to in section 5.3.5.2 of UN/ECE Regulation 83 relate to the limit values shown in Annex 1, Table 3 of Regulation (EC) No 715/2007.

3.   TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

3.1.   The technical requirements and specifications are those set out in section 2 to 6 of Annex 8 to UN/ECE Regulation No 83 with the exceptions described in the following sections.

3.2.   The reference to paragraph 3. of Annex 10 in paragraph 3.4.1. of Annex 8 to UN/ECE Regulation No 83 shall be understood as reference to to Section B of Annex IX to this Regulation.

3.3.   The references to ‘hydrocarbons’ shall be read as ‘total hydrocarbons’ in the following sections of Annex 8 to UN/ECE Regulation No 83:

Paragraph 2.4.1

Paragraph 5.1.1

ANNEX IX

SPECIFICATIONS OF REFERENCE FUELS

A.   REFERENCE FUELS

1.   Technical data on fuels for testing vehicles with positive-ignition engines

Type: Petrol (E5)

| Parameter | Unit | Limits (1) | Test method |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |
| Minimum | Maximum |
| Research octane number, RON | | 95,0 | — | EN 25164
  prEN ISO 5164 |
| Motor octane number, MON | | 85,0 | — | EN 25163
  prEN ISO 5163 |
| Density at 15 °C | kg/m3 | 743 | 756 | EN ISO 3675
  EN ISO 12185 |
| Vapour pressure | kPa | 56,0 | 60,0 | EN ISO 13016-1 (DVPE) |
| Water content | % v/v | | 0,015 | ASTM E 1064 |
| Distillation: | | | | |
| — Evaporated at 70 °C, | % v/v | 24,0 | 44,0 | EN-ISO 3405 |
| — evaporated at 100 °C, | % v/v | 48,0 | 60,0 | EN-ISO 3405 |
| — evaporated at150 °C, | % v/v | 82,0 | 90,0 | EN-ISO 3405 |
| — final boiling point, | °C | 190 | 210 | EN-ISO 3405 |
| Residue | % v/v | — | 2,0 | EN-ISO 3405 |
| Hydrocarbon analysis: | | | | |
| — olefins, | % v/v | 3,0 | 13,0 | ASTM D 1319 |
| — aromatics, | % v/v | 29,0 | 35,0 | ASTM D 1319 |
| — benzene, | % v/v | — | 1,0 | EN 12177 |
| — saturates, | % v/v | Report | ASTM 1319 |
| Carbon/hydrogen ratio | | Report | |
| Carbon/oxygen ratio | | Report | |
| Induction period (2) | minutes | 480 | — | EN-ISO 7536 |
| Oxygen content (3) | % m/m | Report | EN 1601 |
| Existent gum | mg/ml | — | 0,04 | EN-ISO 6246 |
| Sulphur content (4) | mg/kg | — | 10 | EN ISO 20846
  EN ISO 20884 |
| Copper corrosion | | — | Class 1 | EN-ISO 2160 |
| Lead content | mg/l | — | 5 | EN 237 |
| Phosphorus content (5) | mg/l | — | 1,3 | ASTM D 3231 |
| Ethanol (3) | % v/v | 4,7 | 5,3 | EN 1601
  EN 13132 |

Parameter

Unit

Limits (1)

Test method

Minimum

Maximum

Research octane number, RON

95,0

—

EN 25164

prEN ISO 5164

Motor octane number, MON

85,0

—

EN 25163

prEN ISO 5163

Density at 15 °C

kg/m3

743

756

EN ISO 3675

EN ISO 12185

Vapour pressure

kPa

56,0

60,0

EN ISO 13016-1 (DVPE)

Water content

% v/v

0,015

ASTM E 1064

Distillation:

— Evaporated at 70 °C,

% v/v

24,0

44,0

EN-ISO 3405

— evaporated at 100 °C,

% v/v

48,0

60,0

EN-ISO 3405

— evaporated at150 °C,

% v/v

82,0

90,0

EN-ISO 3405

— final boiling point,

°C

190

210

EN-ISO 3405

Residue

% v/v

—

2,0

EN-ISO 3405

Hydrocarbon analysis:

— olefins,

% v/v

3,0

13,0

ASTM D 1319

— aromatics,

% v/v

29,0

35,0

ASTM D 1319

— benzene,

% v/v

—

1,0

EN 12177

— saturates,

% v/v

Report

ASTM 1319

Carbon/hydrogen ratio

Report

Carbon/oxygen ratio

Report

Induction period (2)

minutes

480

—

EN-ISO 7536

Oxygen content (3)

% m/m

Report

EN 1601

Existent gum

mg/ml

—

0,04

EN-ISO 6246

Sulphur content (4)

mg/kg

—

10

EN ISO 20846

EN ISO 20884

Copper corrosion

—

Class 1

EN-ISO 2160

Lead content

mg/l

—

5

EN 237

Phosphorus content (5)

mg/l

—

1,3

ASTM D 3231

Ethanol (3)

% v/v

4,7

5,3

EN 1601

EN 13132

Type: Ethanol (E85)

| Parameter | Unit | Limits (6) | Test method (7) |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |
| Minimum | Maximum |
| Research octane number, RON | | 95 | — | EN ISO 5164 |
| Motor octane number, MON | | 85 | — | EN ISO 5163 |
| Density at 15 °C | kg/m3 | Report | ISO 3675 |
| Vapour pressure | kPa | 40 | 60 | EN ISO 13016-1 (DVPE) |
| Sulphur content (8)
   (9) | mg/kg | — | 10 | EN ISO 20846 EN ISO 20884 |
| Oxidation stability | minutes | 360 | | EN ISO 7536 |
| Existent gum content (solvent washed) | mg/100ml | — | 5 | EN-ISO 6246 |
| Appearance This shall be determined at ambient temperature or 15 °C whichever is higher. | | Clear and bright, visibly free of suspended or precipitated contaminants | Visual inspection |
| Ethanol and higher alcohols (12) | % (V/V) | 83 | 85 | EN 1601
  EN 13132
  EN 14517 |
| Higher alcohols (C3-C8) | % (V/V) | — | 2 | |
| Methanol | % (V/V) | | 0,5 | |
| Petrol (10) | % (V/V) | Balance | EN 228 |
| Phosphorus | mg/l | 0,3 (11) | ASTM D 3231 |
| Water content | % (V/V) | | 0,3 | ASTM E 1064 |
| Inorganic chloride content | mg/l | | 1 | ISO 6227 |
| pHe | | 6,5 | 9 | ASTM D 6423 |
| Copper strip corrosion (3h at 50 °C) | Rating | Class 1 | | EN ISO 2160 |
| Acidity, (as acetic acid CH3COOH) | % (m/m) (mg/l) | — | 0,005-40 | ASTM D 1613 |
| Carbon/hydrogen ratio | | report | |
| Carbon/oxygen ration | | report | |

Parameter

Unit

Limits (6)

Test method (7)

Minimum

Maximum

Research octane number, RON

95

—

EN ISO 5164

Motor octane number, MON

85

—

EN ISO 5163

Density at 15 °C

kg/m3

Report

ISO 3675

Vapour pressure

kPa

40

60

EN ISO 13016-1 (DVPE)

Sulphur content (8)
   (9)

mg/kg

—

10

EN ISO 20846 EN ISO 20884

Oxidation stability

minutes

360

EN ISO 7536

Existent gum content (solvent washed)

mg/100ml

—

5

EN-ISO 6246

Appearance This shall be determined at ambient temperature or 15 °C whichever is higher.

Clear and bright, visibly free of suspended or precipitated contaminants

Visual inspection

Ethanol and higher alcohols (12)

% (V/V)

83

85

EN 1601

EN 13132

EN 14517

Higher alcohols (C3-C8)

% (V/V)

—

2

Methanol

% (V/V)

0,5

Petrol (10)

% (V/V)

Balance

EN 228

Phosphorus

mg/l

0,3 (11)

ASTM D 3231

Water content

% (V/V)

0,3

ASTM E 1064

Inorganic chloride content

mg/l

1

ISO 6227

pHe

6,5

9

ASTM D 6423

Copper strip corrosion (3h at 50 °C)

Rating

Class 1

EN ISO 2160

Acidity, (as acetic acid CH3COOH)

% (m/m) (mg/l)

—

0,005-40

ASTM D 1613

Carbon/hydrogen ratio

report

Carbon/oxygen ration

report

Type: LPG

| Parameter | Unit | Fuel A | Fuel B | Test method |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| Composition: | | | | ISO 7941 |
| C3-content | % vol | 30 ± 2 | 85 ± 2 | |
| C4-content | % vol | Balance | Balance | |
| < C3, > C4 | % vol | Maximum 2 | Maximum 2 | |
| Olefins | % vol | Maximum 12 | Maximum 15 | |
| Evaporation residue | mg/kg | Maximum 50 | Maximum 50 | prEN 15470 |
| Water at 0 °C | | Free | Free | prEN 15469 |
| Total sulphur content | mg/kg | Maximum 10 | Maximum 10 | ASTM 6667 |
| Hydrogen sulphide | | None | None | ISO 8819 |
| Copper strip corrosion | Rating | Class 1 | Class 1 | ISO 6251 (13) |
| Odour | | Characteristic | Characteristic | |
| Motor octane number | | Minimum 89 | Minimum 89 | EN 589 Annex B |

Parameter

Unit

Fuel A

Fuel B

Test method

Composition:

ISO 7941

C3-content

% vol

30 ± 2

85 ± 2

C4-content

% vol

Balance

Balance

< C3, > C4

% vol

Maximum 2

Maximum 2

Olefins

% vol

Maximum 12

Maximum 15

Evaporation residue

mg/kg

Maximum 50

Maximum 50

prEN 15470

Water at 0 °C

Free

Free

prEN 15469

Total sulphur content

mg/kg

Maximum 10

Maximum 10

ASTM 6667

Hydrogen sulphide

None

None

ISO 8819

Copper strip corrosion

Rating

Class 1

Class 1

ISO 6251 (13)

Odour

Characteristic

Characteristic

Motor octane number

Minimum 89

Minimum 89

EN 589 Annex B

Type: NG/Biomethane

| Characteristics | Units | Basis | Limits | Test method |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| minimum | maximum |
| Reference fuel G20 |
| Composition: | | | | | |
| Methane | % mole | 100 | 99 | 100 | ISO 6974 |
| Balance (14) | % mole | — | — | 1 | ISO 6974 |
| N2 | % mole | | | | ISO 6974 |
| Sulphur content | mg/m3
   (15) | — | — | 10 | ISO 6326-5 |
| Wobbe Index (net) | MJ/m3
   (16) | 48,2 | 47,2 | 49,2 | |
| Reference fuel G25 |
| Composition: | | | | | |
| Methane | % mole | 86 | 84 | 88 | ISO 6974 |
| Balance (14) | % mole | — | — | 1 | ISO 6974 |
| N2 | % mole | 14 | 12 | 16 | ISO 6974 |
| Sulphur content | mg/m3
   (15) | — | — | 10 | ISO 6326-5 |
| Wobbe Index (net) | MJ/m3
   (16) | 39,4 | 38,2 | 40,6 | |

Characteristics

Units

Basis

Limits

Test method

minimum

maximum

Reference fuel G20

Composition:

Methane

% mole

100

99

100

ISO 6974

Balance (14)

% mole

—

—

1

ISO 6974

N2

% mole

ISO 6974

Sulphur content

mg/m3
   (15)

—

—

10

ISO 6326-5

Wobbe Index (net)

MJ/m3
   (16)

48,2

47,2

49,2

Reference fuel G25

Composition:

Methane

% mole

86

84

88

ISO 6974

Balance (14)

% mole

—

—

1

ISO 6974

N2

% mole

14

12

16

ISO 6974

Sulphur content

mg/m3
   (15)

—

—

10

ISO 6326-5

Wobbe Index (net)

MJ/m3
   (16)

39,4

38,2

40,6

2.   Technical data on fuels for testing vehicles with compression ignition engines

Type: Diesel (B5)

| Parameter | Unit | Limits (17) | Test method |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |
| Minimum | Maximum |
| Cetane number (18) | | 52,0 | 54,0 | EN-ISO 5165 |
| Density at 15 °C | kg/m3 | 833 | 837 | EN-ISO 3675 |
| Distillation: | | | | |
| — | 50 % point |

Parameter

Unit

Limits (17)

Test method

Minimum

Maximum

Cetane number (18)

52,0

54,0

EN-ISO 5165

Density at 15 °C

kg/m3

833

837

EN-ISO 3675

Distillation:

—

50 % point

°C

245

—

EN-ISO 3405

| — | 95 % point |
| --- | --- |

—

95 % point

°C

345

350

EN-ISO 3405

| — | final boiling point |
| --- | --- |

—

final boiling point

°C

—

370

EN-ISO 3405

Flash point

°C

55

—

EN 22719

CFPP

°C

—

–5

EN 116

Viscosity at 40 °C

mm2/s

2,3

3,3

EN-ISO 3104

Polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons

% m/m

2,0

6,0

EN 12916

Sulphur content (19)

mg/kg

—

10

EN ISO 20846/EN ISO 20884

Copper corrosion

—

Class 1

EN-ISO 2160

Conradson carbon residue (10 % DR)

% m/m

—

0,2

EN-ISO10370

Ash content

% m/m

—

0,01

EN-ISO 6245

Water content

% m/m

—

0,02

EN-ISO12937

Neutralisation (strong acid) number

mg KOH/g

—

0,02

ASTM D 974

Oxidation stability (20)

mg/ml

—

0,025

EN-ISO12205

Lubricity (HFRR wear scan diameter at 60 °C)

μm

—

400

EN ISO 12156

Oxidation stability at 110 °C (20)
   (22)

h

20,0

EN 14112

FAME (21)

% v/v

4,5

5,5

EN 14078

B.   REFERENCE FUELS FOR TESTING EMISSIONS AT LOW AMBIENT TEMPERATURES — TYPE 6 TEST

Type: Petrol (E5)

| Parameter | Unit | Limits (23) | Test method |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |
| Minimum | Maximum |
| Research octane number, RON | | 95,0 | — | EN 25164
  prEN ISO 5164 |
| Motor octane number, MON | | 85,0 | — | EN 25163
  prEN ISO 5163 |
| Density at 15 °C | kg/m3 | 743 | 756 | ISO 3675
  EN ISO 12185 |
| Vapour pressure | kPa | 56,0 | 95,0 | EN ISO 13016-1 (DVPE) |
| Water content | % v/v | | 0,015 | ASTM E 1064 |
| Distillation: | | | | |
| — | evaporated at 70 °C |

Parameter

Unit

Limits (23)

Test method

Minimum

Maximum

Research octane number, RON

95,0

—

EN 25164

prEN ISO 5164

Motor octane number, MON

85,0

—

EN 25163

prEN ISO 5163

Density at 15 °C

kg/m3

743

756

ISO 3675

EN ISO 12185

Vapour pressure

kPa

56,0

95,0

EN ISO 13016-1 (DVPE)

Water content

% v/v

0,015

ASTM E 1064

Distillation:

—

evaporated at 70 °C

% v/v

24,0

44,0

EN-ISO 3405

| — | evaporated at 100 °C |
| --- | --- |

—

evaporated at 100 °C

% v/v

50,0

60,0

EN-ISO 3405

| — | evaporated at 150 °C |
| --- | --- |

—

evaporated at 150 °C

% v/v

82,0

90,0

EN-ISO 3405

| — | final boiling point |
| --- | --- |

—

final boiling point

°C

190

210

EN-ISO 3405

Residue

% v/v

—

2,0

EN-ISO 3405

Hydrocarbon analysis:

| — | olefins |
| --- | --- |

—

olefins

% v/v

3,0

13,0

ASTM D 1319

| — | aromatics |
| --- | --- |

—

aromatics

% v/v

29,0

35,0

ASTM D 1319

| — | benzene |
| --- | --- |

—

benzene

% v/v

—

1,0

EN 12177

| — | saturates |
| --- | --- |

—

saturates

% v/v

Report

ASTM D 1319

Carbon/hydrogen ratio

Report

Carbon/oxygen ratio

Report

Induction period (24)

minutes

480

—

EN-ISO 7536

Oxygen content (25)

% m/m

Report

EN 1601

Existent gum

mg/ml

—

0,04

EN-ISO 6246

Sulphur content (26)

mg/kg

—

10

EN ISO 20846

EN ISO 20884

Copper corrosion

—

Class 1

EN-ISO 2160

Lead content

mg/l

—

5

EN 237

Phosphorus content (27)

mg/l

—

1,3

ASTM D 3231

Ethanol (25)

% v/v

4,7

5,3

EN 1601

EN 13132

Type: Ethanol (E75)

Reference fuel specification to be developed in advance of the dates set out in Article 10(6) of Regulation (EC) No 715/2007.

---

(1)  The values quoted in the specifications are ‘true values’. In establishment of their limit values the terms of ISO 4259 Petroleum products — Determination and application of precision data in relation to methods of test have been applied and in fixing a minimum value, a minimum difference of 2R above zero has been taken into account; in fixing a maximum and minimum value, the minimum difference is 4R (R = reproducibility). Notwithstanding this measure, which is necessary for technical reasons, the manufacturer of fuels shall nevertheless aim at a zero value where the stipulated maximum value is 2R and at the mean value in the case of quotations of maximum and minimum limits. Should it be necessary to clarify whether a fuel meets the requirements of the specifications, the terms of ISO 4259 shall be applied.

(2)  The fuel may contain oxidation inhibitors and metal deactivators normally used to stabilise refinery gasoline streams, but detergent/dispersive additives and solvent oils shall not be added.

(3)  Ethanol meeting the specification of EN 15376 is the only oxygenate that shall be intentionally added to the reference fuel.

(4)  The actual sulphur content of the fuel used for the Type 1 test shall be reported.

(5)  There shall be no intentional addition of compounds containing phosphorus, iron, manganese, or lead to this reference fuel.

(6)  The values quoted in the specifications are ‘true values’. In establishment of their limit values the terms of ISO 4259 Petroleum products — Determination and application of precision data in relation to methods of test have been applied and in fixing a minimum value, a minimum difference of 2R above zero has been taken into account; in fixing a maximum and minimum value, the minimum difference is 4R (R = reproducibility). Notwithstanding this measure, which is necessary for technical reasons, the manufacturer of fuels shall nevertheless aim at a zero value where the stipulated maximum value is 2R and at the mean value in the case of quotations of maximum and minimum limits. Should it be necessary to clarify whether a fuel meets the requirements of the specifications, the terms of ISO 4259 shall be applied.

(7)  In cases of dispute, the procedures for resolving the dispute and interpretation of the results based on test method precision, described in EN ISO 4259 shall be used.

(8)  In cases of national dispute concerning sulphur content, either EN ISO 20846 or EN ISO 20884 shall be called up similar to the reference in the national annex of EN 228.

(9)  The actual sulphur content of the fuel used for the Type 1 test shall be reported.

(10)  The unleaded petrol content can be determined as 100 minus the sum of the percentage content of water and alcohols

(11)  There shall be no intentional addition of compounds containing phosphorus, iron, manganese, or lead to this reference fuel.

(12)  Ethanol to meet specification of EN 15376 is the only oxygenate that shall be intentionally added to this reference fuel.

(13)  This method may not accurately determine the presence of corrosive materials if the sample contains corrosion inhibitors or other chemicals which diminish the corrosivity of the sample to the copper strip. Therefore, the addition of such compounds for the sole purpose of biasing the test method is prohibited.

(14)  Inerts (different from N2) + C2 + C2+.

(15)  Value to be determined at 293,2 K (20 °C) and 101,3 kPa.

(16)  Value to be determined at 273,2 K (0 °C) and 101,3 kPa.

(17)  The values quoted in the specifications are ‘true values’. In establishment of their limit values the terms of ISO 4259 Petroleum products — Determination and application of precision data in relation to methods of test have been applied and in fixing a minimum value, a minimum difference of 2R above zero has been taken into account; in fixing a maximum and minimum value, the minimum difference is 4R (R = reproducibility). Notwithstanding this measure, which is necessary for technical reasons, the manufacturer of fuels shall nevertheless aim at a zero value where the stipulated maximum value is 2R and at the mean value in the case of quotations of maximum and minimum limits. Should it be necessary to clarify whether a fuel meets the requirements of the specifications, the terms of ISO 4259 shall be applied.

(18)  The range for cetane number is not in accordance with the requirements of a minimum range of 4R. However, in the case of a dispute between fuel supplier and fuel user, the terms of ISO 4259 may be used to resolve such disputes provided replicate measurements, of sufficient number to archive the necessary precision, are made in preference to single determinations.

(19)  The actual sulphur content of the fuel used for the Type 1 test shall be reported.

(20)  Even though oxidation stability is controlled, it is likely that shelf life will be limited. Advice shall be sought from the supplier as to storage conditions and life.

(21)  FAME content to meet the specification of EN 14214.

(22)  Oxidation stability can be demonstrated by EN-ISO12205 or by EN 14112. This requirement shall be reviewed based on CEN/TC19 evaluations of oxidative stability performance and test limits.

(23)  The values quoted in the specifications are ‘true values’. In establishment of their limit values the terms of ISO 4259 Petroleum — products Determination and application of precision data in relation to methods of test have been applied and in fixing a minimum value, a minimum difference of 2R above zero has been taken into account; in fixing a maximum and minimum value, the minimum difference is 4R (R = reproducibility). Notwithstanding this measure, which is necessary for technical reasons, the manufacturer of fuels shall nevertheless aim at a zero value where the stipulated maximum value is 2R and at the mean value in the case of quotations of maximum and minimum limits. Should it be necessary to clarify whether a fuel meets the requirements of the specifications, the terms of ISO 4259 shall be applied.

(24)  The fuel may contain oxidation inhibitors and metal deactivators normally used to stabilise refinery gasoline streams, but detergent/dispersive additives and solvent oils shall not be added.

(25)  Ethanol to meet specification of EN 15376 is the only oxygenate that shall be intentionally added to this reference fuel.

(26)  The actual sulphur content of the fuel used for the Type 6 test shall be reported.

(27)  There shall be no intentional addition of compounds containing phosphorus, iron, manganese, or lead to this reference fuel.

ANNEX X

EMISSIONS TEST PROCEDURE FOR HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLES (HEV)

1.   INTRODUCTION

1.1.   This annex sets out the additional specific provisions regarding type-approval of a hybrid electric vehicle (HEV).

2.   TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

2.1.   The technical requirements and specifications shall be those set out in Annex 14 to UN/ECE Regulation No 83 with the exceptions described in the following section.

2.2.   The references to paragraph 5.3.1.4 in sections 3.1.2.6, 3.1.3.5, 3.2.2.7 and 3.2.3.5 of Annex 14 of UN/ECE Regulation No 83 shall be understood as references to Table 1 of Annex I of Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 for Euro 5 vehicles and Table 2 of Annex I of the Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 for Euro 6 vehicles.

ANNEX XI

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTICS (OBD) FOR MOTOR VEHICLES

1.   INTRODUCTION

1.1.   This Annex sets out the functional aspects of on-board diagnostic (OBD) systems for the control of emissions from motor vehicles.

2.   REQUIREMENTS AND TESTS

2.1.   The requirements and tests for OBD systems are those specified in Section 3 of Annex 11 to UN/ECE Regulation 83. The exceptions to these requirements as well as additional requirements are described in the following sections.

2.2.   The durability distance mentioned in section 3.1 and 3.3.1 of Annex 11 to UN/ECE Regulation 83 shall be understood as reference to the requirements of Annex VII to this Regulation.

The threshold limits specified in section 3.3.2 of Annex 11 to UN/ECE Regulation 83 shall be understood as reference to the tables below:

2.3.1.   The OBD thresholds limits for vehicles that are type approved according to the emission limits set out in Table 1 of Annex I of the Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 are contained in the following table.

Euro 5 OBD threshold limits

| | Reference mass
  (RW)
  (kg) | Mass of carbon monoxide | Mass of non-methane hydrocarbons | Mass of oxides of nitrogen | Mass of particulates |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| (CO)
  (mg/km) | (NMHC)
  (mg/km) | (NOx)
  (mg/km) | (PM)
  (mg/km) |
| Category | Class | | PI | CI | PI | CI | PI | CI | PI (1) | CI (2) |
| M | — | All | 1 900 | 1 900 | 250 | 320 | 300 | 540 | 50 | 50 |
| N1
   (3) | I | RW ≤ 1 305 | 1 900 | 1 900 | 250 | 320 | 300 | 540 | 50 | 50 |
| II | 1 305 < RW ≤ 1 760 | 3 400 | 2 400 | 330 | 360 | 375 | 705 | 50 | 50 |
| III | 1 760 < RW | 4 300 | 2 800 | 400 | 400 | 410 | 840 | 50 | 50 |
| N2 | — | All | 4 300 | 2 800 | 400 | 400 | 410 | 840 | 50 | 50 |
| Key: PI = Positive Ignition, CI = Compression Ignition |

Reference mass

(RW)

(kg)

Mass of carbon monoxide

Mass of non-methane hydrocarbons

Mass of oxides of nitrogen

Mass of particulates

(CO)

(mg/km)

(NMHC)

(mg/km)

(NOx)

(mg/km)

(PM)

(mg/km)

Category

Class

PI

CI

PI

CI

PI

CI

PI (1)

CI (2)

M

—

All

1 900

1 900

250

320

300

540

50

50

N1
   (3)

I

RW ≤ 1 305

1 900

1 900

250

320

300

540

50

50

II

1 305 < RW ≤ 1 760

3 400

2 400

330

360

375

705

50

50

III

1 760 < RW

4 300

2 800

400

400

410

840

50

50

N2

—

All

4 300

2 800

400

400

410

840

50

50

Key: PI = Positive Ignition, CI = Compression Ignition

2.3.2.   The OBD thresholds limits for compression ignition vehicles that comply with the Euro 6 emission limit values set out in Table 2 of Annex 1 of the Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 and type-approved before the dates given in Article 10(4) of Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 are contained in the following table. These threshold limits shall cease to apply from the dates set out in Article 10(5) of Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 for new vehicles to be registered, sold or entered into service.

Interim Euro 6 OBD threshold limits

| | Reference mass
  (RW)
  (kg) | Mass of carbon monoxide | Mass of non-methane hydrocarbons | Mass of oxides of nitrogen | Mass of particulates |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| (CO)
  (mg/km) | (NMHC)
  (mg/km) | (NOx)
  (mg/km) | (PM)
  (mg/km) |
| Category | Class | | CI | CI | CI | CI |
| M | — | All | 1900 | 320 | 240 | 50 |
| N1 | I | RW ≤ 1 305 | 1900 | 320 | 240 | 50 |
| II | 1 305 < RW ≤ 1 760 | 2 400 | 360 | 315 | 50 |
| III | 1 760 < RW | 2 800 | 400 | 375 | 50 |
| N2 | — | All | 2 800 | 400 | 375 | 50 |
| Key: CI = Compression Ignition |

Reference mass

(RW)

(kg)

Mass of carbon monoxide

Mass of non-methane hydrocarbons

Mass of oxides of nitrogen

Mass of particulates

(CO)

(mg/km)

(NMHC)

(mg/km)

(NOx)

(mg/km)

(PM)

(mg/km)

Category

Class

CI

CI

CI

CI

M

—

All

1900

320

240

50

N1

I

RW ≤ 1 305

1900

320

240

50

II

1 305 < RW ≤ 1 760

2 400

360

315

50

III

1 760 < RW

2 800

400

375

50

N2

—

All

2 800

400

375

50

Key: CI = Compression Ignition

2.4.   In addition to the provisions of section 3.2.1 of Annex 11 to UN/ECE Regulation 83 the manufacturer may temporarily disable the OBD system in the following conditions:

| (a) | For flex fuel or mono/bi fuel gas vehicles during 1 minute after re-fuelling to allow for the recognition of fuel quality and composition by the ECU; |
| --- | --- |

(a)

For flex fuel or mono/bi fuel gas vehicles during 1 minute after re-fuelling to allow for the recognition of fuel quality and composition by the ECU;

| (b) | For bi fuel vehicles during 5 seconds after fuel switching to allow for readjusting engine parameters. |
| --- | --- |

(b)

For bi fuel vehicles during 5 seconds after fuel switching to allow for readjusting engine parameters.

The manufacturer may deviate from these time limits if it can demonstrate that stabilisation of the fuelling system after re-fuelling or fuel switching takes longer for justified technical reasons. In any case, the OBD system shall be re-enabled as soon as either the fuel quality and composition is recognised or the engine parameters are readjusted.

2.5.   Section 3.3.3.1 of Annex 11 to UN/ECE Regulation 83 shall be replaced by the following requirement:

The OBD system shall monitor the reduction in the efficiency of the catalytic converter with respect to emissions of THC and NOx. Manufacturers may monitor the front catalyst alone or in combination with the next catalyst(s) downstream. Each monitored catalyst or catalyst combination shall be considered malfunctioning when the emissions exceed the NMHC or NOx threshold limits provided for by section 2.3 of this Annex. By way of derogation the requirement of monitoring the reduction in the efficiency of the catalytic converter with respect to NOx emissions shall only apply as from the dates set out in Article 17.

2.6.   Section 3.3.3.3 of Annex 11 to UN/ECE Regulation 83 shall mean that the deterioration of all oxygen sensors fitted and used for monitoring malfunctions of the catalytic converter according to the requirements of this Annex shall be monitored.

2.7.   In addition to the requirements of section 3.3.3 of Annex 11 to UN/ECE Regulation 83, for direct injection positive ignition engines any malfunction, which may lead to emissions exceeding the particulate threshold limits provided for by section 2.3 of this Annex and which has to be monitored according to the requirements of this Annex for compression ignition engines, shall be monitored.

2.8.   In addition to the requirements of section 3.3.4 of Annex 11 to UN/ECE Regulation 83, malfunctions and the reduction in efficiency of the EGR system shall be monitored.

2.9.   In addition to the requirements of section 3.3.4 of Annex 11 to UN/ECE Regulation 83, malfunctions and the reduction in efficiency of a NOx aftertreatment system using a reagent and the reagent dosing sub-system shall be monitored.

2.10.   In addition to the requirements of section 3.3.4 of Annex 11 to UN/ECE Regulation 83, malfunctions and the reduction in efficiency of NOx aftertreatment not using a reagent shall be monitored.

2.11.   In addition to the requirements of section 6.3.2 of Appendix 1 to Annex 11 to UN/ECE Regulation 83, the manufacturer shall demonstrate that malfunctions of the EGR flow and cooler are detected by the OBD system during its approval test.

2.12.   References to ‘HC’ (hydrocarbons) shall be read as ‘NMHC’ (non-methane hydrocarbons) in section 6.4.1.2 of Appendix 1 to Annex 11 to UN/ECE Regulation 83.

2.13.   In addition to the requirements of section 6.5.1.3 of Appendix 1 to Annex 11 of UN/ECE Regulation 83, all data required to be stored in relation to OBD in-use performance according to the provisions of section 3.6 of Appendix 1 of this Annex shall be available through the serial data port on the standardised data link connector according to the specifications given in section 6.5.3 of Appendix 1 to Annex 11 of UN/ECE Regulation 83.

3.   ADMINISTRATIVE PROVISIONS FOR DEFICIENCIES OF OBD SYSTEMS

3.1.   In considering the request for granting type-approval to a vehicle with a deficiency or deficiencies as set out in Article 6(2), the approval authority shall determine whether compliance with the requirements of this Annex is infeasible or unreasonable.

3.2.   The approval authority shall take into consideration data from the manufacturer that details such factors as, but not limited to, technical feasibility, lead time and production cycles including phase-in or phase-out of engines or vehicle designs and programmed upgrades of computers, the extent to which the resultant OBD system will be effective in complying with the requirements of this Regulation and that the manufacturer has demonstrated an acceptable level of effort toward compliance with the requirements of this Regulation.

3.3.   The approval authority will not accept any deficiency request that includes the complete lack of a required diagnostic monitor.

3.4.   The approval authority will not accept any deficiency request that does not respect the OBD threshold limits in Section 2.3.

3.5.   In determining the identified order of deficiencies, deficiencies relating to sections 3.3.3.1, 3.3.3.2 and 3.3.3.3 of Annex 11 of UN/ECE Regulation 83 for positive-ignition engines and sections 3.3.4.1, 3.3.4.2 and 3.3.4.3 of Annex 11 of UN/ECE Regulation 83 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified first.

3.6.   Prior to or at the time of type-approval, no deficiency shall be granted in respect of the requirements of section 6.5, except section 6.5.3.4 of Appendix 1 to Annex 11 of UN/ECE Regulation 83.

3.6.   Deficiency period

3.6.1.   A deficiency may be carried-over for a period of two years after the date of type-approval of the vehicle type unless it can be adequately demonstrated that substantial vehicle hardware modifications and additional lead-time beyond two years would be necessary to correct the deficiency. In such a case, the deficiency may be carried-over for a period not exceeding three years.

3.6.2.   A manufacturer may request that the approval authority grant a deficiency retrospectively when such a deficiency is discovered after the original type-approval. In this case, the deficiency may be carried-over for a period of two years after the date of notification to the approval authority unless it can be adequately demonstrated that substantial vehicle hardware modifications and additional lead-time beyond two years would be necessary to correct the deficiency. In such a case, the deficiency may be carried-over for a period not exceeding three years.

3.7.   The approval authority shall notify its decision in granting a deficiency request in accordance with Article 6(2).

4.   ACCESS TO OBD INFORMATION

4.1.   Requirements for access to OBD information are specified in section 5 of Annex 11 to UN/ECE Regulation 83. The exceptions to these requirements are described in the following sections.

4.2.   References to Appendix 1 of Annex 2 to UN/ECE Regulation 83 shall be understood as references to Appendix 5 to Annex I to this Regulation.

4.3.   References to section 4.2.11.2.7.6 of Annex 1 to UN/ECE Regulation 83 shall be understood as references to 3.2.12.2.7.6 of Appendix 3 to Annex I to this Regulation.

4.4.   References to ‘contracting parties’ shall be understood as references to ‘member states’.

4.5.   References to approval granted under Regulation 83 shall be understood as references to type-approval granted under this Regulation and Council Directive 70/220/EEC (1).

4.6.   UN/ECE type-approval shall be understood as EC type-approval.

---

(1)  Positive ignition particulate mass standards apply only to vehicles with direct injection engines

(2)  Until the dates set out in Article 17 a PM threshold limit of 80 mg/km shall apply to vehicles of categories M and N with a reference mass greater than 1 760 kg

(3)  Includes M1 vehicles that meet the ‘special social needs’ definition of Regulation (EC) No 715/2007

(1)  
  OJ L 76, 6.4.1971, p. 1.

Appendix 1

FUNCTIONAL ASPECTS OF ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEMS

1.   INTRODUCTION

1.1.   This Appendix describes the procedure of the test according to section 2 of this Annex.

2.   TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

2.1.   The technical requirements and specifications shall be those set out in Appendix 1 to Annex 11 to UN/ECE Regulation No 83 with the exceptions and additional requirements as described in the following sections.

2.2.   The references to the OBD threshold limits set out in paragraph 3.3.2 to Annex 11 of UN/ECE Regulation 83 shall be understood as references to the limits set out in section 2.3 of this Annex.

2.3.   The reference fuels specified in paragraph 3.2 of Appendix 1 of Annex 11 of UN/ECE Regulation No 83 shall be understood as reference to the appropriate reference fuel specifications in Annex IX to this Regulation.

2.4.   The reference to Annex 11 in paragraph 6.5.1.4 of Appendix 1 of Annex 11 of UN/ECE Regulation No 83 shall be understood as reference to Annex XI to this Regulation.

2.5.   For vehicles approved to Euro 6 limit values contained in Table 2 of Annex 1 of Regulation (EC) No 715/2007, Section 6.5.3.1 of Appendix 1 of Annex 11 of UN/ECE Regulation 83 shall be replaced by:

‘For emissions-related diagnostics, the following standard shall be used as the on-board to off-board communications link:

ISO 15765-4 “Road vehicles — Diagnostics on Controller Area Network (CAN) — Part 4: Requirements for emissions-related systems” dated 10 January 2005
  ’

3.   IN-USE PERFORMANCE

3.1.   General Requirements

3.1.1.   Each monitor of the OBD system shall be executed at least once per driving cycle in which the monitoring conditions as specified in section 3.2 are met. Manufacturers may not use the calculated ratio (or any element thereof) or any other indication of monitor frequency as a monitoring condition for any monitor.

3.1.2.   The in-use performance ratio (IUPR) of a specific monitor M of the OBD system referred to in Article 5(3) shall be:

IUPRM = NumeratorM/DenominatorM

M

M

M

3.1.3.   Comparison of Numerator and Denominator gives an indication of how often a specific monitor is operating relative to vehicle operation. To ensure all manufacturers are tracking IUPRM in the same manner, detailed requirements are given for defining and incrementing these counters.

M

3.1.4.   If, according to the requirements of this Annex, the vehicle is equipped with a specific monitor M, IUPRM shall be greater or equal to the following minimum values:

M

| (i) | 0,260 for secondary air system monitors and other cold start related monitors |
| --- | --- |

(i)

0,260 for secondary air system monitors and other cold start related monitors

| (ii) | 0,520 for evaporative emission purge control monitors |
| --- | --- |

(ii)

0,520 for evaporative emission purge control monitors

| (iii) | 0,336 for all other monitors |
| --- | --- |

(iii)

0,336 for all other monitors

3.1.5.   Vehicles shall comply with the requirements of section 3.1.4 for a mileage of at least 160 000 km. By way of derogation, vehicles type approved, registered, sold or entered into service before the relevant dates given in Article 10(4), (5) of Regulation (EC) No 715/2007, shall have an IUPRM greater or equal 0,1 for all monitors M.

M

3.1.6.   The requirements of this section are deemed to be met for a particular monitor M, if for all vehicles of a particular OBD family manufactured in a particular calendar year the following statistical conditions hold:

| (a) | The average IUPRM is equal or above the minimum value applicable to the monitor |
| --- | --- |

(a)

The average IUPRM is equal or above the minimum value applicable to the monitor

M

| (b) | More than 50 % of all vehicles have an IUPRM equal or above the minimum value applicable to the monitor. |
| --- | --- |

(b)

More than 50 % of all vehicles have an IUPRM equal or above the minimum value applicable to the monitor.

M

3.1.7.   The manufacturer shall demonstrate to the approval authority and on request to the Commission that these statistical conditions are satisfied for vehicles manufactured in a given calendar year for all monitors required to be reported by the OBD system according to section 3.6 of this Appendix not later than 18 months after the end of a calendar year. For this purpose, statistical tests shall be used which implement recognised statistical principles and confidence levels.

3.1.8.   For demonstration purposes of this section the manufacturer may group vehicles within an OBD family by any other successive and non-overlapping 12 month manufacturing periods instead of calendar years. For establishing the test sample of vehicles at least the selection criteria of Annex II, Appendix 1, point 2 shall be applied. For the entire test sample of vehicles the manufacturer must report to the approval authority all of the in-use performance data to be reported by the OBD system according to section 3.6 of this Appendix. Upon request, the approval authority which grants the approval shall make these data and the results of the statistical evaluation available to the Commission and other approval authorities.

3.1.9.   Public authorities and their delegates may pursue further tests on vehicles or collect appropriate data recorded by vehicles to verify compliance with the requirements of this Annex.

3.2.   NumeratorM

M

3.2.1.   The numerator of a specific monitor is a counter measuring the number of times a vehicle has been operated such that all monitoring conditions necessary for the specific monitor to detect a malfunction in order to warn the driver, as they have been implemented by the manufacturer, have been encountered. The numerator shall not be incremented more than once per driving cycle, unless there is reasoned technical justification.

3.3.   DenominatorM

M

3.3.1.   The purpose of the denominator is to provide a counter indicating the number of vehicle driving events, taking into account special conditions for a specific monitor. The denominator shall be incremented at least once per driving cycle, if during this driving cycle such conditions are met and the general denominator is incremented as specified in section 3.5 unless the denominator is disabled according to section 3.7 of this Appendix..

3.3.2.   In addition to the requirements of section 3.3.1:

| (a) | Secondary air system monitor denominator(s) shall be incremented if the commanded ‘on’ operation of the secondary air system occurs for a time greater than or equal to 10 seconds. For purposes of determining this commanded ‘on’ time, the OBD system may not include time during intrusive operation of the secondary air system solely for the purposes of monitoring; |
| --- | --- |

(a)

Secondary air system monitor denominator(s) shall be incremented if the commanded ‘on’ operation of the secondary air system occurs for a time greater than or equal to 10 seconds. For purposes of determining this commanded ‘on’ time, the OBD system may not include time during intrusive operation of the secondary air system solely for the purposes of monitoring;

| (b) | Denominators of monitors of systems only active during cold start shall be incremented if the component or strategy is commanded ‘on’ for a time greater than or equal to 10 seconds; |
| --- | --- |

(b)

Denominators of monitors of systems only active during cold start shall be incremented if the component or strategy is commanded ‘on’ for a time greater than or equal to 10 seconds;

| (c) | The denominator(s) for monitors of Variable Valve Timing (VVT) and/or control systems shall be incremented if the component is commanded to function (e.g., commanded ‘on’, ‘open’, ‘closed’, ‘locked’, etc.) on two or more occasions during the driving cycle or for a time greater than or equal to 10 seconds, whichever occurs first; |
| --- | --- |

(c)

The denominator(s) for monitors of Variable Valve Timing (VVT) and/or control systems shall be incremented if the component is commanded to function (e.g., commanded ‘on’, ‘open’, ‘closed’, ‘locked’, etc.) on two or more occasions during the driving cycle or for a time greater than or equal to 10 seconds, whichever occurs first;

| (d) | For the following monitors, the denominator(s) shall be incremented by one if, in addition to meeting the requirements of this section on at least one driving cycle, at least 800 cumulative kilometres of vehicle operation have been experienced since the last time the denominator was incremented:






  (i) | Diesel oxidation catalyst |
| --- | --- | --- |

(d)

For the following monitors, the denominator(s) shall be incremented by one if, in addition to meeting the requirements of this section on at least one driving cycle, at least 800 cumulative kilometres of vehicle operation have been experienced since the last time the denominator was incremented:

(i)

Diesel oxidation catalyst

| (ii) | Diesel particulate filter |
| --- | --- |

(ii)

Diesel particulate filter

3.3.3.   For hybrid vehicles, vehicles that employ alternative engine start hardware or strategies (e.g. integrated starter and generators), or alternative fuel vehicles (e.g. dedicated, bi-fuel, or dual-fuel applications), the manufacturer may request the approval of the approval authority to use alternative criteria to those set forth in this section for incrementing the denominator. In general, the approval authority shall not approve alternative criteria for vehicles that only employ engine shut off at or near idle/vehicle stop conditions. Approval by the approval authority of the alternative criteria shall be based on the equivalence of the alternative criteria to determine the amount of vehicle operation relative to the measure of conventional vehicle operation in accordance with the criteria in this section.

3.4.   Ignition Cycle Counter

3.4.1.   The ignition cycle counter indicates the number of ignition cycles a vehicle has experienced. The ignition cycle counter may not be incremented more than once per driving cycle.

3.5.   General Denominator

3.5.1.   The general denominator is a counter measuring the number of times a vehicle has been operated. It shall be incremented within 10 seconds, if and only if, the following criteria are satisfied on a single driving cycle:

| — | Cumulative time since engine start is greater than or equal to 600 seconds while at an elevation of less than 2 440 m above sea level and at an ambient temperature of greater than or equal to –7 °C., |
| --- | --- |

—

Cumulative time since engine start is greater than or equal to 600 seconds while at an elevation of less than 2 440 m above sea level and at an ambient temperature of greater than or equal to –7 °C.,

| — | Cumulative vehicle operation at or above 40 km/h occurs for greater than or equal to 300 seconds while at an elevation of less than 2 440 m above sea level and at an ambient temperature of greater than or equal to –7 °C., |
| --- | --- |

—

Cumulative vehicle operation at or above 40 km/h occurs for greater than or equal to 300 seconds while at an elevation of less than 2 440 m above sea level and at an ambient temperature of greater than or equal to –7 °C.,

| — | Continuous vehicle operation at idle (i.e. accelerator pedal released by driver and vehicle speed less than or equal to 1,6 km/h) for greater than or equal to 30 seconds while at an elevation of less than 2 440 m above sea level and at an ambient temperature of greater than or equal to –7 °C. |
| --- | --- |

—

Continuous vehicle operation at idle (i.e. accelerator pedal released by driver and vehicle speed less than or equal to 1,6 km/h) for greater than or equal to 30 seconds while at an elevation of less than 2 440 m above sea level and at an ambient temperature of greater than or equal to –7 °C.

3.6.   Reporting and increasing counters

3.6.1.   The OBD system shall report in accordance with the ISO 15031-5 specifications the ignition cycle counter and general denominator as well as separate numerators and denominators for the following monitors, if their presence on the vehicle is required by this Annex:

| — | Catalysts (each bank to be reported separately), |
| --- | --- |

—

Catalysts (each bank to be reported separately),

| — | Oxygen/exhaust gas sensors, including secondary oxygen sensors (each sensor to be reported separately), |
| --- | --- |

—

Oxygen/exhaust gas sensors, including secondary oxygen sensors (each sensor to be reported separately),

| — | Evaporative system, |
| --- | --- |

—

Evaporative system,

| — | EGR system, |
| --- | --- |

—

EGR system,

| — | VVT system, |
| --- | --- |

—

VVT system,

| — | Secondary air system, |
| --- | --- |

—

Secondary air system,

| — | Particulate filter, |
| --- | --- |

—

Particulate filter,

| — | NOx aftertreatment system (e.g. NOx adsorber, NOx reagent/catalyst system), |
| --- | --- |

—

NOx aftertreatment system (e.g. NOx adsorber, NOx reagent/catalyst system),

x

x

x

| — | Boost pressure control system, |
| --- | --- |

—

Boost pressure control system,

3.6.2.   For specific components or systems that have multiple monitors, which are required to be reported by this section (e.g. oxygen sensor bank 1 may have multiple monitors for sensor response or other sensor characteristics), the OBD system shall separately track numerators and denominators for each of the specific monitors and report only the corresponding numerator and denominator for the specific monitor that has the lowest numerical ratio. If two or more specific monitors have identical ratios, the corresponding numerator and denominator for the specific monitor that has the highest denominator shall be reported for the specific component.

3.6.3.   All counters, when incremented, shall be incremented by an integer of one.

3.6.4.   The minimum value of each counter is 0, the maximum value shall not be less than 65 535, notwithstanding any other requirements on standardised storage and reporting of the OBD system.

3.6.5.   If either the numerator or denominator for a specific monitor reaches its maximum value, both counters for that specific monitor shall be divided by two before being incremented again according to the provisions set in sections 3.2 and 3.3. If the ignition cycle counter or the general denominator reaches its maximum value, the respective counter shall change to zero at its next increment according to the provisions set in sections 3.4 and 3.5, respectively.

3.6.6.   Each counter shall be reset to zero only when a non-volatile memory reset occurs (e.g. reprogramming event, etc.) or, if the numbers are stored in keep-alive memory (KAM), when KAM is lost due to an interruption in electrical power to the control module (e.g. battery disconnect, etc.).

3.6.7.   The manufacturer shall take measures to ensure that the values of numerator and denominator can not be reset or modified, except in cases provided for explicitly in this section.

3.7.   Disablement of Numerators and Denominators and of the General Denominator

3.7.1.   Within 10 seconds of a malfunction being detected, which disables a monitor required to meet the monitoring conditions of this Annex (i.e. a pending or confirmed code is stored), the OBD system shall disable further incrementing of the corresponding numerator and denominator for each monitor that is disabled. When the malfunction is no longer detected (i.e., the pending code is erased through self-clearing or through a scan tool command), incrementing of all corresponding numerators and denominators shall resume within 10 seconds.

3.7.2.   Within 10 seconds of the start of a power take-off operation (PTO) operation that disables a monitor required to meet the monitoring conditions of this Annex, the OBD system shall disable further incrementing of the corresponding numerator and denominator for each monitor that is disabled. When the PTO operation ends, incrementing of all corresponding numerators and denominators shall resume within 10 seconds.

3.7.3.   The OBD system shall disable further incrementing of the numerator and denominator of a specific monitor within 10 seconds, if a malfunction of any component used to determine the criteria within the definition of the specific monitor’s denominator (i.e. vehicle speed, ambient temperature, elevation, idle operation, engine cold start, or time of operation) has been detected and the corresponding pending fault code has been stored. Incrementing of the numerator and denominator shall resume within 10 seconds when the malfunction is no longer present (e.g. pending code erased through self-clearing or by a scan tool command).

3.7.4.   The OBD system shall disable further incrementing of the general denominator within 10 seconds, if a malfunction has been detected of any component used to determine whether the criteria in section 3.5 are satisfied (i.e. vehicle speed, ambient temperature, elevation, idle operation, or time of operation) and the corresponding pending fault code has been stored. The general denominator may not be disabled from incrementing for any other condition. Incrementing of the general denominator shall resume within 10 seconds when the malfunction is no longer present (e.g., pending code erased through self-clearing or by a scan tool command).

Appendix 2

ESSENTIAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE VEHICLE FAMILY

1.   PARAMETERS DEFINING THE OBD FAMILY

1.1.   The OBD family means a manufacturer’s grouping of vehicles which, through their design, are expected to have similar exhaust emission and OBD system characteristics. Each engine of this family shall comply with the requirements of this Regulation.

1.2.   The OBD family may be defined by basic design parameters which shall be common to vehicles within the family. In some cases there may be interaction of parameters. These effects shall also be taken into consideration to ensure that only vehicles with similar exhaust emission characteristics are included within an OBD family.

2.   To this end, those vehicle types whose parameters described below are identical are considered to belong to the same engine/emission control/OBD system combination.

| | Engine:







  — | combustion process (i.e. positive-ignition/compression-ignition, two stroke/four stroke/rotary), |
| --- | --- | --- |

Engine:

—

combustion process (i.e. positive-ignition/compression-ignition, two stroke/four stroke/rotary),

| — | method of engine fuelling (i.e. single or multi-point fuel injection), |
| --- | --- |

—

method of engine fuelling (i.e. single or multi-point fuel injection),

| — | fuel type (i.e. petrol, diesel, flex fuel petrol/ethanol, flex fuel diesel/biodiesel, NG/biomethane, LPG, bi fuel petrol/NG/biomethane, bi fuel petrol/LPG), |
| --- | --- |

—

fuel type (i.e. petrol, diesel, flex fuel petrol/ethanol, flex fuel diesel/biodiesel, NG/biomethane, LPG, bi fuel petrol/NG/biomethane, bi fuel petrol/LPG),

| | Emission control system:







  — | type of catalytic converter (i. e. oxidation, three-way, heated catalyst, SCR, other), |
| --- | --- | --- |

Emission control system:

—

type of catalytic converter (i. e. oxidation, three-way, heated catalyst, SCR, other),

| — | type of particulate trap, |
| --- | --- |

—

type of particulate trap,

| — | secondary air injection (i.e. with or without), |
| --- | --- |

—

secondary air injection (i.e. with or without),

| — | exhaust gas recirculation (i.e. with or without), |
| --- | --- |

—

exhaust gas recirculation (i.e. with or without),

| | OBD parts and functioning:







  — | the methods of OBD functional monitoring, malfunction detection and malfunction indication to the vehicle driver. |
| --- | --- | --- |

OBD parts and functioning:

—

the methods of OBD functional monitoring, malfunction detection and malfunction indication to the vehicle driver.

ANNEX XII

DETERMINATION OF CO2 EMISSIONS AND FUEL CONSUMPTION

1.   INTRODUCTION

This Annex sets out the requirements for the measurement of CO2 emissions and fuel consumption.

2.   GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

2.1.   The general specifications for conducting the tests and interpreting the results shall be those set out in Section 5 of UN/ECE Regulation 101 with the exceptions specified below.

Test fuel

2.2.1.   The appropriate reference fuels as defined in Annex IX of this Regulation shall be used for testing.

2.2.2.   For LPG and NG, that fuel shall be used which is chosen by the manufacturer for the measurement of the net power in accordance with Annex I to Council Directive 80/1269/EEC (1). The chosen fuel shall be specified in the information document as defined in Appendix 3 to Annex I of this Regulation.

2.3.   Paragraph 5.2.4. of UN/ECE Regulation 101 shall read:

| (1) | density: measured on the test fuel according to ISO 3675 or an equivalent method. For petrol, diesel, biodiesel and ethanol (E85) the density measured at 15 °C will be used; for LPG and natural gas/biomethane a reference density will be used, as follows: | 0,538 kg/litre for LPG |
| --- | --- | --- |

(1)

density: measured on the test fuel according to ISO 3675 or an equivalent method. For petrol, diesel, biodiesel and ethanol (E85) the density measured at 15 °C will be used; for LPG and natural gas/biomethane a reference density will be used, as follows:

0,538 kg/litre for LPG

| | 0,654 kg/m3 for NG |
| --- | --- |

0,654 kg/m3 for NG

| (2) | hydrogen-carbon-oxygen ratio:fixed values will be used which are: | C1H1,89O0,016 for petrol, |
| --- | --- | --- |

(2)

hydrogen-carbon-oxygen ratio:fixed values will be used which are:

C1H1,89O0,016 for petrol,

| | C1H1,86O0,005 for diesel, |
| --- | --- |

C1H1,86O0,005 for diesel,

| | C1H2,525 for LPG (liquefied petroleum gas), |
| --- | --- |

C1H2,525 for LPG (liquefied petroleum gas),

| | CH4 for NG (natural gas) and biomethane, |
| --- | --- |

CH4 for NG (natural gas) and biomethane,

| | C1H2,74O0,385 for ethanol (E85). |
| --- | --- |

C1H2,74O0,385 for ethanol (E85).

3.   TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

3.1.   The technical requirements and specifications for the measurement of CO2 emissions, fuel consumption or electric energy consumption shall be those set out in Annexes 6 to 10 to UN/ECE Regulation 101 with the exceptions specified below.

3.2.   In Annex 6, section 1.3.5 of UN/ECE Regulation 101 the tyres used shall meet the same selection criteria as those specified for the type 1 emissions test, set out in Annex III section 3.5 of this Regulation.

3.3.   In Annex 6 of UN/ECE Regulation 101, section 1.4.3 shall be replaced by the following:

‘1.4.3. The fuel consumption, expressed in litres per 100 km (in the case of petrol, LPG, ethanol (E85) and diesel) or in m3 per 100 km (in the case of NG/biomethane) is calculated by means of the following formulae:

| (a) | for vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with petrol (E5):
  FC = (0,118/D) · [(0,848 · HC) + (0,429 · CO) + (0,273 · CO2)] |
| --- | --- |

(a)

for vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with petrol (E5):

FC = (0,118/D) · [(0,848 · HC) + (0,429 · CO) + (0,273 · CO2)]

| (b) | for vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with LPG:
  FCnorm = (0,1212/0,538) · [(0,825 · HC) + (0,429 · CO) + (0,273 · CO2)]
  If the composition of the fuel used for the test differs from the composition that is assumed for the calculation of the normalised consumption, on the manufacturer’s request a correction factor cf may be applied, as follows:
  FCnorm = (0,1212/0,538) · (cf) · [(0,825 · HC) + (0,429 · CO) + (0,273 · CO2)]
  The correction factor cf, which may be applied, is determined as follows:
  cf = 0,825 + 0,0693 nactual

  where:
  nactual = the actual H/C ratio of the fuel used |
| --- | --- |

(b)

for vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with LPG:

FCnorm = (0,1212/0,538) · [(0,825 · HC) + (0,429 · CO) + (0,273 · CO2)]

If the composition of the fuel used for the test differs from the composition that is assumed for the calculation of the normalised consumption, on the manufacturer’s request a correction factor cf may be applied, as follows:

FCnorm = (0,1212/0,538) · (cf) · [(0,825 · HC) + (0,429 · CO) + (0,273 · CO2)]

The correction factor cf, which may be applied, is determined as follows:

cf = 0,825 + 0,0693 nactual

where:

nactual = the actual H/C ratio of the fuel used

| (c) | for vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with NG/biomethane:
  FCnorm = (0,1336/0,654) · [(0,749 · HC) + (0,429 · CO) + (0,273 · CO2)] |
| --- | --- |

(c)

for vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with NG/biomethane:

FCnorm = (0,1336/0,654) · [(0,749 · HC) + (0,429 · CO) + (0,273 · CO2)]

| (d) | for vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with ethanol (E85):
  FC = (0,1742/D) · [(0,574 · HC) + (0,429 · CO) + (0,273 · CO2)] |
| --- | --- |

(d)

for vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with ethanol (E85):

FC = (0,1742/D) · [(0,574 · HC) + (0,429 · CO) + (0,273 · CO2)]

| (e) | for vehicles with a compression ignition engine fuelled with diesel (B5):
  FC = (0,116/D) · [(0,861 · HC) + (0,429 · CO) + (0,273 · CO2)] |
| --- | --- |

(e)

for vehicles with a compression ignition engine fuelled with diesel (B5):

FC = (0,116/D) · [(0,861 · HC) + (0,429 · CO) + (0,273 · CO2)]

In these formulae:

| FC | = | the fuel consumption in litre per 100 km (in the case of petrol, ethanol, LPG diesel or biodiesel) or in m3 per 100 km (in the case of natural gas) |
| --- | --- | --- |
| HC | = | the measured emission of hydrocarbons in g/km |
| CO | = | the measured emission of carbon monoxide in g/km |
| CO2 | = | the measured emission of carbon dioxide in g/km |
| D | = | the density of the test fuel. |

FC

=

the fuel consumption in litre per 100 km (in the case of petrol, ethanol, LPG diesel or biodiesel) or in m3 per 100 km (in the case of natural gas)

HC

=

the measured emission of hydrocarbons in g/km

CO

=

the measured emission of carbon monoxide in g/km

CO2

=

the measured emission of carbon dioxide in g/km

D

=

the density of the test fuel.

In the case of gaseous fuels this is the density at 15 °C.’

3.4.   In Annex 8 of UN/ECE Regulation 101, references to Annex 4 shall be understood as reference to Appendix 4 of Annex I of this Regulation.

---

(1)  
  OJ L 375, 31.12.1980, p. 46.

ANNEX XIII

EC TYPE-APPROVAL OF REPLACEMENT POLLUTION CONTROL DEVICES AS SEPARATE TECHNICAL UNIT

1.   INTRODUCTION

1.1.   This Annex contains additional requirement for the type-approval as separate technical units of pollution control devices.

2.   GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

2.1.   Marking

Original replacement pollution control devices shall bear at least the following identifications:

| (a) | the vehicle manufacturer’s name or trade mark; |
| --- | --- |

(a)

the vehicle manufacturer’s name or trade mark;

| (b) | the make and identifying part number of the original replacement pollution control device as recorded in the information mentioned in point 2.3. |
| --- | --- |

(b)

the make and identifying part number of the original replacement pollution control device as recorded in the information mentioned in point 2.3.

2.2.   Documentation

Original replacement pollution control devices shall be accompanied by the following information:

| (a) | the vehicle manufacturer’s name or trade mark; |
| --- | --- |

(a)

the vehicle manufacturer’s name or trade mark;

| (b) | the make and identifying part number of the original replacement pollution control device as recorded in the information mentioned in point 2.3; |
| --- | --- |

(b)

the make and identifying part number of the original replacement pollution control device as recorded in the information mentioned in point 2.3;

| (c) | the vehicles for which the original replacement pollution control device is of a type covered by point 2.3 of the Addendum to Appendix 4 to Annex I, including, where applicable, a marking to identify if the original replacement pollution control device is suitable for fitting to a vehicle that is equipped with an on-board diagnostic (OBD) system; |
| --- | --- |

(c)

the vehicles for which the original replacement pollution control device is of a type covered by point 2.3 of the Addendum to Appendix 4 to Annex I, including, where applicable, a marking to identify if the original replacement pollution control device is suitable for fitting to a vehicle that is equipped with an on-board diagnostic (OBD) system;

| (d) | installation instructions, where necessary. |
| --- | --- |

(d)

installation instructions, where necessary.

This information shall be available in the product catalogue distributed to points of sale by the vehicle manufacturer.

2.3.   The vehicle manufacturer shall provide to the technical service and/or approval authority the necessary information in electronic format which makes the link between the relevant part numbers and the type-approval documentation.

This information shall contain the following:

| (a) | make(s) and type(s) of vehicle, |
| --- | --- |

(a)

make(s) and type(s) of vehicle,

| (b) | make(s) and type(s) of original replacement pollution control device, |
| --- | --- |

(b)

make(s) and type(s) of original replacement pollution control device,

| (c) | part number(s) of original replacement pollution control device, |
| --- | --- |

(c)

part number(s) of original replacement pollution control device,

| (d) | type-approval number of the relevant vehicle type(s). |
| --- | --- |

(d)

type-approval number of the relevant vehicle type(s).

3.   EC SEPARATE TECHNICAL UNIT TYPE-APPROVAL MARK

3.1.   Every replacement pollution control device conforming to the type approved under this Regulation as a separate technical unit shall bear an EC type-approval mark.

3.2.   This mark shall consist of a rectangle surrounding the lower-case letter ‘e’ followed by the distinguishing number or letter(s) of the Member State which has granted the EC type-approval:

| 1. | for Germany |
| --- | --- |

1.

for Germany

| 2. | for France |
| --- | --- |

2.

for France

| 3. | for Italy |
| --- | --- |

3.

for Italy

| 4. | for the Netherlands |
| --- | --- |

4.

for the Netherlands

| 5. | for Sweden |
| --- | --- |

5.

for Sweden

| 6. | for Belgium |
| --- | --- |

6.

for Belgium

| 7. | for Hungary |
| --- | --- |

7.

for Hungary

| 8. | for Czech Republic |
| --- | --- |

8.

for Czech Republic

| 9. | for Spain |
| --- | --- |

9.

for Spain

| 11. | for the United Kingdom |
| --- | --- |

11.

for the United Kingdom

| 12. | for Austria |
| --- | --- |

12.

for Austria

| 13. | for Luxembourg |
| --- | --- |

13.

for Luxembourg

| 17. | for Finland |
| --- | --- |

17.

for Finland

| 18. | for Denmark |
| --- | --- |

18.

for Denmark

| 19. | for Romania |
| --- | --- |

19.

for Romania

| 20. | for Poland |
| --- | --- |

20.

for Poland

| 21. | for Portugal |
| --- | --- |

21.

for Portugal

| 23. | for Greece |
| --- | --- |

23.

for Greece

| 24. | for Ireland |
| --- | --- |

24.

for Ireland

| 26. | for Slovenia |
| --- | --- |

26.

for Slovenia

| 27. | for Slovakia |
| --- | --- |

27.

for Slovakia

| 29. | for Estonia |
| --- | --- |

29.

for Estonia

| 32. | for Latvia |
| --- | --- |

32.

for Latvia

| 34. | for Bulgaria |
| --- | --- |

34.

for Bulgaria

| 36. | for Lithuania |
| --- | --- |

36.

for Lithuania

| 49. | for Cyprus |
| --- | --- |

49.

for Cyprus

| 50. | for Malta |
| --- | --- |

50.

for Malta

The EC type- approval mark shall also include in the vicinity of the rectangle the ‘base approval number’ contained in section 4 of the type-approval number referred to in Annex VII to Directive 2007/46/EC, preceded by the two figures indicating the sequence number assigned to the latest major technical amendment to Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 or this Regulation on the date EC type-approval for a separate technical unit was granted. For this Regulation, the sequence number is 00.

3.3.   The EC type-approval mark shall be affixed to the replacement pollution control device in such a way as to be clearly legible and indelible. It shall, wherever possible, be visible when the replacement pollution control device is installed on the vehicle.

3.4.   Appendix 3 to this Annex gives example of the EC type- approval mark..

4.   TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

The requirements for the type-approval of replacement pollution control devices shall be those of Section 5 of UN/ECE Regulation 103 with the exceptions set out in sections 4.1.1 to 4.1.4.

4.1.1.   The terms ‘catalytic converter’ and ‘converter’ used in section 5 of UN/ECE Regulation 103 shall be understood to mean ‘pollution control device’

4.1.2.   The regulated pollutants referred to throughout section 5.2.3 of UN/ECE Regulation 103 shall be replaced by all the pollutants specified in Annex 1, Tables 1 and 2 of Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 for replacement pollution control devices intended to be fitted to vehicles type approved to Regulation (EC) No 715/2007.

4.1.3.   For replacement pollution control devices standards intended to be fitted to vehicles type approved to Regulation (EC) No 715/2007, the durability requirements and associated deterioration factors specified in section 5 of UN/ECE Regulation 103, shall refer to those specified in Annex VII of this Regulation.

4.1.4.   Reference to Appendix 1 of the type-approval communication in section 5.5.3 of UN/ECE Regulation 103 shall be understood as reference to the addendum to the EC type-approval certificate on vehicle OBD information (Appendix 5 to Annex I).

4.2.   For vehicles with positive-ignition engines, if the THC and NMHC emissions measured during the demonstration test of a new original equipment catalytic converter, under paragraph 5.2.1 of UN/ECE Regulation 103, are higher than the values measured during the type-approval of the vehicle, the difference shall be added to the OBD threshold limits. The OBD threshold limits are specified in either:

| (a) | point 3.3.2 of Annex 11 to UN/ECE Regulation 83 for replacement parts intended to be fitted on vehicles type-approved to Directive 70/220/EEC; or |
| --- | --- |

(a)

point 3.3.2 of Annex 11 to UN/ECE Regulation 83 for replacement parts intended to be fitted on vehicles type-approved to Directive 70/220/EEC; or

| (b) | point 2.3 of Annex XI of this Regulation for replacement parts intended to be fitted on vehicles type-approved to Regulation (EC) No 715/2007. |
| --- | --- |

(b)

point 2.3 of Annex XI of this Regulation for replacement parts intended to be fitted on vehicles type-approved to Regulation (EC) No 715/2007.

4.3.   The revised OBD threshold limits will apply during the tests of OBD compatibility set out in paragraphs 5.5 to 5.5.5 of UN/ECE Regulation 103. In particular, when the exceedance allowed in paragraph 1 of Appendix 1 to Annex 11 to UN/ECE Regulation 83 is applied.

4.4.   Requirements for replacement periodically regenerating systems

4.4.1.   Requirements regarding emissions

4.4.1.1.   The vehicle(s) indicated in Article 11(3), equipped with a replacement periodically regenerating system of the type for which approval is requested, shall be subject to the tests described in Section 3 of Annex 13 of UN/ECE Regulation 83, in order to compare its performance with the same vehicle equipped with the original periodically regenerating system.

4.4.2.   Determination of the basis for comparison

4.4.2.1.   The vehicle shall be fitted with a new original periodically regenerating system. The emissions performance of this system shall be determined following the test procedure set out in section 3 of Annex 13 of UN/ECE Regulation 83.

4.4.2.2.   Upon request of the applicant for the approval of the replacement component, the approval authority shall make available on a non-discriminatory basis, the information referred to in points 3.2.12.2.1.11.1 and 3.2.12.2.6.4.1 of the information document contained in Appendix 3 to Annex I to this Regulation for each vehicle tested.

4.4.3.   Exhaust gas test with a replacement periodically regeneration system

4.4.3.1.   The original equipment periodically regenerating system of the test vehicle(s) shall be replaced by the replacement periodically regenerating system. The emissions performance of this system shall be determined following the test procedure set out in paragraph 3 Annex 13 of UN/ECE Regulation 83.

4.4.3.2.   To determine the D-factor of the replacement periodically regenerating system, any of the engine bench methods referred to in paragraph 3 of Annex 13 of UN/ECE Regulation 83 may be used.

4.4.4.   Other requirements

The requirements of paragraphs 5.2.3, 5.3, 5.4 and 5.5 of UN/ECE Regulation 103 shall apply to replacement periodically regenerating systems. In these paragraphs the words ‘catalytic converter’ shall be understood to mean ‘periodically regenerating system’. In addition the exceptions made to these paragraphs in section 4.1 of this annex shall also apply to periodically regenerating systems.

5.   DOCUMENTATION

5.1.   Each replacement pollution control device shall be clearly and indelibly marked with the manufacturer’s name or trade mark and accompanied by the following information:

| (a) | the vehicles (including year of manufacture) for which the replacement pollution control device is approved, including, where applicable, a marking to identify if the replacement pollution control device is suitable for fitting to a vehicle that is equipped with an on-board diagnostic (OBD) system; |
| --- | --- |

(a)

the vehicles (including year of manufacture) for which the replacement pollution control device is approved, including, where applicable, a marking to identify if the replacement pollution control device is suitable for fitting to a vehicle that is equipped with an on-board diagnostic (OBD) system;

| (b) | installation instructions, where necessary.
  The information shall be available in the product catalogue distributed to points of sale by the manufacturer of replacement pollution control devices. |
| --- | --- |

(b)

installation instructions, where necessary.

The information shall be available in the product catalogue distributed to points of sale by the manufacturer of replacement pollution control devices.

6.   CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION

6.1.   Measures to ensure the conformity of production shall be taken in accordance with the provisions laid down in Article 12 of Directive 2007/46/EC.

6.2.   Special provisions

6.2.1.   The checks referred to in point 2.2 of Annex X to Directive 2007/46/EC shall include compliance with the characteristics as defined under point 8 of Article 2 of this Regulation.

6.2.2.   For the application of Article 12(2) of Directive 2007/46/EC, the tests described in section 4.4.1 of this Annex and section 5.2 of UN/ECE Regulation No 103 (requirements regarding emissions) may be carried out. In this case, the holder of the approval may request, as an alternative, to use as a basis for comparison not the original equipment pollution control device, but the replacement pollution control device which was used during the type-approval tests (or another sample that has been proven to conform to the approved type). Emissions values measured with the sample under verification shall then on average not exceed by more than 15 % the mean values measured with the sample used for reference.

Appendix 1

MODEL

Information document No ...

relating to the EC type-approval of replacement pollution control devices

The following information, if applicable, must be supplied in triplicate and include a list of contents. Any drawings must be supplied in appropriate scale and sufficient detail on size A4 or on a folder of A4 format. Photographs, if any, must show sufficient detail.

If the systems, components or separate technical units have electronic controls, information concerning their performance must be supplied.

0.   GENERAL

0.1.   Make (trade name of manufacturer): ...

Type: ...

0.2.1.   Commercial name(s), if available: ...

0.5.   Name and address of manufacturer: ...

Name and address of authorised representative, if any: ...

0.7.   In the case of components and separate technical units, location and method of affixing of the EC approval mark: ...

0.8.   Address(es) of assembly plant(s): ...

1.   DESCRIPTION OF THE DEVICE

1.1.   Make and type of the replacement pollution control device: ...

1.2.   Drawings of the replacement pollution control device, identifying in particular all the characteristics referred to under point 8 of Article 2 of [this Regulation]: ...

Description of the vehicle type or types for which the replacement pollution control device is intended: ...

1.3.1.   Number(s) and/or symbol(s) characterising the engine and vehicle type(s): ...

1.3.2.   Is the replacement pollution control device intended to be compatible with OBD requirements (Yes/No) (1)

1.4.   Description and drawings showing the position of the replacement pollution control device relative to the engine exhaust manifold(s): ...

---

(1)  Delete where not applicable

Appendix 2

MODEL EC TYPE-APPROVAL CERTIFICATE

(Maximum format: A4 (210 mm × 297 mm))

EC TYPE-APPROVAL CERTIFICATE

Communication concerning the:

| — | EC type-approval (1), ..., |
| --- | --- |

—

EC type-approval (1), ...,

1

| — | extension of EC type-approval (1), ..., |
| --- | --- |

—

extension of EC type-approval (1), ...,

1

| — | refusal of EC type-approval (1), ..., |
| --- | --- |

—

refusal of EC type-approval (1), ...,

1

| — | withdrawal of EC type-approval (1), ..., |
| --- | --- |

—

withdrawal of EC type-approval (1), ...,

1

of a type of component/separate technical unit (1)

1

with regard to Regulation (EC) No 715/2007, as implemented by Regulation (EC) No 692/2008.

Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 or Regulation (EC) No 692/2008 as last amended by ...

EC type-approval number: ...

Reason for extension: ...

SECTION I

0.1.   Make (trade name of manufacturer): ...

0.2.   Type: ...

Means of identification of type if marked on the component/separate technical unit (2): ...

2

0.3.1.   Location of that marking: ...

0.5.   Name and address of manufacturer: ...

0.7.   In the case of components and separate technical units, location and method of affixing of the EC approval mark: ...

0.8.   Name and address(es) of assembly plant(s): ...

0.9.   Name and address of manufacturer’s representative (if any): ...

SECTION II

Additional information

1.1.   Make and type of the replacement pollution control device: ...

1.2.   Vehicle type(s) for which the pollution control device type qualifies as replacement part: ...

Type(s) of vehicles) on which the replacement pollution control device has been tested: ...

1.3.1.   Has the replacement pollution control device demonstrated compatibility with OBD requirements (yes/no) (1): ...

1

2.   Technical service responsible for carrying out the tests: ...

3.   Date of test report: ...

4.   Number of test report: ...

5.   Remarks: ...

6.   Place: ...

7.   Date: ...

8.   Signature: ...

| Attachments: | Information package.
  Test report. |
| --- | --- |

Attachments:

Attachments:

Information package.

Test report.

---

(1)  Delete where not applicable

1

(2)  If the means of identification of type contains characters not relevant to describe the vehicle, component or separate technical unit types covered by this type-approval certificate such characters shall be represented in the document by the symbol:’?’ (e.g. ABC??123??).

2

Appendix 3

Example of the EC type-approval marks

(see point 5.2 of this Annex)

The above approval mark affixed to a component of a replacement pollution control device shows that the type concerned has been approved in France (e 2), pursuant to this Regulation. The first two digits of the approval number (00) indicate that this part was approved according to this Regulation. The following four digits (1234) are those allocated by the approval authority to the replacement pollution control device as the base approval number.

ANNEX XIV

Access to vehicle OBD and vehicle repair and maintenance information

1.   INTRODUCTION

1.1.   This Annex lays down technical requirements for the accessibility of vehicle OBD and vehicle repair and maintenance information.

2.   REQUIREMENTS

2.1.   Vehicle OBD and vehicle repair and maintenance information available through websites shall follow the technical specifications of OASIS Document SC2-D5, Format of Automotive Repair Information, version 1.0, 28 May 2003
   (1) and of Sections 3.2, 3,5, (excluding 3.5.2), 3,6, 3.7 and 3,8 of OASIS Document SC1-D2, Autorepair Requirements Specification, version 6.1, dated 10.1.2003
   (2), using only open text and graphic formats or formats which can be viewed and printed using only standard software plug-ins that are freely available, easy to install, and which run under computer operating systems commonly in use. Where possible, keywords in the meta data shall conform to ISO 15031-2. Such information shall be always available, except as required for web-site maintenance purposes. Those requiring the right to duplicate or re-publish the information should negotiate directly with the manufacturer concerned. Information for training material shall also be available, but may be presented through other media than web-sites.

2.2.   Access to vehicle security features used by authorised dealers and repair shops shall be made available to independent operators under protection of ISO security standard 15764 using security certificates in accordance with ISO 20828. The independent operator shall be accredited and authorised for this purpose on the basis of documents demonstrating that they pursue a legitimate business activity and have not been convicted of relevant criminal activity.

2.3.   Reprogramming of vehicle control units shall be conducted in accordance with SAE J2534.

2.4.   All emission-related fault codes shall be consistent with Appendix 1 to Annex XI.

2.5.   For access to any vehicle OBD and vehicle repair and maintenance information other than that relating to secure areas of the vehicle, registration requirements for use of the manufacturer’s web site by an independent operator shall require only such information as is necessary to confirm how payment for the information is to be made. For information concerning access to secure areas of the vehicle, the independent operator shall present a certificate in accordance with ISO 20828 to identify himself and the organisation to which he belongs and the manufacturer shall respond with his own certificate in accordance with ISO 20828 to confirm to the independent operator that he is accessing a legitimate site of the intended manufacturer. Both parties shall keep a log of any such transactions indicating the vehicles and changes made to them under this provision.

2.6.   In the event that vehicle OBD and vehicle repair and maintenance information available on a manufacturer’s website does not contain specific relevant information to permit the proper design and manufacture of alternative fuels retrofit systems, then any interested alternative fuels retrofit system manufacturer shall be able to access the information required in paragraphs 0, 2, and 3 of Appendix 3 to Annex 1 by contacting the manufacturer directly with such a request. Contact details for that purpose shall be clearly indicated on the manufacturer’s website and the information shall be provided within 30 days. Such information need only be provided for alternative fuels retrofit systems that are subject to UN/ECE Regulation 115 or for alternative fuels retrofit components that form part of systems subject to UN/ECE Regulation 115, and need only be provided in response to a request that clearly specifies the exact specification of the vehicle model for which the information is required and that specifically confirms that the information is required for the development of alternative fuels retrofit systems or components subject to UN/ECE Regulation 115.

2.7.   Manufacturers shall indicate in their repair information websites the type-approval number by model.

2.8.   Manufacturers shall establish fees for hourly, daily, monthly and annual access to their repair information websites which are reasonable and proportionate.

---

(1)  Available at: http://www.oasis-open.org/committees/download.php/2412/Draft%20Committee%20Specification.pdf

(2)  Available at: http://lists.oasis-open.org/archives/autorepair/200302/pdf00005.pdf

Appendix 1

Image 11

Manufacturer’s Certificate on Access to Vehicle OBD and Vehicle Repair and Maintenance Information

(Manufacturer): ...

(Address of the manufacturer): ...

Certifies that

it provides access to vehicle OBD and vehicle repair and maintenance information in compliance with the provisions of:

— Article 6 of Regulation (EC) No 715/2007;

— Articles 4(6) and 13 of Regulation (EC) No 692/2008;

— Annex I, section 2.3.1 and 2.3.5 of Regulation (EC) No 692/2008;

— Annex I, Appendix 3, section 16 of Regulation (EC) No 692/2008;

— Annex I, Appendix 5 of Regulation (EC) No 692/2008;

— Annex XI, section 4 of Regulation (EC) No 692/2008; and

— Annex XIV of Regulation (EC) No 692/2008

with respect to the vehicle types listed in attachment to this Certificate.

The principal website address through which the relevant information may be accessed and which are hereby certified to be in compliance with the above provisions are listed in an attachment to this Certificate along with the contact details of the responsible manufacturer’s representative whose signature is below.

Where applicable: The manufacturer hereby also certifies that it has complied with the obligation in Article 13(5) of this Regulation to provide the relevant information for previous approvals of these vehicle types no later than 6 months after the date of type-approval.

Done at [ ... Place]

On [... Date]

[Signature of the Manufacturer’s Representative]

Annexes:

— Website Addresses

— Contact Details

Image 12

Annex I

to

Manufacturer’s Certificate on Access to Vehicle OBD and Vehicle Repair and Maintenance Information

Website addresses referred to by this Certificate:

Image 13

Annex II

to

Manufacturer’s Certificate on Access to Vehicle OBD and Vehicle Repair and Maintenance Information

Contact details of the manufacturer’s representative referred to by this Certificate:

ANNEX XV

IN-SERVICE CONFORMITY OF VEHICLES TYPE-APPROVED UNDER DIRECTIVE 70/220/EEC

1.   CONFORMITY OF IN-SERVICE VEHICLES

1.1.   An audit of in-service conformity shall be conducted by the approval authority on the basis of any relevant information in possession of the manufacturer, under procedures similar to those defined in Article 10(1) and (2) and in points 1 and 2 of Annex X to Directive 70/156/EEC.

1.2.   The Figure referred to under point 4 of Appendix 2 to this Annex and Figure 4/2 of Appendix 4 to UN/ECE Regulation 83 illustrate the procedure for in-service conformity checking.

1.3.   Parameters defining the in-service family

The in-service family may be defined by basic design parameters which shall be common to vehicles within the family. Accordingly, those vehicle types which have in common, or within the stated tolerances, at least the parameters set out in points 1.3.1 to 1.3.11, can be considered as belonging to the same in-service family.

1.3.1.   combustion process (two stroke, four stroke, rotary).

1.3.2.   number of cylinders.

1.3.3.   configuration of the cylinder block (in-line, V, radial, horizontally opposed, other). The inclination or orientation of the cylinders is not a criteria).

1.3.4.   method of engine fuelling (e.g. indirect or direct injection).

1.3.5.   type of cooling system (air, water, oil).

1.3.6.   method of aspiration (naturally aspirated, pressure charged).

1.3.7.   fuel for which the engine is designed (petrol, diesel, NG, LPG, etc.). Bi fuelled vehicles may be grouped with dedicated fuel vehicles providing one of the fuels is common.

1.3.8.   type of catalytic converter (three-way catalyst or other(s)).

1.3.9.   type of particulate trap (with or without).

1.3.10.   exhaust gas recirculation (with or without).

1.3.11.   engine cylinder capacity of the largest engine within the family minus 30 %.

An audit of in-service conformity shall be conducted by the approval authority on the basis of information supplied by the manufacturer. Such information shall include, but is not limited to, the following:

1.4.1.   the name and address of the manufacturer;

1.4.2.   the name, address, telephone and fax numbers and e-mail address of his authorised representative within the areas covered by the manufacturer’s information;

1.4.3.   the model name(s) of the vehicles included in the manufacturer’s information;

1.4.4.   where appropriate, the list of vehicle types covered within the manufacturer’s information, i.e. the in-service family group in accordance with section 1.3;

1.4.5.   the vehicle identification number (VIN) codes applicable to these vehicle types within the in-service family (VIN prefix);

1.4.6.   the numbers of the type-approvals applicable to these vehicle types within the in-service family, including, where applicable, the numbers of all extensions and field fixes/recalls (re-works);

1.4.7.   details of extensions, field fixes/recalls to those type-approvals for the vehicles covered within the manufacturer’s information (if requested by the approval authority);

1.4.8.   the period of time over which the manufacturer’s information was collected;

1.4.9.   the vehicle build period covered within the manufacturer’s information (e.g. vehicles manufactured during the 2001 calendar year);

1.4.10.   the manufacturer’s in-service conformity checking procedure, including:

| (a) | vehicle location method; |
| --- | --- |

(a)

vehicle location method;

| (b) | vehicle selection and rejection criteria; |
| --- | --- |

(b)

vehicle selection and rejection criteria;

| (c) | test types and procedures used for the programme; |
| --- | --- |

(c)

test types and procedures used for the programme;

| (d) | the manufacturer’s acceptance/rejection criteria for the in-service family group; |
| --- | --- |

(d)

the manufacturer’s acceptance/rejection criteria for the in-service family group;

| (e) | geographical area(s) within which the manufacturer has collected information; |
| --- | --- |

(e)

geographical area(s) within which the manufacturer has collected information;

| (f) | sample size and sampling plan used; |
| --- | --- |

(f)

sample size and sampling plan used;

1.4.11.   the results from the manufacturer’s in-service conformity procedure, including:

| (a) | identification of the vehicles included in the programme (whether tested or not). That identification shall include:






  — | model name, |
| --- | --- | --- |

(a)

identification of the vehicles included in the programme (whether tested or not). That identification shall include:

—

model name,

| — | vehicle identification number (VIN), |
| --- | --- |

—

vehicle identification number (VIN),

| — | vehicle registration number, |
| --- | --- |

—

vehicle registration number,

| — | date of manufacture, |
| --- | --- |

—

date of manufacture,

| — | region of use (where known), |
| --- | --- |

—

region of use (where known),

| — | tyres fitted, |
| --- | --- |

—

tyres fitted,

| (b) | the reason(s) for rejecting a vehicle from the sample; |
| --- | --- |

(b)

the reason(s) for rejecting a vehicle from the sample;

| (c) | service history for each vehicle in the sample (including any re-works); |
| --- | --- |

(c)

service history for each vehicle in the sample (including any re-works);

| (d) | repair history for each vehicle in the sample (where known); |
| --- | --- |

(d)

repair history for each vehicle in the sample (where known);

| (e) | test data, including:






  — | date of test, |
| --- | --- | --- |

(e)

test data, including:

—

date of test,

| — | location of test, |
| --- | --- |

—

location of test,

| — | distance indicated on vehicle odometer, |
| --- | --- |

—

distance indicated on vehicle odometer,

| — | test fuel specifications (e.g. test reference fuel or market fuel), |
| --- | --- |

—

test fuel specifications (e.g. test reference fuel or market fuel),

| — | test conditions (temperature, humidity, dynamometer inertia weight), |
| --- | --- |

—

test conditions (temperature, humidity, dynamometer inertia weight),

| — | dynamometer settings (e.g. power setting), |
| --- | --- |

—

dynamometer settings (e.g. power setting),

| — | test results (from at least three different vehicles per family), |
| --- | --- |

—

test results (from at least three different vehicles per family),

1.4.12.   records of indication from the OBD system.

2.   The information gathered by the manufacturer shall be sufficiently comprehensive to ensure that in-service performance can be assessed for normal conditions of use as defined in section 1 and in a way representative of the manufacturer’s geographic penetration.

For the purpose of this Regulation, the manufacturer shall not be obliged to carry out an audit of in-service conformity for a vehicle type if he can demonstrate to the satisfaction of the approval authority that the annual sales of that vehicle type in the Community are less than 5 000 per annum.

On the basis of the audit referred to in Section 1.2 the approval authority shall adopt one of the following decisions and actions:

| (a) | decide that the in-service conformity of a vehicle type or a vehicle in-service family is satisfactory and not take any further action; |
| --- | --- |

(a)

decide that the in-service conformity of a vehicle type or a vehicle in-service family is satisfactory and not take any further action;

| (b) | decide that the data provided by the manufacturer is insufficient to reach a decision and request additional information or test data from the manufacturer; |
| --- | --- |

(b)

decide that the data provided by the manufacturer is insufficient to reach a decision and request additional information or test data from the manufacturer;

| (c) | decide that the in-service conformity of a vehicle type, that is part of an in-service family, is unsatisfactory and proceed to have such vehicle type tested in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex I. |
| --- | --- |

(c)

decide that the in-service conformity of a vehicle type, that is part of an in-service family, is unsatisfactory and proceed to have such vehicle type tested in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex I.

Where the manufacturer has been permitted not to carry out an audit for a particular vehicle type in accordance with Section 2, the approval authority may proceed to have such vehicle types tested in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex I.

3.1.   Where type 1 tests are considered necessary to check the conformity of emission control devices with the requirements for their performance while in service, such tests shall be carried out using a test procedure meeting the statistical criteria defined in Appendix 2 to this Annex.

3.2.   The approval authority, in cooperation with the manufacturer, shall select a sample of vehicles with sufficient mileage whose use under normal conditions can be reasonably assured. The manufacturer shall be consulted on the choice of the vehicles in the sample and be allowed to attend the confirmatory checks of the vehicles.

3.3.   The manufacturer shall be authorized, under the supervision of the approval authority, to carry out checks, even of a destructive nature, on those vehicles with emission levels in excess of the limit values with a view to establishing possible causes of deterioration which cannot be attributed to the manufacturer himself. Where the results of the checks confirm such causes, those test results are excluded from the conformity check.

3.4.   Where the approval authority is not satisfied with the results of the tests in accordance with the criteria defined in Appendix 2, the remedial measures referred to to in Article 11(2) and in Annex X to Directive 70/156/EEC are extended to vehicles in service belonging to the same vehicle type which are likely to be affected with the same defects in accordance with section 6 of Appendix 1.

The plan of remedial measures presented by the manufacturer shall be approved by the approval authority. The manufacturer is responsible for the execution of the remedial plan as approved.

The approval authority shall notify its decision to all Member States within 30 days. The Member States may require that the same plan of remedial measures be applied to all vehicles of the same type registered in their territory.

3.5.   If a Member State has established that a vehicle type does not conform to the applicable requirements of Appendix 1 to this Annex, it shall notify without delay the Member State which granted the original type-approval in accordance with the requirements of Article 11(3) of Directive 70/156/EEC.

After that notification and subject to the provision of Article 11(6) of Directive 70/156/EEC, the competent authority of the Member State which granted the original type-approval shall inform the manufacturer that a vehicle type fails to satisfy the requirements of these provisions and that certain measures are expected of the manufacturer. The manufacturer shall submit to the authority, within two months after this notification, a plan of measures to overcome the defects, the substance of which should correspond to the requirements of sections 6.1 to 6,8 of Appendix 1. The competent authority which granted the original type-approval shall, within two months, consult the manufacturer in order to secure agreement on a plan of measures and on carrying out the plan. If the competent authority which granted the original type-approval establishes that no agreement can be reached, the procedure pursuant to Article 11(3) and (4) of Directive 70/156/EEC shall be initiated.

Appendix 1

In-service conformity check

1.   INTRODUCTION

This Appendix sets out the criteria for the in-service conformity control of vehicles type-approved under Directive 70/220/EEC.

2.   SELECTION CRITERIA

The criteria for acceptance of a selected vehicle are defined in sections 2.1 to 2.8.. Information shall be collected by the approval authority by vehicle examination and an interview with the owner/driver.

2.1.   The vehicle shall belong to a vehicle type that is type-approved under Directive 70/220/EEC and covered by a certificate of conformity in accordance with Directive 70/156/EEC. The vehicle shall be registered and used in the European Community.

2.2.   The vehicle shall have been in service for at least 15 000 km or 6 months, whichever is the later, and for no more than 100 000 km or 5 years, whichever is the sooner.

2.3.   There shall be a maintenance record to show that the vehicle has been properly maintained, e. g. has been serviced in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

2.4.   The vehicle shall exhibit no indications of abuse (e. g. racing, overloading, misfuelling, or other misuse), or other factors (e. g. tampering) that could affect emission performance. In the case of vehicles fitted with an OBD system, the fault code and mileage information stored in the computer are taken into account. A vehicle shall not be selected for testing if the information stored in the computer shows that the vehicle has operated after a fault code was stored and a relatively prompt repair was not carried out.

2.5.   There shall have been no unauthorized major repair to the engine or major repair of the vehicle.

2.6.   The lead content and sulphur content of a fuel sample from the vehicle tank shall meet the applicable standards laid down in Directive 98/70/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council (1) and there shall be no evidence of misfuelling. Checks may be done in the tailpipe etc.

2.7.   There shall be no indication of any problem that might jeopardize the safety of laboratory personnel.

2.8.   All anti-pollution system components on the vehicle shall be in conformity with the applicable type-approval.

3.   DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE

Diagnosis and any normal maintenance necessary shall be performed on vehicles accepted for testing, prior to measuring exhaust emissions, in accordance with the procedure laid down in section 3.1 to 3.7.

3.1.   The following checks shall be carried out: checks on air filter, all drive belts, all fluid levels, radiator cap, all vacuum hoses and electrical wiring related to the antipollution system for integrity; checks on ignition, fuel metering and pollution control device components for maladjustments and/or tampering. All discrepancies shall be recorded.

3.2.   The OBD system shall be checked for proper functioning. Any malfunction indications in the OBD memory shall be recorded and the requisite repairs shall be carried out. If the OBD malfunction indicator registers a malfunction during a preconditioning cycle, the fault may be identified and repaired. The test may be re-run and the results of that repaired vehicle used.

3.3.   The ignition system shall be checked and defective components replaced, for example spark plugs, cables, etc.

3.4.   The compression shall be checked. If the result is unsatisfactory the vehicle shall be rejected.

3.5.   The engine parameters shall be checked to the manufacturer’s specifications and adjusted if necessary.

3.6.   If the vehicle is within 800 km of a scheduled maintenance service, that service shall be performed according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Regardless of odometer reading, the oil and air filter may be changed at the request of the manufacturer.

3.7.   Upon acceptance of the vehicle, the fuel shall be replaced with appropriate emission test reference fuel, unless the manufacturer accepts the use of market fuel.

4.   IN-SERVICE TESTING

4.1.   When a check on vehicles is deemed necessary, emission tests in accordance with Annex III to Directive 70/220/EEC shall be performed on pre-conditioned vehicles selected in accordance with the requirements of sections 2 and 3 of this Appendix.

4.2.   Vehicles equipped with an OBD system may be checked for proper in-service functionality of the malfunction indication, etc., in relation to levels of emissions (e. g. the malfunction indication limits defined in Annex XI to Directive 70/220/EEC) for the type-approved specifications.

4.3.   The OBD system may be checked, for example, for levels of emissions above the applicable limit values with no malfunction indication, systematic erroneous activation of the malfunction indication and identified faulty or deteriorated components in the OBD system.

4.4.   If a component or system operates in a manner not covered by the particulars in the type-approval certificate and/or information package for such vehicle types and such deviation has not been authorized under Article 5(3) or (4) of Directive 70/156/EEC, with no malfunction indication by the OBD, the component or system shall not be replaced prior to emission testing, unless it is determined that the component or system has been tampered with or abused in such a manner that the OBD does not detect the resulting malfunction.

5.   EVALUATION OF RESULTS

5.1.   The test results are submitted to the evaluation procedure in accordance with Appendix 2 to this Annex.

5.2.   Test results shall not be multiplied by deterioration factors.

6.   PLAN OF REMEDIAL MEASURES

6.1.   The approval authority shall request the manufacturer to submit a plan of remedial measures to remedy the non-compliance when more than one vehicle is found to be an outlying emitter that meets either of the following conditions:

| (a) | meets the conditions set out in section 3.2.3 of Appendix 4 to UN/ECE Regulation 83 and both the type-approval authority and the manufacturer agree that the excess emission is due to the same cause, or |
| --- | --- |

(a)

meets the conditions set out in section 3.2.3 of Appendix 4 to UN/ECE Regulation 83 and both the type-approval authority and the manufacturer agree that the excess emission is due to the same cause, or

| (b) | meets the conditions set out in section 3.2.4 of Appendix 4 to UN/ECE Regulation 83 and the type-approval authority has determined that the excess emission is due to the same cause. |
| --- | --- |

(b)

meets the conditions set out in section 3.2.4 of Appendix 4 to UN/ECE Regulation 83 and the type-approval authority has determined that the excess emission is due to the same cause.

6.2.   The plan of remedial measures shall be filed with the approval authority not later than 60 working days from the date of the notification referred to in section 6.1. The approval authority shall within 30 working days declare its approval or disapproval of the plan of remedial measures. However, where the manufacturer can demonstrate, to the satisfaction of the competent approval authority, that further time is required to investigate the non-compliance in order to submit a plan of remedial measures, an extension is granted.

6.3.   The remedial measures shall apply to all vehicles likely to be affected by the same defect. The need to amend the type-approval documents shall be assessed.

6.4.   The manufacturer shall provide a copy of all communications related to the plan of remedial measures, and shall also maintain a record of the recall campaign, and supply regular status reports to the approval authority.

The plan of remedial measures shall include the requirements set out in points 6.5.1 to 6.5.11. The manufacturer shall assign a unique identifying name or number to the plan of remedial measures.

6.5.1.   A description of each vehicle type included in the plan of remedial measures.

6.5.2.   A description of the specific modifications, alterations, repairs, corrections, adjustments, or other changes to be made to bring the vehicles into conformity including a brief summary of the data and technical studies which support the manufacturer’s decision as to the particular measures to be taken to correct the non-conformity.

6.5.3.   A description of the method by which the manufacturer informs the vehicle owners.

6.5.4.   A description of the proper maintenance or use, if any, which the manufacturer stipulates as a condition of eligibility for repair under the plan of remedial measures, and an explanation of the manufacturer’s reasons for imposing any such condition. No maintenance or use conditions may be imposed unless it is demonstrably related to the non-conformity and the remedial measures.

6.5.5.   A description of the procedure to be followed by vehicle owners to obtain correction of the non-conformity. This shall include a date after which the remedial measures may be taken, the estimated time for the workshop to perform the repairs and where they can be done. The repair shall be done expediently, within a reasonable time after delivery of the vehicle.

6.5.6.   A copy of the information transmitted to the vehicle owner.

6.5.7.   A brief description of the system which the manufacturer uses to assure an adequate supply of component or systems for fulfilling the remedial action. It shall be indicated when there will be an adequate supply of components or systems to initiate the campaign.

6.5.8.   A copy of all instructions to be sent to those persons who are to perform the repair.

6.5.9.   A description of the impact of the proposed remedial measures on the emissions, fuel consumption, driveability, and safety of each vehicle type, covered by the plan of remedial measures with data, technical studies, etc. which support these conclusions.

6.5.10.   Any other information, reports or data the approval authority may reasonably determine is necessary to evaluate the plan of remedial measures.

6.5.11.   Where the plan of remedial measures includes a recall, a description of the method for recording the repair shall be submitted to the approval authority. If a label is used, an example of it shall be submitted.

6.6.   The manufacturer may be required to conduct reasonably designed and necessary tests on components and vehicles incorporating a proposed change, repair, or modification to demonstrate the effectiveness of the change, repair, or modification.

6.7.   The manufacturer shall be responsible for keeping a record of every vehicle recalled and repaired and the workshop which performed the repair. The approval authority shall have access to the record on request for a period of 5 years from the implementation of the plan of remedial measures.

6.8.   The repair and/or modification or addition of new equipment shall be recorded in a certificate supplied by the manufacturer to the vehicle owner.

---

(1)  
  OJ L 350, 28.12.1998, p. 58.

Appendix 2

Statistical procedure for in-service conformity testing

1.   This procedure shall be used to verify the in-service conformity requirements for the type 1 test. The applicable statistical method shall be the one set out in Appendix 4 to UN/ECE Regulation No 83, with the exceptions set out in sections 2, 3 and 4.

2.   Footnote 1 shall not apply.

3.   In paragraphs 3.2.3.2.1 and 3.2.4.2 of Appendix 4 to UN/ECE Regulation No 83, the reference to paragraph 6 of Appendix 3 shall be understood as reference to Section 6 of Appendix 1 to Annex XV to this Regulation.

4.   In Figure 4/1. of Appendix 4 to UN/ECE Regulation No 83, the following shall apply:

| (a) | the references to paragraph 8.2.1 shall be understood as reference to Section 1.1 of Annex XV to this Regulation; |
| --- | --- |

(a)

the references to paragraph 8.2.1 shall be understood as reference to Section 1.1 of Annex XV to this Regulation;

| (b) | the reference to Appendix 3 shall be understood as reference to Appendix 1 of Annex XV to this Regulation; |
| --- | --- |

(b)

the reference to Appendix 3 shall be understood as reference to Appendix 1 of Annex XV to this Regulation;

| (c) | footnote 1 shall be understood as follows: In this case, TAA means the approval authority that granted the type-approval according to Directive 70/220/EC. |
| --- | --- |

(c)

footnote 1 shall be understood as follows: In this case, TAA means the approval authority that granted the type-approval according to Directive 70/220/EC.

ANNEX XVI

REQUIREMENTS FOR VEHICLES THAT USE A REAGENT FOR THE EXHAUST AFTERTREATMENT SYSTEM

1.   INTRODUCTION

This Annex sets out the requirements for vehicles that rely on the use of a reagent for the aftertreatment system in order to reduce emissions.

2.   REAGENT INDICATION

2.1.   The vehicle shall include a specific indicator on the dashboard that informs the driver of low levels of reagent in the reagent storage tank and of when the reagent tank becomes empty.

3.   DRIVER WARNING SYSTEM

3.1.   The vehicle shall include a warning system consisting of visual alarms that informs the driver when the reagent level is low, that the tank soon needs to be refilled, or the reagent is not of a quality specified by the manufacturer. The warning system may also include an audible component to alert the driver.

3.2.   The warning system shall escalate in intensity as the reagent approaches empty. It shall culminate in a driver notification that can not be easily defeated or ignored. It shall not be possible to turn off the system until the reagent has been replenished.

3.3.   The visual warning shall display a message indicating a low level of reagent. The warning shall not be the same as the warning used for the purposes of OBD or other engine maintenance. The warning shall be sufficiently clear for the driver to understand that the reagent level is low (e.g. ‘urea level low’, ‘AdBlue level low’, or ‘reagent low’).

3.4.   The warning system does not initially need to be continuously activated, however the warning shall escalate so that it becomes continuous as the level of the reagent approaches the point where the driver inducement system in Section 8 comes into effect. An explicit warning shall be displayed (e.g. ‘fill up urea’, ‘fill up AdBlue’, or ‘fill up reagent’). The continuous warning system may be temporarily interrupted by other warning signals providing important safety related messages.

3.5.   The warning system shall activate at a distance equivalent to a driving range of at least 2 400 km in advance to the reagent tank becoming empty.

4.   IDENTIFICATION OF INCORRECT REAGENT

4.1.   The vehicle shall include a means of determining that a reagent corresponding to the characteristics declared by the manufacturer and recorded in Appendix 3 to Annex I to this Regulation is present on the vehicle.

4.2.   If the reagent in the storage tank does not correspond to the minimum requirements declared by the manufacturer the driver warning system in section 3 shall be activated and shall display a message indicating an appropriate warning (e.g. ‘incorrect urea detected’, ‘incorrect AdBlue detected’, or ‘incorrect reagent detected’). If the reagent quality is not rectified within 50 km of the activation of the warning system then the driver inducement requirements of section 8 shall apply.

5.   REAGENT CONSUMPTION MONITORING

5.1.   The vehicle shall include a means of determining reagent consumption and providing off-board access to consumption information.

5.2.   Average reagent consumption and average demanded reagent consumption by the engine system shall be available via the serial port of the standard diagnostic connector. Data shall be available over the previous complete 2 400 km period of vehicle operation.

5.3.   In order to monitor reagent consumption, at least the following parameters within the vehicle shall be monitored:

| (a) | the level of reagent in the on-vehicle storage tank; |
| --- | --- |

(a)

the level of reagent in the on-vehicle storage tank;

| (b) | the flow of reagent or injection of reagent as close as technically possible to the point of injection into an exhaust aftertreatment system. |
| --- | --- |

(b)

the flow of reagent or injection of reagent as close as technically possible to the point of injection into an exhaust aftertreatment system.

5.4.   A deviation of more than 50 % between the average reagent consumption and the average demanded reagent consumption by the engine system over a period of 30 minutes of vehicle operation, shall result in the activation of the driver warning system in section 3, which shall display a message indicating an appropriate warning (e.g. ‘urea dosing malfunction’, ‘AdBlue dosing malfunction’, or ‘reagent dosing malfunction’). If the reagent consumption is not rectified within 50 km of the activation of the warning system then the driver inducement requirements of section 8 shall apply.

5.5.   In the case of interruption in reagent dosing activity the driver warning system as referred to in section 3 shall be activated, which shall display a message indicating an appropriate warning. This activation shall not be required where the interruption is demanded by the engine ECU because the vehicle operating conditions are such that the vehicle's emission performance does not require reagent dosing, provided that the manufacturer has clearly informed the approval authority when such operating conditions apply. If the reagent dosing is not rectified within 50 km of the activation of the warning system then the driver inducement requirements of section 8 shall apply.

6.   MONITORING NOx EMISSIONS

6.1.   As an alternative to the monitoring requirements in section 4 and 5 manufacturers may use exhaust gas sensors directly to sense excess NOx levels in the exhaust.

6.2.   The manufacturer shall demonstrate that use of these sensors and any other sensors on the vehicle, results in the activation of the driver warning system as referred to in section 3, the display of a message indicating an appropriate warning (e.g. ‘emissions too high — check urea’, ‘emissions too high — check AdBlue’, ‘emissions too high — check reagen’t)., and the driver inducement system as referred to in section 8.3, when the situations referred to in section 4.2, 5.4.or 5,5 occur.

7.   STORAGE OF FAILURE INFORMATION

7.1.   Where reference is made to this section, a non-erasable Parameter Identifier (PID) shall be stored identifying the reason for the inducement system activation. The vehicle shall retain a record of the PID and the distance travelled by the vehicle during the inducement system activation for at least 800 days or 30 000 km of vehicle operation. The PID shall be made available via the serial port of a standard diagnostic connector upon request of a generic scan tool.

7.2.   Malfunctions in the reagent dosing system attributed to technical failures (e.g. mechanical or electrical faults) shall also be subject to the OBD requirements in Annex XI.

8.   DRIVER INDUCEMENT SYSTEM

8.1.   The vehicle shall include a driver inducement system to ensure that the vehicle operates with a functioning emissions control system at all times. The inducement system shall be designed so as to ensure that the vehicle can not operate with an empty reagent tank.

8.2.   The inducement system shall activate at the latest when the level of reagent in the tank reaches a level equivalent to the average driving range of the vehicle with a complete tank of fuel. The system shall also activate when the failures in sections 4, 5 or 6 have occurred, depending on the NOx monitoring approach. The detection of an empty reagent tank and the failures mentioned in sections 4, 5 or 6 shall result in the failure information storage requirements of section 7 coming into effect.

The manufacturer shall select which type of inducement system to install. The options for a system are described in following points 8.3.1, 8.3.2, 8.3.3 and 8.3.4.

8.3.1.   A ‘no engine restart after countdown’ approach allows a countdown of restarts or distance remaining once the inducement system activates. Engine starts initiated by the vehicle control system, such as start-stop systems, are not included in this countdown. Engine restarts shall be prevented immediately after the reagent tank becomes empty or a distance equivalent to a complete tank of fuel has been exceeded since the activation of the inducement system, whichever occurs earlier.

8.3.2.   A ‘no start after refuelling’ system results in a vehicle being unable to start after re-fuelling if the inducement system has activated.

8.3.3.   A ‘fuel-lockout’ approach prevents the vehicle from being refuelled by locking the fuel filler system after the inducement system activates. The lockout system shall be robust to prevent it being tampered with.

8.3.4.   A ‘performance restriction’ approach restricts the speed of the vehicle after the inducement system activates. The level of speed limitation shall be noticeable to the driver and significantly reduce the maximum speed of the vehicle. Such limitation shall enter into operation gradually or after an engine start. Shortly before engine restarts are prevented, the speed of the vehicle shall not exceed 50 km/h. Engine restarts shall be prevented immediately after the reagent tank becomes empty or a distance equivalent to a complete tank of fuel has been exceeded since the activation of inducement system, whichever occurs earlier.

8.4.   Once the inducement system has fully activated and disabled the vehicle, the inducement system shall only be deactivated if the quantity of reagent added to the vehicle is equivalent to 2 400 km average driving range, or the failures specified in sections 4, 5, or 6 have been rectified. After a repair has been carried out to correct a fault where the OBD system has been triggered under point 7.2, the inducement system may be reinitialised via the OBD serial port (e.g. by a generic scan tool) to enable the vehicle to be restarted for self-diagnosis purposes. The vehicle shall operate for a maximum of 50 km to enable the success of the repair to be validated. The inducement system shall be fully reactivated if the fault persists after this validation.

8.5.   The driver warning system referred to in section 3 shall display a message indicating clearly:

| (a) | the number of remaining restarts and/or the remaining distance; and |
| --- | --- |

(a)

the number of remaining restarts and/or the remaining distance; and

| (b) | the conditions under which the vehicle can be restarted. |
| --- | --- |

(b)

the conditions under which the vehicle can be restarted.

8.6.   The driver inducement system shall be deactivated when the conditions for its activation have ceased to exist. The driver inducement system shall not be automatically deactivated without the reason for its activation having been remedied.

8.7.   Detailed written information fully describing the functional operation characteristics of the driver inducement system shall be provided to the approval authority at the time of approval.

8.8.   As part of the application for type-approval under this Regulation, the manufacturer shall demonstrate the operation of the driver warning and inducement systems.

9.   INFORMATION REQUIREMENTS

9.1.   The manufacturer shall provide all owners of new vehicles written information about the emission control system. This information shall state that if the vehicle emission control system is not functioning correctly, the driver shall be informed of a problem by the driver warning system and that the driver inducement system shall consequentially result in the vehicle being unable to start.

9.2.   The instructions shall indicate requirements for the proper use and maintenance of vehicles, including the proper use of consumable reagents.

9.3.   The instructions shall specify if consumable reagents have to be refilled by the vehicle operator between normal maintenance intervals. They shall indicate how the driver should refill the reagent tank. The information shall also indicate a likely rate of reagent consumption for that type of vehicle and how often it should be replenished.

9.4.   The instructions shall specify that use of, and refilling of, a required reagent of the correct specifications is mandatory for the vehicle to comply with the certificate of conformity issued for that vehicle type.

9.5.   The instructions shall state that it may be a criminal offence to use a vehicle that does not consume any reagent if it is required for the reduction of emissions.

9.6.   The instructions shall explain how the warning system and driver inducement systems work. In addition, the consequences of ignoring the warning system and not replenishing the reagent shall be explained.

10.   OPERATING CONDITIONS OF THE AFTERTREATMENT SYSTEM

Manufacturers shall ensure that the emission control system retains its emission control function during all ambient conditions regularly found in the European Union, especially at low ambient temperatures. This includes taking measures to prevent the complete freezing of the reagent during parking times of up to 7 days at 258 K (–15 °C) with the reagent tank 50 % full. If the reagent has frozen, the manufacturer shall ensure that reagent shall be available for use within 20 minutes of the vehicle starting at 258 K (–15 °C) measured inside the reagent tank, so as to ensure correct operation of the emission control system.

ANNEX XVII

AMENDMENTS TO REGULATION (EC) No 715/2007

Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 is amended as follows:

1.   The following paragraph 6 shall be added to Article 10:

‘6.   The 5,0 mg/km emission limit for mass of particulate matter referred to in Tables 1 and 2 of Annex I shall be effective from the applicable dates set out in paragraphs 1, 2 and 3.

The 4,5 mg/km emission limit for mass of particulate matter and the particle number limit referred to in Tables 1 and 2 of Annex I shall be effective from 1 September 2011 for the type-approval on new types of vehicles and from 1 January 2013 for all new vehicles sold, registered or put into service in the Community.’

2.   Tables 1 and 2 of Annex I are replaced by the following tables:

‘Table 1

Euro 5 Emission Limits

| | Reference mass
  (RM)
  (kg) | Limit values |
| --- | --- | --- |
| Mass of carbon monoxide
  (CO) | Mass of total hydrocarbons
  (THC) | Mass of non-methane hydrocarbons
  (NMHC) | Mass of oxides of nitrogen
  (NOx) | Combined mass of hydrocarbons and oxides of nitrogen
  (THC + NOx) | Mass of particulate matter (1)

  (PM) | Number of particles (2)

  (P) |
| L1

  (mg/km) | L2

  (mg/km) | L3

  (mg/km) | L4

  (mg/km) | L2 + L4

  (mg/km) | L5

  (mg/km) | L6

  (#/km) |
| Category | Class | | PI | CI | PI | CI | PI | CI | PI | CI | PI | CI | PI (3) | CI | PI | CI |
| M | — | All | 1 000 | 500 | 100 | — | 68 | — | 60 | 180 | — | 230 | 5,0/4,5 | 5,0/4,5 | — | 6,0 x 1011 |
| N1 | I | RM ≤ 1 305 | 1 000 | 500 | 100 | — | 68 | — | 60 | 180 | — | 230 | 5,0/4,5 | 5,0/4,5 | — | 6,0 × 1011 |
| II | 1 305 < RM ≤ 1 760 | 1 810 | 630 | 130 | — | 90 | — | 75 | 235 | — | 295 | 5,0/4,5 | 5,0/4,5 | — | 6,0 × 1011 |
| III | 1 760 < RM | 2 270 | 740 | 160 | — | 108 | — | 82 | 280 | — | 350 | 5,0/4,5 | 5,0/4,5 | — | 6,0 × 1011 |
| N2 | — | All | 2 270 | 740 | 160 | — | 108 | — | 82 | 280 | — | 350 | 5,0/4,5 | 5,0/4,5 | — | 6,0 × 1011 |
| Key: PI = Positive Ignition, CI = Compression Ignition |

Reference mass

(RM)

(kg)

Limit values

Mass of carbon monoxide

(CO)

Mass of total hydrocarbons

(THC)

Mass of non-methane hydrocarbons

(NMHC)

Mass of oxides of nitrogen

(NOx)

Combined mass of hydrocarbons and oxides of nitrogen

(THC + NOx)

Mass of particulate matter (1)

(PM)

Number of particles (2)

(P)

L1

(mg/km)

L2

(mg/km)

L3

(mg/km)

L4

(mg/km)

L2 + L4

(mg/km)

L5

(mg/km)

L6

(#/km)

Category

Class

PI

CI

PI

CI

PI

CI

PI

CI

PI

CI

PI (3)

CI

PI

CI

M

—

All

1 000

500

100

—

68

—

60

180

—

230

5,0/4,5

5,0/4,5

—

6,0 x 1011

N1

I

RM ≤ 1 305

1 000

500

100

—

68

—

60

180

—

230

5,0/4,5

5,0/4,5

—

6,0 × 1011

II

1 305 < RM ≤ 1 760

1 810

630

130

—

90

—

75

235

—

295

5,0/4,5

5,0/4,5

—

6,0 × 1011

III

1 760 < RM

2 270

740

160

—

108

—

82

280

—

350

5,0/4,5

5,0/4,5

—

6,0 × 1011

N2

—

All

2 270

740

160

—

108

—

82

280

—

350

5,0/4,5

5,0/4,5

—

6,0 × 1011

Key: PI = Positive Ignition, CI = Compression Ignition

Table 2

Euro 6 Emission Limits

| | Reference mass
  (RM)
  (kg) | Limit values |
| --- | --- | --- |
| Mass of carbon monoxide
  (CO) | Mass of total hydrocarbons
  (THC) | Mass of non-methane hydrocarbons
  (NMHC) | Mass of oxides of nitrogen
  (NOx) | Combined mass of hydrocarbons and oxides of nitrogen
  (THC + NOx) | Mass of particulate matter (4)

  (PM) | Number of particles (5)

  (P) |
| L1

  (mg/km) | L2

  (mg/km) | L3

  (mg/km) | L4

  (mg/km) | L2 + L4

  (mg/km) | L5

  (mg/km) | L6

  (#/km) |
| Category | Class | | PI | CI | PI | CI | PI | CI | PI | CI | PI | CI | PI (6) | CI | PI (7) | CI (8) |
| M | — | All | 1 000 | 500 | 100 | — | 68 | — | 60 | 80 | — | 170 | 5,0/4,5 | 5,0/4,5 | | 6,0 × 1011 |
| N1 | I | RM ≤ 1 305 | 1 000 | 500 | 100 | — | 68 | — | 60 | 80 | — | 170 | 5,0/4,5 | 5,0/4,5 | | 6,0 × 1011 |
| II | 1 305 < RM ≤ 1 760 | 1 810 | 630 | 130 | — | 90 | — | 75 | 105 | — | 195 | 5,0/4,5 | 5,0/4,5 | | 6,0 × 1011 |
| III | 1 760 < RM | 2 270 | 740 | 160 | — | 108 | — | 82 | 125 | — | 215 | 5,0/4,5 | 5,0/4,5 | | 6,0 × 1011 |
| N2 | — | All | 2 270 | 740 | 160 | — | 108 | — | 82 | 125 | — | 215 | 5,0/4,5 | 5,0/4,5 | | 6,0 × 1011 |
| Key: PI = Positive Ignition, CI = Compression Ignition |

Reference mass

(RM)

(kg)

Limit values

Mass of carbon monoxide

(CO)

Mass of total hydrocarbons

(THC)

Mass of non-methane hydrocarbons

(NMHC)

Mass of oxides of nitrogen

(NOx)

Combined mass of hydrocarbons and oxides of nitrogen

(THC + NOx)

Mass of particulate matter (4)

(PM)

Number of particles (5)

(P)

L1

(mg/km)

L2

(mg/km)

L3

(mg/km)

L4

(mg/km)

L2 + L4

(mg/km)

L5

(mg/km)

L6

(#/km)

Category

Class

PI

CI

PI

CI

PI

CI

PI

CI

PI

CI

PI (6)

CI

PI (7)

CI (8)

M

—

All

1 000

500

100

—

68

—

60

80

—

170

5,0/4,5

5,0/4,5

6,0 × 1011

N1

I

RM ≤ 1 305

1 000

500

100

—

68

—

60

80

—

170

5,0/4,5

5,0/4,5

6,0 × 1011

II

1 305 < RM ≤ 1 760

1 810

630

130

—

90

—

75

105

—

195

5,0/4,5

5,0/4,5

6,0 × 1011

III

1 760 < RM

2 270

740

160

—

108

—

82

125

—

215

5,0/4,5

5,0/4,5

6,0 × 1011

N2

—

All

2 270

740

160

—

108

—

82

125

—

215

5,0/4,5

5,0/4,5

6,0 × 1011

Key: PI = Positive Ignition, CI = Compression Ignition

---

(1)  A revised measurement procedure shall be introduced before the application of the 4,5 mg/km limit value.

1

(2)  A new measurement procedure shall be introduced before the application of the limit value.

2

(3)  Positive ignition particulate mass standards shall apply only to vehicles with direct injection engines.

3

(4)  A revised measurement procedure shall be introduced before the application of the 4,5 mg/km limit value.

4

(5)  A number standard is to be defined for this stage for positive ignition vehicles.

5

(6)  Positive ignition particulate mass standards shall apply only to vehicles with direct injection engines.

6

(7)  A number standard shall be defined before 1 September 2014.’

7

(8)  A new measurement procedure shall be introduced before the application of the limit value.

8

ANNEX XVIII

SPECIAL PROVISIONS REGARDING ANNEX I TO COUNCIL DIRECTIVE 70/156/EEC

3.2.1.1.   Working principle: positive ignition/compression ignition (1)

Four stroke/two stroke/rotary cycle (1)

Fuel: Diesel/Petrol/LPG/NG-Biomethane/Ethanol(E85)/Biodiesel/Hydrogen Four stroke/two stroke/rotary cycle (1)

3.2.2.4.   Vehicle fuel type: Mono fuel, Bi fuel, Flex fuel Four stroke/two stroke/rotary cycle (1)

3.2.2.5.   Maximum amount of biofuel acceptable in fuel (manufacturer’s declared value): ... % by volume’

3.2.4.2.3.3.   Maximum fuel delivery Four stroke/two stroke/rotary cycle (1)
   (2): ... mm3/stroke or cycle at an engine speed of: ... min-1 or, alternatively, a characteristic diagram: ...

Electronic controlled injection: yes/no (1)

3.2.4.2.9.2.   Type(s): .....

Description of the system, in the case of systems other than continuous injection give equivalent details: ...

3.2.4.2.9.3.1.   Make and type of the control unit: ...

3.2.4.2.9.3.2.   Make and type of the fuel regulator: ...

3.2.4.2.9.3.3.   Make and type of air-flow sensor: ...

3.2.4.2.9.3.4.   Make and type of fuel distributor: ...

3.2.4.2.9.3.5.   Make and type of throttle housing: ...

3.2.4.2.9.3.6.   Make and type of water temperature sensor: ...

3.2.4.2.9.3.7.   Make and type of air temperature sensor: ...

3.2.4.2.9.3.8.   Make and type of air pressure sensor: ....

System description, in the case of systems other than continuous injection give equivalent details: ...

3.2.4.3.4.1.   Make and type of the control unit: ...

3.2.4.3.4.3.   Make and type of air-flow sensor: ...

3.2.4.3.4.6.   Make and type of micro switch: ...

3.2.4.3.4.8.   Make and type of throttle housing: ...

3.2.4.3.4.9.   Make and type of water temperature sensor: ...

3.2.4.3.4.10.   Make and type of air temperature sensor: ...

3.2.4.3.4.11.   Make and type of air pressure sensor: ...

3.2.4.3.5.1.   Make(s): ...

3.2.4.3.5.2.   Type(s): ...

3.2.8.2.1.   Type: air-air/air-water (1)

3.2.8.3.   Intake depression at rated engine speed and at 100 % load (compression ignition engines only)

Minimum allowable: ... kPa

Maximum allowable: ... kPa

3.2.9.3.   Maximum allowable exhaust back pressure at rated engine speed and at 100 % load (compression ignition engines only): ... kPa

3.2.11.1.   Maximum lift of valves, angles of opening and closing, or timing details of alternative distribution systems, in relation to dead centres. For variable timing system, minimum and maximum timing: ...

Additional pollution control devices (if any, and if not covered by another heading)

3.2.12.2.1.1.   Number of catalytic converters and elements (provide the information below for each separate unit): ...

Regeneration systems/method of exhaust after-treatment systems, description: ...

3.2.12.2.1.11.1.   The number of Type 1 operating cycles, or equivalent engine test bench cycles, between two cycles where regenerative phases occur under the conditions equivalent to Type 1 test (Distance ‘D’ in figure 1 in Annex 13 to UN/ECE Regulation 83): ...

3.2.12.2.1.11.2.   Description of method employed to determine the number of cycles between two cycles where regenerative phases occur: ...

3.2.12.2.1.11.3.   Parameters to determine the level of loading required before regeneration occurs (i.e. temperature, pressure etc.): ...

3.2.12.2.1.11.4.   Description of method used to load system in the test procedure described in paragraph 3.1., Annex 13 to UN/ECE Regulation 83: ...

3.2.12.2.1.11.5.   Normal operating temperature range (K):

3.2.12.2.1.11.6.   Consumable reagents (where appropriate):

3.2.12.2.1.11.7.   Type and concentration of reagent needed for catalytic action (where appropriate):

3.2.12.2.1.11.8.   Normal operational temperature range of reagent (where appropriate):

3.2.12.2.1.11.9.   International standard (where appropriate):

3.2.12.2.1.11.10.   Frequency of reagent refill: continuous/maintenance (1) (where appropriate)

3.2.12.2.1.12.   Make of catalytic converter:

3.2.12.2.1.13.   Identifying part number:

3.2.12.2.2.4.   Make of oxygen sensor:

3.2.12.2.2.5.   Identifying part number:

3.2.12.2.4.2.   Water cooled system: yes/no (1)

3.2.12.2.6.4.1.   The number of Type 1 operating cycles, or equivalent engine test bench cycle, between two cycles where regeneration phases occur under the conditions equivalent to Type 1 test (Distance ‘D’ in figure 1 in Annex 13 to UN/ECE Regulation 83): ...

3.2.12.2.6.4.2.   Description of method employed to determine the number of cycles between two cycles where regenerative phases occur: ...

3.2.12.2.6.4.3.   Parameters to determine the level of loading required before regeneration occurs (i.e. temperature, pressure, etc.): ...

3.2.12.2.6.4.4.   Description of method used to load system in the test procedure described in paragraph 3.1., Annex 13 to UN/ECE Regulation 83: ...

3.2.12.2.6.5.   Make of particulate trap:

3.2.12.2.6.6.   Identifying part number:

The following additional information shall be provided by the vehicle manufacturer for the purposes of enabling the manufacture of OBD- compatible replacement or service parts and diagnostic tools and test equipment.

3.2.12.2.7.6.1.   A description of the type and number of the pre-conditioning cycles used for the original type-approval of the vehicle.

3.2.12.2.7.6.2.   A description of the type of the OBD demonstration cycle used for the original type-approval of the vehicle for the component monitored by the OBD system.

3.2.12.2.7.6.3.   A comprehensive document describing all sensed components with the strategy for fault detection and MI activation (fixed number of driving cycles or statistical method), including a list of relevant secondary sensed parameters for each component monitored by the OBD system. A list of all OBD output codes and format used (with an explanation of each) associated with individual emission related power-train components and individual non-emission related components, where monitoring of the component is used to determine MI activation. In particular, a comprehensive explanation for the data given in service $05 Test ID $21 to FF and the data given in service $06 shall be provided. In the case of vehicle types that use a communication link in accordance with ISO 15765-4 ‘Road vehicles diagnostics on controller area network (CAN) — part 4: requirements for emissions-related systems’, a comprehensive explanation for the data given in service $06 Test ID $00 to FF, for each OBD monitor ID supported, shall be provided.

3.2.12.2.7.6.4.   The information required by this section may, be defined by completing a table as follows,

| Component | Fault code | Monitoring strategy | Fault detection criteria | MI activation criteria | Secondary parameters | Preconditioning | Demonstration test |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| Catalyst | PO420 | Oxygen sensor 1 and 2 signals | Difference between sensor 1 and sensor 2 signals | 3rd cycle | Engine speed, engine load, A/F mode, catalyst temperature | Two Type 1 cycles | Type 1 |

Component

Fault code

Monitoring strategy

Fault detection criteria

MI activation criteria

Secondary parameters

Preconditioning

Demonstration test

Catalyst

PO420

Oxygen sensor 1 and 2 signals

Difference between sensor 1 and sensor 2 signals

3rd cycle

Engine speed, engine load, A/F mode, catalyst temperature

Two Type 1 cycles

Type 1

3.2.15.1.   EC type-approval number according to Council Directive 70/221/EEC (OJ L 76, 6.4.1970, p. 23) (when the Directive will be amended to cover tanks for gaseous fuels) or approval number of UN/ECE Regulation 67’

3.2.16.1.   EC type-approval number according to Directive 70/221/EEC (when the Directive will be amended to cover tanks for gaseous fuels) or approval number of UN/ECE Regulation 110: ...’

Engines or motor combinations

3.4.1.   Hybrid Electric Vehicle: yes/no (1)

3.4.2.   Category of Hybrid Electric vehicle

Off Vehicle Charging/Not Off Vehicle Charging (1)

Operating mode switch: with/without (1)

Selectable modes

3.4.3.1.1.   Pure electric: yes/no (1)

3.4.3.1.2.   Pure fuel consuming: yes/no (1)

3.4.3.1.3.   Hybrid modes: yes/no (1)

(if yes, short description) ...

Description of the energy storage device: (battery, capacitor, flywheel/generator) ...

3.4.4.1.   Make(s): ...

3.4.4.2.   Type(s): ...

3.4.4.3.   Identification number: ...

3.4.4.4.   Kind of electrochemical couple: ...

3.4.4.5.   Energy: ... (for battery: voltage and capacity Ah in 2 h, for capacitor: J, ...)

3.4.4.6.   Charger: on board/external/without (1)

Electric machines (describe each type of electric machine separately)

3.4.5.1.   Make: ...

3.4.5.2.   Type: ...

Primary use: traction motor/generator

3.4.5.3.1.   When used as traction motor: monomotor/multimotors (number): ...

3.4.5.4.   Maximum power: ... kW

Working principle:

3.4.5.5.1.   direct current/alternating current/number of phases:

3.4.5.5.2.   separate excitation/series/compound (1)

3.4.5.5.3.   synchronous/asynchronous (1)

Control unit

3.4.6.1.   Make(s): ...

3.4.6.2.   Type(s): ...

3.4.6.3.   Identification number: ...

Power controller

3.4.7.1.   Make: ...

3.4.7.2.   Type: ...

3.4.7.6.3.   Identification number: ...

3.4.8.   Vehicle electric range ... km (according to Annex 7 of Regulation No 101)

3.4.9.   Manufacturer’s recommendation for preconditioning: ...

3.5.2.   Fuel consumption (provide for each reference fuel tested)

6.6.1.   Tyre/wheel combination(s)

| (a) | for all tyre options indicate size designation, load-capacity index, speed category symbol, rolling resistance to ISO 28580 (where applicable) |
| --- | --- |

(a)

for all tyre options indicate size designation, load-capacity index, speed category symbol, rolling resistance to ISO 28580 (where applicable)

| (b) | for tyres of category Z intended to be fitted on vehicles whose maximum speed exceeds 300 km/h equivalent information shall be provided; for wheels indicate rim size(s) and off-set(s) |
| --- | --- |

(b)

for tyres of category Z intended to be fitted on vehicles whose maximum speed exceeds 300 km/h equivalent information shall be provided; for wheels indicate rim size(s) and off-set(s)

9.1.   Type of bodywork: (use codes defined in Annex II, section C): ...

Access to vehicle repair and maintenance information

Address of principal website for access to vehicle repair and maintenance information: ...

16.1.1.   Date from which it is available (no later than 6 months from the date of type approval): ...

16.2.   Terms and conditions of access to website referred to in Section 16.1: ...

16.3.   Format of vehicle repair and maintenance information accessible through website referred to in Section 16.1: ...

---

(1)  Delete where not applicable (there are cases where nothing needs to be deleted when more than one entry is applicable.)

(2)  Specify the tolerance.

ANNEX XIX

SPECIAL PROVISIONS REGARDING ANNEX III TO COUNCIL DIRECTIVE 70/156/EEC

3.2.1.1.   Working principle: positive ignition/compression ignition (1)

Four stroke/two stroke/rotary cycle (1)

Fuel: Diesel/Petrol/LPG/NG-Biomethane/Ethanol(E85)/Biodiesel/Hydrogen (1)

3.2.2.4.   Vehicle fuel type: Mono fuel, Bi fuel, Flex fuel (1)

3.2.2.5.   Maximum amount of biofuel acceptable in fuel (manufacturer’s declared value): ...% by volume

3.2.12.2.   Additional pollution control devices (if any, and if not covered by another heading)

Engines or motor combinations

3.4.1.   Hybrid Electric Vehicle: yes/no (1)

3.4.2.   Category of Hybrid Electric vehicle

Off Vehicle Charging/Not Off Vehicle Charging (1)

6.6.1.   Tyre/wheel combination(s)

| (a) | for all tyre options indicate size designation, load-capacity index, speed category symbol, rolling resistance to ISO 28580 (where applicable) |
| --- | --- |

(a)

for all tyre options indicate size designation, load-capacity index, speed category symbol, rolling resistance to ISO 28580 (where applicable)

| (b) | for tyres of category Z intended to be fitted on vehicles whose maximum speed exceeds 300 km/h equivalent information shall be provided; for wheels indicate rim size(s) and off-set(s) |
| --- | --- |

(b)

for tyres of category Z intended to be fitted on vehicles whose maximum speed exceeds 300 km/h equivalent information shall be provided; for wheels indicate rim size(s) and off-set(s)

9.1.   Type of bodywork: (use codes defined in section C of Annex II): ...

Access to vehicle repair and maintenance information

16.1.   Address of principal website for access to vehicle repair and maintenance information: ...

---

(1)  Delete where not applicable (there are cases where nothing needs to be deleted when more than one entry is applicable)

---